As24 PDF

Business Data
Business Data Cloud Mobility

Intelligence Center Cloud Mobility
Intelligence Centre
Enterprise Computing Solutions
Enterprise Computing Solutions
ón
.N ci
.R a
C rm System Operator Workshop
for IBM i
to fo
(Course code AS24G)
ec ivo
Student Notebook
ERC 11.0
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Dirección General de Formación

CONSEJERÍA DE ECONOMÍA,
EMPLEO Y HACIENDA
Comunidad de Madrid UNIÓN EUROPEA

FONDO SOCIAL EUROPEO
El Fondo Social Europeo invierte en tu futuro
EDUCATION
S E R V I C E S
EDUCATION
S E R V I C E S
V10.1
cover
IBM Training Front cover
ó n
Student Notebook
.N ci
System Operator Workshop for IBM i
Course code AS24G ERC 11.0
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Trademarks
IBM, the IBM logo, and ibm.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business
Machines Corp., registered in many jurisdictions worldwide.
The following are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation, registered in many
jurisdictions worldwide:
n
AIX® AS/400® DB™
DB2 Universal Database™ DB2® developerWorks®
ó
FileNet® Initiate® iSeries®
i5/OS™ OmniFind® OS/400®
.N ci
Power Systems™ Power® PowerPC®
POWER6® POWER7® POWER8™
Print Services Facility™ Redbooks® System i®
.R a
System p® System Storage® System z®
WebSphere® 400®
C rm
Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in
the United States and other countries.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both.
Microsoft, Windows and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States,
to fo
other countries, or both.
Java™ and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Oracle and/or its affiliates.
ec ivo
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.
VMware and the VMware "boxes" logo and design, Virtual SMP and VMotion are registered
trademarks or trademarks (the "Marks") of VMware, Inc. in the United States and/or other
jurisdictions.
oy s
Other product and service names might be trademarks of IBM or other companies.
pr clu
Ex
February 2016 edition

The information contained in this document has not been submitted to any formal IBM test and is distributed on an “as is” basis without
any warranty either express or implied. The use of this information or the implementation of any of these techniques is a customer
responsibility and depends on the customer’s ability to evaluate and integrate them into the customer’s operational environment. While
each item may have been reviewed by IBM for accuracy in a specific situation, there is no guarantee that the same or similar results will
result elsewhere. Customers attempting to adapt these techniques to their own environments do so at their own risk.
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2001, 2016.

This document may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.
US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
V10.1
Student Notebook
TOC Contents
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Course description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
n
Agenda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii
ó
Unit 1. Power Systems and IBM i concepts and overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Power with IBM i expands on a rich heritage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
.N ci
POWER processor technology roadmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Innovative IBM i technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Central processing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
.R a
What is installed here? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Other system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
C rm
Integrated by design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
IBM i overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Application software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Other licensed programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Disk storage management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
to fo
ASPs: Up to 32 user ASPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Independent ASPs (IASP 33-255) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
What is a partition? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Virtual i partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Integrate System x and BladeCenter with Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
ec ivo
Linux support (POWER and x86) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Java support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Integrated web serving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
PASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Capacity on demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
oy s
Clustering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
IBM i Access Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Console types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
pr clu
Hardware Management Console (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32

Hardware Management Console (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Ex
Unit 2. Reference material and support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
IBM Knowledge Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
IBM i Knowledge Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
IBM i and Power Systems home page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Power Systems support and services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
IBM Redbooks page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
IBM Navigator for i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Contents iii

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook
Unit 3. Overview of 5250 emulation and help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Topic 1: Working with menus and display types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
System displays: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Menu display overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
How to display a menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Menu navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Menu display help (1 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
n
Menu display help (2 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
ó
.N ci
Entry display overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Entry display help (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Entry display help (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
.R a
List display overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
List display help: Opt column versus F20 (enlarge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
Information display overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
C rm
Topic 2: System request and commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Using the System Request panel group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Question . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
TFRSECJOB command or system request opt 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
F9: Retrieve previous command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
to fo
Using the Command Entry display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Retrieve a prior command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Topic 3: Helpful tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Operational Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
ec ivo
Operational Assistant Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32

Assistance levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33
Your choice: Basic or intermediate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
User assistance level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
Information Assistant Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
Information Assistant option one: Where Do I Look for Information? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
oy s
Information Assistant option two: How Can I Comment On Information? . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39

Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40
pr clu
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43
Unit 4. Overview of IBM i Access Client Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1

Ex
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2

What is IBM i Access Client Solutions? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
What you can do with IBM i Access Client Solutions (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
What you can do with IBM i Access Client Solutions (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
IBM i Access Client Solutions main panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Main panel: Left pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
File drop-down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Edit drop-down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Edit - Preferences (1 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
iv System Operator Workshop for IBM i © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016
V10.1
Student Notebook
TOC Edit - Preferences (4 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Edit - Preferences (5 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Actions drop-down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Tools drop-down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Help drop-down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Starting and basic configuration of the IBM i Access Client Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
From where do you download? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Launch IBM i Access Client Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
n
Configuring connection (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
ó
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
.N ci
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
.R a
Unit 5. Overview of IBM Navigator for i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
C rm
Topic 1: What is it and how does it work? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
IBM i Access Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
What is IBM Navigator for i? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
How do you get it? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
What is included? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
to fo
What is not included? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
How it works (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
What is included: Base functions (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
ec ivo

What is included: More LPPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Topic 2: Overview of this GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Enter the URL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Certificate exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Secure port: Sign-on window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
oy s
Web console interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

New controls overview (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
pr clu

New terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Topic 3: Overview of system task page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Set Target System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Ex
System status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Setting up 5250 Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5250 Emulation session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Change Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Unit 6. Messaging concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Contents v

Student Notebook
Types of messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3

Where messages come from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
What is a message queue? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
How are message queues created? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Unit 7. Messaging using 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1
n
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
How are message queues allocated? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
ó
General System Tasks menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
Message menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
.N ci
Option 1: Send Message: SNDMSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
Option 2: Send Message: SNDBRKMSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
Option 3: Display Message: DSPMSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9
.R a
Display your messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Display inquiry messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Option 4: Display QSYSOPR messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
C rm
Display message details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Option 6: Work with Message Queues: WRKMSGQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
How messages are displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
Work with Object Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
to fo
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21
ec ivo
Unit 8. Messaging with IBM Navigator for i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Basic Operations > Send a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Inquiry versus informational message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Request a reply: Send reply to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Send Message: Send to users (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
oy s

pr clu
Send Message: Send to workstations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9

Send Message: Interrupt user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Display Messages: Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Properties: General and Detail tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Customize: View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Ex
Customize: Include . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14

Customize: Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Unit 9. CL command concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Control language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
CL commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
CL command structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6
vi System Operator Workshop for IBM i © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016
V10.1
Student Notebook
TOC Some other CL command facts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Unit 10. CL commands with 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Where to enter a command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Command prompting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
n
F11: Toggle between keywords or choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Conditional parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
ó
Keyword versus Positional command entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Finding a command: Major Command Groups menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
.N ci
Finding a command by category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
.R a
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Unit 11. Concepts: Object, library, and the IFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
C rm
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Topic 1: Object concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Object: A definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Object-based architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
IBM: Supplied objects start with Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
to fo
Working with an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Topic 2: Library and library list concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
What is a library? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Purpose of libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
ec ivo
IBM: Supplied libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13

Native library versus hierarchical structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Library list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Finding an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Quiz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
oy s
Topic 3: Integrated file system concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21

What is the integrated file system? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
pr clu
Overview of the IFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23

File system concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
File systems supported by the IFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
IFS accessed with Windows browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-28
Stream files versus database files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-29
Ex
Locating objects in the IFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30

Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-34
Unit 12. Object management with 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Topic 1: Working with objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
The DATA and FILE menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Work with Objects command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Work with Objects display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Contents vii

Student Notebook
Display Object Description command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-7

Display Object Description details (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-8
Display Object Description details (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-9
Create Duplicate Object command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-10
Copy File command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-11
Topic 2: Working with libraries and library lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-12
Library and Library Commands menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-13
Work with Libraries command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-14
n
Create Library command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-15
Display Library List command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-16
ó
Library List: Add and Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-17
Topic 3: Working with the IFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-18
.N ci
IFS access using 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-19
Work with Object Links display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-20
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-21
.R a
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-22
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-23
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-24
C rm
Unit 13. Object management with IBM Navigator for i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-2
Topic 1: Running commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3
System: Run a command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4
to fo
Run a command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5
Run a command with prompting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6
Topic 2: Creating a library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-7
Databases: Create Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-8
ec ivo
Schemas: New Schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-9

File systems: New Folder (library) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-10
IFS: Display list of libraries (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11
IFS: Display list of libraries (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-12
Databases: Display list of schemas (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-13
Databases: Display list of schemas (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-14
oy s
Display contents of schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-15

Display contents of your team library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-16
pr clu
Topic 3: Object properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-17

Supported actions by object type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-18
Object properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-19
File systems: Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-20
Database: Copy File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-21
Ex
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-22
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-23
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-24
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-25
Unit 14. Introduction to work management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Methods of processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3
What is a job? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4
Types of jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
The lifecycle of a job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6
viii System Operator Workshop for IBM i © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016
V10.1
Student Notebook
TOC Job name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8

What is a job queue? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Job/thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
What is a job description? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
How a user profile relates to a job description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
What is a subsystem? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Subsystem description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
Subsystem configurations shipped by IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
n
Memory pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
Work management overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22
ó
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-25
.N ci
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26
Unit 15. Work management with 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
.R a
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Job description: What is it? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Job description: Library list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
C rm
How a user profile relates to a job description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Work with Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Work with System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
Using the additional function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
to fo
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
Unit 16. Job control with 5250 emulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

ec ivo
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2

Work with User Jobs command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
Work with User Jobs display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
Working with Signed-On Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
Work with Active Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Option 5: Work with Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
oy s
Question . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
Submitting a batch job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11
pr clu
Work with Submitted Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12

Work with Job Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-13
Working with jobs on a job queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15
Working with job scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17
Working with Advanced Job Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19
Ex
Ending a user job abnormally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-20

Disconnecting a user job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-21
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-22
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-23
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-24
Unit 17. Job control with IBM Navigator for i. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Basic Operations: User Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
User Jobs: Include . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
Work Management: Active Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Contents ix

Student Notebook
Active Jobs: Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-6

Active Jobs: Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-7
Active Jobs > Customize your window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-9
Customize this view > Include . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-11
Customize this view > Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-12
Customized to show qualified job name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-13
Job properties (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-14
Job properties (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-15
n
Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-17
Subsystems > Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-18
ó
Active Job Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-19
Explore Qbatch job queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-20
.N ci
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-21
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-22
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-23
.R a
Unit 18. Print concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-2
C rm
IBM i printing process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-3
How are output queues created? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-5
Why did the output end up there? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-6
What can you do with a spool file? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-8
Start Printer Writer command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-9
to fo
Printer load balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-10
Question . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-11
Set an expiration date for spool file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-12
Detach spooled files from jobs: QSPLFACN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-13
ec ivo
Work management overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-14

Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-16
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-17
Unit 19. Print control with 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-2
oy s
Printer menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-3

Work with All Spooled Files (WRKSPLF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-4
pr clu
Work with User Jobs: Spooled Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-5

Change Spooled File Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-6
Delete Expired Spooled files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-7
Work with Output Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-9
Work with Writers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-10
Ex
Restarting a printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-11

Start Printer Writer command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-12
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-13
The flow of a job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-14
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-15
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-16
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-17
Unit 20. IBM i Access Client Solutions Printer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-2
Printer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-3
x System Operator Workshop for IBM i © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016
V10.1
Student Notebook
TOC Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4

Actions: Download, View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5
Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-6
Printer Output View menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-8
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-11
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-12
n
Unit 21. Print control with IBM Navigator for i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2
ó
Basic Operations: Printer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3
Printer Output: Include . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-4
.N ci
Printer Output: Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-5
Printer Output: Individual report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-6
Printer Output: Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-7
.R a
Printer Output: View as PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-8
Options for a spool file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-9
Spool file Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-10
C rm
Properties: General and Printer / Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-11
Properties: Copies/Pages and Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-12
Properties: Layout and Staples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-13
Properties: Overlay and Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-14
Properties: Origin/Expiration and User-defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-15
to fo
Printer Output: Export as ASCII text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-16
Active Jobs: Printer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-17
Work Management: Output Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-18
Add a Printer wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-19
ec ivo
Printers: Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-20

Printers: Printer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-21
System Values: Detach printer output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-22
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-23
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-24
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-25
oy s
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-26

pr clu
Unit 22. Starting and stopping the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
Topic 1: Starting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3
IPL overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-4
IPL speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-6
Ex
Change IPL Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-8

What can you do with the control panel? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-10
Control panel function codes (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-11
Overview of unattended (normal) IPL steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-15
Power On and Off Tasks menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-16
Schedule power on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-17
When to perform an attended (manual) IPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-19
Attended (manual) IPL steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-20
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Contents xi

Student Notebook
Attended IPL: IPL or Install the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-22

Attended IPL: Sign On display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-23
Attended IPL: Select Products to Work with PTFs display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-24
Attended IPL: IPL Options display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-25
Attended IPL: Set Major System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-26
Attended IPL: Define or Change the System at IPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-28
IPL types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-29
What is a system value? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-31
n
System values and IPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-32
System startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-34
ó
Startup program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-35
Automatic IPLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-37
.N ci
System value using 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-39
System values using IBM Navigator for i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-40
Topic 2: Stopping the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-41
.R a
Stopping the system: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-42
Steps prior to power down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-44
Using the Power Down System command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-46
C rm
Controlled power-down with time limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-48
Using the Power push button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-49
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-51
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-52
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-53
to fo
Unit 23. System security concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23-2
Types of security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23-3
ec ivo
Types of security control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23-4

Setting up a new user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23-5
Type of user: Privilege class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23-6
System privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23-8
Group profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23-10
Authorization list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23-11
oy s
Public versus private authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23-12

Object authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23-13
pr clu
System values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23-14

Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23-15
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23-16
Unit 24. System security with 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-1

Ex
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-2

Change Password: CHGPWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-3
Display User Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-4
Enable a disabled user profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-5
Work with Objects by Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-6
Display Object Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-7
Grant Object Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-8
Work with Authorization Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-9
Display Authorization List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-10
Security category system values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-11
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-12
xii System Operator Workshop for IBM i © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016
V10.1
Student Notebook
TOC Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-13

Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-14
Unit 25. System security with IBM Navigator for i. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2
Change Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-3
User profile > Properties (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-4
User profile > Properties (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-5
n
Capabilities: Privilege class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-6
Capabilities: System privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-8
ó
Capabilities: Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-10
User profile: Owned Objects (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-11
.N ci
User profile: Owned Objects (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-12
System Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-13
Password System Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-14
.R a
Authorizing objects: Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-15
Permissions: Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-16
Permissions: Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-17
C rm
Permissions: Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-19
Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-20
New Authorization List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-21
Authorization List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-22
New Group profile (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-23
to fo
New Group profile (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-24
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-25
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-26
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-27
ec ivo
Unit 26. System configuration overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-2
Topic 1: Configuring devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-3
Sample configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-4
Question . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-5
oy s
Locally attached: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-6

LAN attached . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-7
pr clu
Remote attach: Remote workstation controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-8

PC attachment summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-9
Creating device description manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-10
Creating device description automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-11
Power Systems with IBM i consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-13
Ex
Topic 2: Introduction to TCP/IP applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-15

The application layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-16
Client and server relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-17
TCP/IP applications: Ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-18
TCP/IP applications: Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-19
TCP/IP applications: FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-20
TCP/IP applications: Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-21
TCP/IP applications: HTTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-22
TCP/IP applications: DNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-23
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-24
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-25
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Contents xiii

Student Notebook
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26-26
Unit 27. Configuration with 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-2
Topic 1: System values and commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-3
System control system values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-4
Printer device system value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-5
Creating device descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-6
n
Topic 2: Managing devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-8
Display system operator messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-9
ó
Display Messages: Assistance level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-10
Managing devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-11
.N ci
The command used to manage devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-12
Menu to manage communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-14
Command used to manage communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-15
.R a
Topic 3: Managing TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-17
TCP/IP Administration and configure menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-18
Display TCP/IP host name and address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-19
C rm
Is TCP/IP up? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-20
Topic 4: Other configuration tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-21
Work with Hardware Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-22
Work with Hardware Resources: Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-23
Start System Service Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-24
to fo
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-25
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-26
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-27
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-28
ec ivo
Unit 28. Configuration with IBM Navigator for i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-2
System Values: Power control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-3
System Values: Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-4
System Values: Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-5
oy s
System operator message queue (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-6

System operator message queue (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-7
pr clu
Using SST functions (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-8

Using SST functions (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-9
TCP/IP Configuration Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-10
Display interface properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-11
TCP/IP utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-12
Ex
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-13
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-14
Unit 29. Save concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-2
Topic 1: Save concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-3
The save/restore facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-4
Data that can be saved and restored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-5
What you cannot save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-6
What happens when an object is saved? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-7
Save considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-8
xiv System Operator Workshop for IBM i © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016
V10.1
Student Notebook
TOC Free storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-9

Topic 2: Save to tape media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-10
Option 1: Save to tape media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-11
Purposes of tape on Power with IBM i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-12
Using tape labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-13
Question . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-14
Topic 3: Save to save file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-15
Option 2: Save to save file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-16
n
Topic 4: Save to virtual tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-17
Option 3: Save to virtual tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-18
ó
Overview and implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-19
Virtual tape support advantages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-20
.N ci
Virtual tape support considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-22
Topic 5: The tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-23
Tools used to save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-24
Question . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-25
.R a
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-26
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-27
C rm
Unit 30. Save with 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-2
Topic 1: Tape operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-3
Tape menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-4
to fo
Display Tape: DSPTAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-6
Contents of a tape: *LABELS format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-7
Contents of a tape: *SAVRST format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-8
Initialize Tape: INZTAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-9
ec ivo
Topic 2: Save file operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-11

Save File Commands menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-12
Create Save File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-13
Save library to a save file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-14
Other save file commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-15
Topic 3: Virtual tape operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-16
oy s
Overview and implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-17

Image Commands menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-18
pr clu
Create Device Desc and vary on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-19

Create virtual tape image catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-20
Create virtual volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-21
Load Image Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-22
Work with Image Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-23
Ex
Saving to a virtual volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-25

Duplicating virtual volume to physical tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-26
Topic 4: Save menus and commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-27
Save menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-28
Define Save System and User Data Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-29
Operational Assistant backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-30
Automatic default backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-31
Save commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-32
What data is saved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-34
Save menu option 21: Entire system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-35
Save menu option 22: System data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-36
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Contents xv

Student Notebook
Save menu option 23: All user data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-37

Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-38
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-39
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-40
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-41
Unit 31. Save with IBM Navigator for i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31-2
n
Topic 1: Setting up virtual tape support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31-3
Overview and implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31-4
ó
Configuration tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31-5
Create virtual tape device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31-6
.N ci
Device: Make available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31-7
Create Tape Image Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31-8
Create tape image catalog parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31-9
.R a
Add volumes (create virtual images) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31-11
Add volume parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31-12
List virtual volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31-14
C rm
Load the image catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31-15
Topic 2: BRMS function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31-16
Backup, Recovery, and Media Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31-17
BRMS tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31-18
Topic 3: Saving an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31-19
to fo
BRMS: Backup specific items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31-20
System: Run a command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31-21
Prompting the save object command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31-22
Prompting the save library command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31-23
ec ivo
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31-24
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31-25
Unit 32. Restore concepts and overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-2
Restoring objects to disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-3
oy s
Restore menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-4

Restore commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-5
pr clu
What is restored? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-6

Restore menu option 21: System and user data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-7
Restore menu option 22: System data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-8
Restore menu option 23: All user data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-9
Complete system restore (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-10
Ex
Complete system restore (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-12

Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-14
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-15
Unit 33. Problem determination with 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33-2
Problem solving tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33-3
Topic 1: Work with your job and job log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33-5
Work with Active Jobs (WRKACTJOB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33-6
Using the Work with Job command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33-7
Option 10: Job Log or DSPJOBLOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33-8
xvi System Operator Workshop for IBM i © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016
V10.1
Student Notebook
TOC Job log printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-10

Topic 2: Work with problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-12
Problem determination steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-13
Problem Summary Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-14
USERHELP menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-15
TECHHELP menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-17
Option 1 or DSPMSG QSYSOPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-19
Problem Handling menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-20
n
Option 2 or WRKPRB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-21
Status for a problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-23
ó
Analyzing problems with a system reference code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-25
History log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-27
.N ci
Problem analysis: History log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-28
Saving and deleting history logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-29
Topic 3: Other problem determination tools and aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-30
Copy screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-31
.R a
Work with System Status (WRKSYSSTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-32
Work with Disk Status (WRKDSKSTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-34
C rm
Operational Assistant clean up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-35
Functions that are automatically cleaned up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-37
Automated problem management: DSPSRVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-38
PROBLEM2 menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-39
Network Management menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-41
to fo
Network Problem Handling menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-43
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-45
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-46
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-47
ec ivo
Unit 34. Overview of the PTF process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-2
What is a fix or PTF? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-3
PTF process overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-4
Types of fixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-5
oy s
How to determine available PTFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-7

Ordering fixes (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-9
pr clu
Ordering fixes (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-10

Ordering fixes (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-11
PTF group background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-12
When to apply group PTFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-14
PTF maintenance strategy: Preventive service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-16
Ex
PTF maintenance strategy: Corrective service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-17

OS and LPP PTF installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-18
LIC PTFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-19
When to apply Technology Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-20
When to install a Resave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-21
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-23
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-24
Unit 35. PTFs with 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2
Working with PTFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-3
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Contents xvii

Student Notebook
Ordering a fix using ECS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-5

Ordering a fix using the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-6
Receiving a fix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-7
Sample PTF cover letter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-8
Copy the cover letter to IBM i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-9
Display / Print the cover letter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-10
Option 8: Install PTF package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-11
Option 7: Install PTF off a list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-13
n
Install PTF: Similar to PTF menu option 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-14
Display PTF Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-15
ó
Verifying PTF installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-16
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-17
.N ci
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-18
Unit 36. Class summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36-1
.R a
Course summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36-2
Additional education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36-3
Class evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36-4
C rm
System Operator Workshop for IBM i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36-5
Appendix A. Checkpoint solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
xviii System Operator Workshop for IBM i © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016
V10.1
Student Notebook
TMK
Trademarks
The reader should recognize that the following terms, which appear in the content of this training
document, are official trademarks of IBM or other companies:
IBM, the IBM logo, and ibm.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business
Machines Corp., registered in many jurisdictions worldwide.
n
The following are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation, registered in many
ó
jurisdictions worldwide:
AIX® AS/400® DB™
.N ci
DB2 Universal Database™ DB2® developerWorks®
FileNet® Initiate® iSeries®
i5/OS™ OmniFind® OS/400®
.R a
Power Systems™ Power® PowerPC®
POWER6® POWER7® POWER8™
C rm
Print Services Facility™ Redbooks® System i®
System p® System Storage® System z®
WebSphere® 400®
Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in
to fo
the United States and other countries.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both.
Microsoft, Windows and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States,
ec ivo
other countries, or both.

Java™ and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Oracle and/or its affiliates.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.
oy s
VMware and the VMware "boxes" logo and design, Virtual SMP and VMotion are registered
trademarks or trademarks (the "Marks") of VMware, Inc. in the United States and/or other
pr clu
jurisdictions.
Other product and service names might be trademarks of IBM or other companies.
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Trademarks xix

Student Notebook
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
xx System Operator Workshop for IBM i © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016
V10.1
Student Notebook
pref
Course description
Duration: 4 days
n
Purpose
ó
This course enables a new system operator to develop basic to intermediate
level skills needed for day-to-day operations of the Power Systems with IBM
.N ci
i. Specifically, the course explains how to:
• Use the online help and references
.R a
• Send, display, and reply to messages
• Monitor and control jobs, devices, and job and output queues
C rm
• Start and stop the system
• Create and change user profiles
• Use authorization lists and group profiles
to fo
• Manage system configuration
• Save and restore objects, libraries, and the system
• Monitor job and history logs
ec ivo
• Diagnose a system problem

• Order, receive, and apply PTFs
• Perform all of these functions using a 5250 emulation session as well as
IBM i Access Client Solutions and IBMNavigator for i
oy s
Hands-on exercises reinforce the lecture topics and prepare the student to
pr clu
successfully operate a Power Systems with IBM i.
Audience
This course is intended for the person who has responsibility for daily system
Ex
operations.
It is not intended for technical audiences who are seeking an in-depth look at
how the Power Systems with IBM i works. This audience should instead
attend the OL4AG, IBM Technical Introduction.
Prerequisites
None
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Course description xxi

Student Notebook
Objectives
After completing this course, you should be able to:
• Send, display, and respond to messages
• Use the online help and reference materials
• Monitor and control job queues, active jobs, and output queues
n
• Create and change user profiles
ó
• Use authorization lists and group profiles
• Start and stop Power Systems with IBM i
.N ci
• Manage system devices, user display stations, and printers
• Save and restore objects and libraries
.R a
• Monitor job and history logs
C rm
• Diagnose a system problem
• Order, receive, and install PTFs
Curriculum relationship
to fo
This course is part of the Power Systems with IBM i curriculum. There is one
additional operations course:
AS27G Advanced System Operator for IBM i
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
xxii System Operator Workshop for IBM i © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016
V10.1
Student Notebook
pref
Agenda
Day 1
Unit 1: Power Systems and IBM i concepts and overview
Unit 2: Reference material and support
n
Unit 3: Overview of 5250 emulation and help
Exercise 1: Using the keyboard and system displays
ó
Unit 4: Overview of IBM i Access Client Solutions
Exercise 2: Overview of IBM i Client Solutions
.N ci
Unit 5: Overview of IBM Navigator for i
Exercise 3: Overview of IBM Navigator for i
Unit 6: Messaging concepts
.R a
Unit 7: Messaging with 5250 emulation
Exercise 4: Messages with 5250 emulation
Unit 8: Messaging with IBM Navigator for i
C rm
Exercise 5: Messaging with IBM Navigator for i
Unit 9: CL command concepts
Unit 10: CL commands with 5250 emulation
to fo
Day 2
Unit 11: Concepts: Object, library, and the IFS
Unit 12: Object management with 5250 emulation
ec ivo
Exercise 6: Object management with 5250 emulation

Unit 13: Object management with IBM Navigator for i
Exercise 7: Object management with IBM Navigator for i
Unit 14: Introduction to work management
Unit 15: Work management with 5250 emulation
Optional Exercise 8: Work management with 5250 emulation
oy s
Optional Exercise 9: Work management with IBM Navigator for i

pr clu
Unit 16: Job control with 5250 emulation

Exercise 10: Job control with 5250 emulation
Unit 17: Job control with IBM Navigator for i
Exercise 11: Job control with IBM Navigator for i
Unit 18: Print concepts
Unit 19: Print control with 5250 emulation
Ex
Exercise 12: Print control with 5250 emulation
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Agenda xxiii

Student Notebook
Day 3
Unit 20: IBM i Access Client Solutions Printer Output
Exercise 13: Print with IBM i Access Client Solutions
Unit 21: Print control with IBM Navigator for i
Exercise 14: Print control with IBM Navigator for i
Unit 22: Starting and stopping the system
n
Exercise 15: System values with 5250 emulation
Exercise 16: System values with IBM Navigator for i
Unit 23: System security concepts
ó
Unit 24: System security with 5250 emulation
Exercise 17: System security with 5250 emulation
.N ci
Unit 25: System security with IBM Navigator for i
Exercise 18: System security with IBM Navigator for i
Unit 26: System configuration overview
.R a
Unit 27: Configuration with 5250 emulation
Exercise 19: Managing your system configuration
C rm
Unit 28: Configuration with IBM Navigator for i
Day 4
to fo
Unit 29: Save concepts
Unit 30: Save with 5250 emulation
Exercise 20: Save with 5250 emulation
Unit 31: Save with IBM Navigator for i
Unit 32: Restore concepts and overview
ec ivo
Exercise 21: Restore with 5250 emulation

Unit 33: Problem determination with 5250 emulation
Exercise 22: Problem determination
Unit 34: Overview of the PTF process
Unit 35: PTFs with 5250 Emulation
oy s
Unit 36: Class summary

pr clu
Ex
xxiv System Operator Workshop for IBM i © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 1. Power Systems and IBM i concepts and
overview
What this unit is about
n
In this unit, you begin to familiarize yourself with the Power Systems with IBM
i hardware and software.
ó
What you should be able to do
.N ci
After completing this unit, you should be able to:
.R a
• Describe the functions provided by the operating system
• Explain the layers of software
C rm
• Explain how data is stored on Power Systems with IBM i
• Explain what a logical partition is and the functions it can provide
• Describe the clustering capability of the system
to fo
• Explain capacity on demand
• List the different types of supported consoles
ec ivo
How you will check your progress

Accountability:
• Checkpoint questions
oy s
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 1. Power Systems and IBM i concepts and overview 1-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

• Describe the functions that are provided by the operating
n
system
ó
.N ci
• Explain what a logical partition is and the functions it can
.R a
provide
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
© Copyright IBM Corporation 2001, 2016
Figure 1-1. Unit objectives AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
1-2 System Operator Workshop for IBM i © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Power with IBM i expands on a rich heritage

IBM i
AS/400e
iSeries eServer i5
ó n
.N ci
.R a
AS/400
Power with IBM i
C rm
A technology-friendly
architecture supporting
continuous innovation
without disruption
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 1-2. Power with IBM i expands on a rich heritage AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
In 1988 IBM introduced the AS/400, bringing together two of IBM's most successful platforms of the
time: S/36 and S/38.
pr clu
It was the first of a new generation of servers with a revolutionary virtualized operating system.
It allowed companies to simply write business applications that exploited its integrated database.
In 1995, moved to 64-bit technology. Then, in 2000, delivered Linux on POWER, extending the
platform to open applications.
Ex
In 2004, delivered POWER5 and support for AIX.

In 2007, delivered POWER6 with the i570.
In 2008 unified UNIX server line, called System p, and System i.
In 2010 delivered POWER7.
In 2014 delivered POWER8.
Student Notebook
POWER processor technology roadmap

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
POWER9
POWER8
.R a
C rm
POWER7/7+
45/32 nm
POWER6/6+
65/65 nm
POWER5/5+
130/90 nm
to fo
2004 2007 2010 2014
ec ivo
Figure 1-3. POWER processor technology roadmap AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
This visual charts the evolution of the POWER family of processors from the POWER5 in 2004 to
the current generation, POWER8, and even points to the future with POWER9.
pr clu
Some details are provided as to the density of the components on each generation. The numbers in
the boxes below the graphic of the processor chips represent, in rough terms, the spacing of
components in nanometers or microns.
As these numbers get smaller over time we are seeing the evolution of the technology, of creating
Ex
processors with the components more tightly squeezed together. The advantage is to increase the
functionality of the processor and at the same time to reduce performance draining latency.
The boxes below each generation highlight some of the enhancements to functionality associated
with the processor.
• POWER5 introduced simultaneous multi-threading (SMT).
• POWER6 included Altivec extensions that extended the range of high performance workloads
that might be deployed on Power Systems.
• POWER7 increases the number of cores per chip, includes L3 cache on the chip, and extends
SMT.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty • POWER8 increases the number of cores per chip, includes L3 cache on the chip, and extends
SMT, twice increased bandwidth in comparison with POWER7/7+
For IBM POWER clients, there is the certainty of the POWER architecture roadmap and the sense
of investment protection. Along with the proven evolution of the architecture to higher and higher
levels of functionality and performance.
In some comparisons, you can see processor CPW value. Processor CPW represents maximum
n
relative performance running commercial processing workloads for a processor configuration. Use
this value to compare relative performance between models with the same or different number of
ó
processors.
5250 CPW: Represents the relative performance available to perform 5250 OLTP (interactive)
.N ci
workloads.
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Innovative IBM i technology

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 1-4. Innovative IBM i technology AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
IBM i had innovative technology built into the operating system throughout its lifecycle.
This visual shows some aspects of this technology:
pr clu
• Single level storage

• Object based architecture
• Integration
Ex
• Work management
• Technology independent machine interface (TIMI)
These are the things that make IBM i operating system better than the other operating systems out
there.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Central processing unit

IBM i
• Many generations of processors

– Choice of processing speeds with a range of:
n
• Processor cycle speed (MHz rating)
ó
• L1/L2/L3 cache
• Multiple threads
.N ci
• Multiple processors:
.R a
– Core systems (Core = 6, 8, 12, 24, 32, 64, 96, 128)
– Capacity on demand (CoD)
C rm
• Range of throughput capacities that are based on combination
of:
– Generation of processors
to fo
– Number of processors
ec ivo
Figure 1-5. Central processing unit AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Number of cores depends on the server model, socket number, and number of nodes. Nodes
means part of server CEC, not cluster server node.
pr clu
CEC (Central Electronic Complex) The set of hardware that defines a mainframe, which includes
the CPUs, memory, channels, controllers, and power supplies included in the box.
Some CECs, can include storage devices (traditional or SSD disks).
Ex
Student Notebook
What is installed here?

IBM i
System value . . . . . : QMODEL

System values for processor using: Description . . . . . : System model number
• 5250 emulation:
n
Model number . . . . . : 520
– QMODEL: System model number
ó
System value . . . . . : QPRCFEAT
– QPRCFEAT: Processor feature Description . . . . . : Processor feature
– QSRLNBR: System serial number Processor feature . . : 7457
.N ci
System value . . . . . : QSRLNBR
Description . . . . . : System serial number
.R a
• IBM Navigator for i Serial number . . . . : 65FB92D
– Configuration and service
C rm
• System values
to fo
• IBM i Client Access Solutions
– Virtual Control Panel
ec ivo
Figure 1-6. What is installed here? AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
There is another way to check this information. You can run IBM i Access Client Solutions and use
the Virtual Control Panel.
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Other system components

IBM i
• Memory:
– Multiple memory cards
n
– Choice of memory capacity
ó
– What is installed seen using green screen or GUI
• I/O buses
.N ci
– Dependent on attached peripheral I/O adapters
• I/O adapters:
.R a
– Disk/Tape controllers
C rm
– Fibre Channel adapters Note: Each hardware component is
– Communication adapters identified by a four-digit feature code
Virtual component has one letter and
• I/O Devices three-digit feature code.
to fo
– Tape drive / Tape library systems
– Disk drives / SSD
– USB devices
ec ivo
Figure 1-7. Other system components AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Integrated by design
IBM i
Traditional systems Power Systems with IBM i
n
IBM i
• Higher-level functions exposed to users and
ó
applications based on SLIC services
Directory
Backup and • Graphical user interface
recovery • Vast range of high-level language functions
.N ci
(C/C++, RPG, COBOL)
Technology Independent Machine Interface - TIMI

Online transaction
processing System Licensed Internal Code (LIC)
.R a
Security • Process control
• Resource management
• Integrated SQL-compliant database
C rm
Relational • Security enforcement
database • Network communications
Java • File systems
• Storage management
• Java virtual machine (JVM)
Operating system • Other primitives
to fo
Hardware and microcode 64-bit Power Systems
ec ivo
Figure 1-8. Integrated by design AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Many functions that have traditionally been performed by system control programs or add-on
programs are integrated into the System Licensed Internal Code (SLIC). So that they can be
pr clu
performed more efficiently.

SLIC and i together provide efficient use of system hardware resources.
This architectural feature is known as the technology-independent machine interface (TIMI).
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
IBM i overview
IBM i
• System software:
– Operating system (5770-SS1)
n
– Support for applications native to other operating systems
• System resource management:
ó
– Processors
.N ci
– Memory
– Disk
• System control interface:
.R a
– Control language (CL) support
C rm
– System or user-written commands
• Integrated support:
– Security
– Communications
to fo
– System management
– Database management system (DBMS) - DB2 for i
ec ivo
Figure 1-9. IBM i overview AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Application software
IBM i
• Traditional applications
n
– Workload
• Interactive, character-based (ICPW - 5250 )
ó
• Batch (no ongoing user interaction)
.N ci
– Support through specific IBM i jobs
• Application users = IBM i users - refer to work management
.R a
• Client/server applications
C rm
– Workload:
• Information processing (interactive or batch)
• Database serving
to fo
• Interaction with IBM i jobs
– Application users might not be known to IBM i
ec ivo
Figure 1-10. Application software AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Application users might or might not be known to IBM i.

• For example, SAP R/3: Specific users known only to the application
pr clu
• For example, BaanERP: Specific users known to IBM Power Systems with IBM i
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Other licensed programs

IBM i
• TCP/IP Connectivity Utilities (TC1)

• Backup and Recovery Media Services (BR1)
n
• WebSphere Development Studio (WDS):
ó
– Program Development Languages
.N ci
– Application Development Toolset
– Control Language (included with IBM i)
.R a
• DB2 Web Query for i (WQX)
C rm
• DB2 Query Manager and SQL DevKit (ST1)
• Performance Tools (PT1)
• Cryptographic Manager (CR2)
to fo
• Advanced Job Scheduler (JS1)
• And so forth
ec ivo
Figure 1-11. Other licensed programs AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
There are many more software products available for Power Systems with IBM i. This list is not all
inclusive.
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Disk storage management

IBM i
n
Data
ó
IBM i
.N ci
.R a
C rm
• All data spread across available disk arms
• Not all information necessarily contiguous
• Optional rebalancing
to fo
• Minimal database administration
ec ivo
Figure 1-12. Disk storage management AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
ASPs: Up to 32 user ASPs

IBM i
Data
n
IBM i
ó
ASP-1
.N ci
(System + Appl-1)
Database
changes
.R a
C rm
ASP-2
(Journal Receiver)
ASP: Auxiliary storage pool (disk pool) Data
• A collection of disks that are used to

to fo
isolate IBM i objects from others on
another collection of ID disks. ASP-3
(Appl-2)
ec ivo
Figure 1-13. ASPs: Up to 32 user ASPs AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Independent ASPs (IASP 33-255)

IBM i
Auxiliary storage pools

(ASPs or disk pools)
ó n
Independent ASP can be
used to build HA/DR solutions
.N ci
System User
*SYSBAS for IBM i system.
Basic
.R a
Independent
C rm
OS and OS and
other cluster other
system system
data *SYSBAS data
*SYSBAS
Device domain
to fo
IASP Application data IASP
ec ivo
Figure 1-14. Independent ASPs (IASP 33-255) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Independent ASP (IASP):

A collection of disk storage units that can be brought online or taken offline independent of the rest
pr clu
of the storage on a system. IASP are used to build IBM i cluster storage resources.
The IASP can be switchable or not switchable depending on the High Availability solution.
For POWER6 or earlier, IASP might be switched between IBM i systems (need HSL).
Ex
Since POWER7, the switchable IASP is not available. Now you can use IBM i cluster with switch
function; two IASPs are needed (Production and Backup) or if you use external storage (like DS8K,
SVC, V7000/5000) you can use LUN-level switch. This solution is similar to previous switchable
IASP.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
What is a partition?
IBM i
• A partition allocates one system’s resources to create logically

separate systems.
n
• Each partition is an independent operating environment with its
ó
own resources.
.N ci
.R a
C rm
From one to many
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 1-15. What is a partition? AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Virtual i partitions
IBM i
• IBM i - based virtualization:
n
– Supports IBM i partition using I/O resources
from another IBM i partition
IBM i IBM i
ó
– Eliminates requirement to buy adapters and
.N ci
disk drives for each IBM i partition Hypervisor
POWER6
– Requires:
.R a
POWER6 systems, or newer
C rm
OS must be at 6.1, or newer
• Adds to IBM i storage virtualization capabilities:

– AIX and Linux partitions
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 1-16. Virtual i partitions AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Integrate System x and BladeCenter with Power

IBM i
• Power Systems with IBM i connects selected System x and

BladeCenter products using standard Ethernet cables and
n
switches.
ó
• Power with IBM i uses
.N ci
IBM i virtual storage to manage
Windows storage.
.R a
C rm
• Power with IBM i streamlines communication
between Windows and IBM i applications with virtual Ethernet.
to fo
• IBM i integrates operations and backup.
ec ivo
Figure 1-17. Integrate System x and BladeCenter with Power AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Linux support (POWER and x86)

IBM i
IBM i partition can be a host partition for

PowerLinux partition.
n
• Leverages LPAR and iSCSI connected
ó
System x server concept
• Acts as a guest of a partition running IBM i
.N ci
• Uses Linux partition hardware:
.R a
IBM i IBM i IBM i Host Linux Linux
– Processor:
• Minimum (0.1 processor / 64 MB P PPP PPPP PP P
C rm
memory)
• Maximum (eight processors, 4 GB of
memory)
– LAN, virtual LAN, console
to fo
– Disk
Virtual LAN
ec ivo
P = Processor
Figure 1-18. Linux support (POWER and x86) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Java support
IBM i
Java: The standard for dynamic Internet applications
ó n
.N ci
Client Server
.R a
• Java development tools • Java virtual machine (JVM)
C rm
(like IBM Rational tools) • JVM integrated with IBM i
• Toolbox for Java
to fo
Enabling Power Systems with IBM i to take
advantage of a growing portfolio of Java applications
ec ivo
Figure 1-19. Java support AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Java platform is the environment for developing and managing Java applets and applications.
It consists of three primary components: the Java language, the Java packages, and the Java
pr clu
virtual machine.
The Java language and packages are similar to C++ and its class libraries. The Java packages
contain classes, which are available in any compliant Java implementation. The application
programming interface (API) should be the same on any system that supports Java.
Ex
Java differs from a traditional language, like C++, in the way it compiles and runs. In a traditional
programming environment, you write and compile source code of a program into object code for a
specific hardware and operating system. The object code binds to other object code modules to
create a running program. The code is specific for a particular set of computer hardware and does
not run on other systems without being changed. This figure illustrates the traditional language
deployment environment.
The Java virtual machine is a runtime environment that you can add into a web browser or any
operating system, such as IBM i. The Java virtual machine runs instructions that a Java compiler
generates. It consists of a bytecode interpreter and runtime that allow Java class files to run on any
platform, regardless of the platform on which they were originally developed.
Student Notebook
The class loader and security manager, which are part of the Java runtime, insulate code that
comes from another platform. They can also restrict which system resources are allowed to be
accessed by each class that is loaded.
The Java Development Kit (JDK) is software for Java developers. It includes the Java interpreter,
Java classes, and Java development tools: compiler, debugger, disassembler, appletviewer, stub
file generator, and documentation generator.
n
The JDK enables you to write applications that are developed once and run anywhere on any Java
virtual machine. Java applications that are developed with the JDK on one system can be used on
ó
another system without changing or recompiling the code. The Java class files are portable to any
standard Java virtual machine.
.N ci
For a complete list of tools that Sun Microsystems, Inc. Java Development Kit supplies, see the
Tools Reference by Sun Microsystems, Inc. For more information about each individual tool that the
IBM Developer Kit for Java supports, see Java tools that are supported by the IBM Developer Kit for
.R a
Java.
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Integrated web serving

IBM i
• Client HTML
– Browser on PC
n
Multimedia
• Server:
ó
– HTTP
.N ci
• HTML, XML, and so forth
– Web application serving
.R a
• WebSphere Application Server (WAS)
• Network
C rm
HTTP/Apache
– Internet / intranet CGI-bin, and so on
DB
Internet/intranet
to fo
Browser
URL
Security
Clients Servers
Network
ec ivo
Figure 1-20. Integrated web serving AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The IBM HTTP Server (powered by Apache) for i is a complete web server product that offers
several components and features to help your website configuration and development. With the
pr clu
IBM HTTP Server (powered by Apache) for i, you have everything you need to quickly and easily
establish a web presence and get started on the road to working the web for business.
IBM WebSphere Application Server is the leading open standards-based application foundation
offering accelerated delivery of innovative applications and unmatched operational efficiency,
reliability, administration, security, and control.
Ex
WebSphere Application Server is also the leading software foundation for service-oriented
architecture (SOA) applications and services for your enterprise. With IBM WebSphere Application
Server, you can build business-critical enterprise applications and solutions and combine them with
innovative new functions.
The IBM Web Administration for i interface combines forms, tools, and wizards to create a
simplified environment to set up and manage many different servers and server types on your
system.
Student Notebook
The IBM Web Administration for i interface supports the following servers and server types on your
IBM i to help integrate these technologies into a useful production ready web environment.
• IBM HTTP Server
• IBM WebSphere Application Server including Liberty profile
• IBM Integrated Web Application Server for i
n
• IBM Integrated Web Services Server for i
• IBM WebSphere Portal
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
PASE
IBM i
• Portable Application Solutions Environment:
n
– Is an integrated runtime environment
– Supports selected UNIX applications
ó
– Provides broad subset of the support
.N ci
• IBM i PASE:
.R a
– Supports direct execution of PowerPC machine instructions
C rm
– Runs on the System Licensed Internal Code (SLIC) kernel on the
Power i
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 1-21. PASE AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
PASE for i is an integrated runtime environment for AIX applications running on the IBM i operating
system.
pr clu
PASE for i supports the application binary interface (ABI) of AIX and provides a broad subset of the
support provided by AIX shared libraries, shells, and utilities. PASE for i also supports the direct
processing of IBM PowerPC machine instructions, so it does not have the drawbacks of an
environment that only emulates the machine instructions.
Ex
PASE for i applications:

• Can be written in C, C++, Fortran, or PowerPC assembler.
• Use the same binary executable format as AIX PowerPC applications.
• Run in an IBM i job.
• Use IBM i system functions, such as file systems, security, and sockets.
Keep in mind that PASE for i is not a UNIX operating system on the IBM i operating system. PASE
for i is designed to run AIX programs on the IBM i operating system with little or no change.
Programs from any other environment, such as UNIX or Linux, need to be written such that they
can be compiled on AIX as the first step toward running in PASE for i.
Student Notebook
Capacity on demand
IBM i
• Capacity on Demand (CoD)

– Permanent/temporary activation of processors or memory
n
• Trial CoD
ó
– No charge 30-day activation of processors or memory
resources
.N ci
• On/Off CoD - Elastic CoD Add reserve
.R a
– Ability to activate processor or memory resources resources
temporarily
C rm
• Power Enterprise Pool CoD
– Move permanent processor or memory activation from one
server to another
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 1-22. Capacity on demand AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
With Capacity on Demand (CoD) offerings, you can dynamically activate one or more resources on
your server as your business peaks dictate. You can activate inactive processor cores or memory
pr clu
units that are already installed on your server, on a temporary and permanent basis.
Capacity on demand offerings are available on select IBM servers. For ordering information, see
the POWER8 machine type/model tables within each CoD offering section of this document. Some
servers include a number of active and inactive resources. Active processor cores and active
memory units are resources that are available for use on your server. Inactive processor cores and
Ex
inactive memory units are resources that are included with your server, but are not available for use
until you activate them.
Capacity Upgrade on Demand (CUoD), you can activate additional processor cores and memory
units on selected servers by purchasing a permanent processor or memory unit activation feature.
CUoD adds capacity for new workloads, which enables your server to adapt to unexpected
performance demands.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty Elastic Capacity on Demand (CoD) (formerly referred to as On/Off CoD) allows you to temporarily
activate and deactivate processor cores and memory units to help meet the demands of business
peaks. After you request that a number of processor cores or memory units are to be made
temporarily available for a specified number of days, those processor cores and memory units are
available immediately. You can start and stop requests for Elastic CoD, and you are billed for usage
at the end of each quarter.
Power Enterprise Pool provides flexibility and value for Power Systems. A Power enterprise pool is
n
a group of systems that can share Mobile Capacity on Demand (CoD) processor resources and
memory resources.
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Clustering
IBM i
• Demand for continuous availability (24x365):
n
– Need to minimize planned downtime
– Single Power with IBM i - 99.94% available (Ref: Gartner Report)
ó
• Power with IBM i implementation:
.N ci
– Shared-nothing model
.R a
– Up to 128 Power i nodes
C rm
– Availability through:
• APIs
• Application restart
to fo
• Independent ASPs
Cluster Control
ec ivo
Figure 1-23. Clustering AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The IBM i cluster technology can be used to achieve high availability in IBM i environments. Cluster
technology provides mechanisms that enable critical resources to be automatically available on
pr clu
backup systems. Those resources might include data, application programs, devices, or
environment attributes.
In order for those business applications to be highly available, multiple systems might be required.
This type of distributed computing environment can become complex to manage. A cluster can
simplify this complexity. In IBM i, a cluster is a set or collection of systems or logical partitions,
Ex
called cluster nodes. A cluster provides a means to monitor and manage the environment that
provides high availability for the business application. A cluster can be a simple, two-node high
availability environment for a specific business application or it can be a more complex, multiple
system environment for multiple disjoint applications. A cluster might consist of many nodes, while
a specific application might only be dependent on a subset of those nodes. An application on a
node might fail without the entire node failing. Cluster technology provides the mechanisms for
defining resilient resources in an environment, detecting outages, and responding to these failures.
It provides the critical infrastructure that enables high availability solutions.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
IBM i Access Family

IBM i
• IBM i Access for Windows

• Runs natively on Microsoft Windows operating systems
n
• IBM i Access for Web
• Enable users to access IBM i through a workstation web
ó
browser, independent of desktop OS
• IBM i Access for Linux
.N ci
• Run natively on Linux operating systems
• IBM i Access for Mobile
.R a
• Run on mobile devices
• IBM i Access Client Solution
C rm
• Runs anywhere that has Java (Java 6.0 or later)
– This includes: Windows, Mac, Linux, AIX, IBM i
to fo
These products provide the functionality and interfaces to gain access to
applications, data, and resources on i.
ec ivo
Figure 1-24. IBM i Access Family AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
IBM i Access for Windows delivers TCP/IP connectivity to users running a variety of Microsoft
Windows operating systems. IBM i Access for Windows offers an all-inclusive client solution for
pr clu
accessing and using resources from your Windows desktop. It includes 5250 emulation, access to
DB2 Universal Database (UDB) for IBM i through its Data Transfer, and uses IBM i NetServer for
working with the IBM i Integrated File System and printers.
IBM does not plan to support IBM i Access for Windows on operating systems beyond Windows
8.1. The replacement product is IBM i Access Client Solutions.
Ex
IBM i Access Client Solutions is the newest member of the IBM i Access Family. The Linux
Application Package is an optional download that provides an ODBC driver for accessing the DB2
for i database from a Linux client.
A mobile solution for accessing IBM i is now available. Powered by IBM i Access for Web
(5770XH2), you can now access IBM i resources from any mobile device that supports a browser.
Student Notebook
7.2 IBM i Access for Web was optimized for mobile access. You can now easily access your IBM i
resources from a mobile device. This version provides a mobile friendly view of the IBM i Access for
Web features when viewed from a browser on a mobile device or the traditional view of available
features when using a browser from the desktop. To easily enable IBM i mobile access.
IBM i Access Client Solutions is the newest member of the IBM i Access Family. It provides a Java
based, platform-independent interface that runs on most operating systems that support Java,
including Linux, Mac, and Windows.
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Console types
IBM i
Connect the console using:
n
• LAN Console
– Provides system console session:
ó
Includes graphical control panel
.N ci
– Is included with IBM i Access for
Windows, IBM i Client Solutions:
• LAN connects directly to Power with
.R a
IBM i
C rm
• Remote connect through TCP/IP
• Management Console
– HMC
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 1-25. Console types AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Hardware Management Console (1 of 2)

IBM i
• For POWER5 Æ POWER8 Systems, the HMC is required for:

– Virtual console windows
n
– LPAR configuration and operation management
ó
– CoD management
.N ci
– Service tools
.R a
• HMC is a PC-based console:
– Closed custom appliance
C rm
– Remotely accessible Rack-mount
– Connects to service processor 7042-CR9
over private or open network
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 1-26. Hardware Management Console (1 of 2) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
HMC description
Officially, the name of the PC-based console is called the IBM Hardware Management Console. It is
pr clu
available in a desktop or a rack-mount model. The user can only access the management
application and no additional applications can be installed. In the future, a second HMC can be
connected to a single managed system for redundancy. Two managed systems can be managed by
a single HMC. The HMC is required for systems running LPARs.
Ex
Remote access to the HMC functions

Remote access to the HMC application is provided by web browser. In addition, there are extensive
HMC command-line controls accessible by using the Secure Shell (SSH).
Service errors focal point
If a hardware error occurs, that error can be reported by multiple partitions. To prevent confusion,
the HMC is also used as a service focal point for error reporting. An application on the HMC serves
as a filter for errors to ensure that IBM service calls are placed only once per actual hardware error.
Alternatively, a partition that is configured as the service partition can collect system errors and
report them to IBM.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Hardware Management Console (2 of 2)

IBM i
• New HMC virtual appliance (vHMC)

– For POWER8, POWER7, POWER6 servers
n
– Same functionality as traditional HMC (version 8)
ó
– Runs as virtual machine on x86 server under KVM or VMware
virtualization
.N ci
– Can be combine with traditional HMC
.R a
Rack-mount
C rm
7042-CR9
to fo
One or two HMCs One vHMC and one HMC One or two vHMCs
ec ivo
Figure 1-27. Hardware Management Console (2 of 2) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
IBM Virtual HMC requirements:

x86 64-bit hardware with hardware virtualization assists (Intel VT-x or AMD-V).
pr clu
Resources for the HMC virtual appliance VM:

• 4 CPUs
• 8 GB of memory
Ex
• 160 GB of disk space

• 2 network interfaces
License plus software maintenance (PID - 5765-HMV)
Virtualization: Either VMware ESXi V5 or Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.x with KVM
Student Notebook
Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i
1. True or false: Security is built into the operating system.
n
2. The OS on this system, at 7.2, is now known as which of the
ó
following?
.N ci
a. OS/400
b. i5/OS
.R a
c. IBM i
d. All of the above
C rm
3. True or false: The data administrator tells the system
specifically where data is stored on the disk drives.
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 1-28. Checkpoint (1 of 2) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Write down your answers here:

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i
4. Which of the following are found in every partition?

a. Operating system
n
b. Memory
ó
c. Disk
d. All of the above
.N ci
5. True or false: Linux is supported as a guest operating system
.R a
of a host IBM i partition.
C rm
6. True or false: Capacity on demand is managed by the LAN
console.
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Unit summary
IBM i
Having completed this unit, you should be able to:

• Describe the functions that are provided by the operating
n
system
ó
.N ci
• Explain what a logical partition is and the functions it can
.R a
provide
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 1-30. Unit summary AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 2. Reference material and support

In this unit, you go over the reference materials and the websites available
that provide support for your Power Systems with IBM i.
ó n
.N ci
• List the steps required to access the Information Center
.R a
• Describe the support available on the Knowledge Center
• List the websites that support the Power Systems with IBM i family of
C rm
products
• Describe the purpose served by IBM Redbooks and explain how to
access these tools
• Explain the support provided by Navigator for i family of products
to fo
• Explain how to access support for IBM Navigator for i
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 2. Reference material and support 2-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

n
ó
• List the websites that support the Power Systems with IBM i
.N ci
family of products
• Describe the purpose served by IBM Redbooks and explain
.R a
how to access these tools
C rm
• Explain the support provided by Navigator for i family of
products
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
IBM Knowledge Center

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 2-2. IBM Knowledge Center AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The IBM Knowledge Center can be reached at:

https://www-01.ibm.com/support/knowledgecenter/ssw_ibm_i/welcome
pr clu
This page provides an entry point to product information about IBM i. Use the links in the Table of
Contents to find documentation for specific versions and editions of this product family. Generated
links to developerWorks, Redbooks, and white papers are also provided when articles about the
product are available. On this page, you can find entry points to sites that help you learn more about
Ex
this product and other IBM products. There are also links to websites that help you find support and
stay current.
Student Notebook
IBM i Knowledge Center

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 2-3. IBM i Knowledge Center AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
As you saw on previous visual there is information about IBM i operating system since 5.3 (however
5.3, 5.4, 6.1 are not supported) to 7.2.
pr clu
This visual shows the Welcome to IBM i 7.2 page. From this page you can find documentation and
information about how to install, maintain, and use IBM i.
This web page is located at:
https://www-01.ibm.com/support/knowledgecenter/ssw_ibm_i_72/rzahg/ic-homepage.htm
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
IBM i and Power Systems home page

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 2-4. IBM i and Power Systems home page AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
On the IBM i for Power System website you can find additional information about IBM i.
pr clu
http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/power/software/i/
Ex
Student Notebook
Power Systems support and services

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 2-5. Power Systems support and services AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Power System support and services website offers a lot of useful links for support and services for
all supported operating system; Linux, AIX, and IBM i.
pr clu

http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/power/support/
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
IBM Redbooks page

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 2-6. IBM Redbooks page AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The IBM Redbooks is a website where you can find a Redbooks for all IBM products. One of them
is IBM i. Use search to find interesting in topic or operating system.
pr clu

http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/
Ex
Student Notebook
IBM Navigator for i

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 2-7. IBM Navigator for i AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
IBM Navigator for i is the integrated, web-based console that consolidates IBM i systems
management tasks in one place.
pr clu
There is a web page with information about Navigator for i.

http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/power/software/i/navigator/
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

n
ó
• List the websites that support the Power Systems with IBM i
.N ci
family of products
• Describe the purpose served by IBM Redbooks and explain
.R a
how to access these tools
C rm
• Explain the support provided by Navigator for i family of
products
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 3. Overview of 5250 emulation and help

This unit describes the 5250 emulation interface and the help facilities
available.
ó n
.N ci
• Describe and use green screen general display types
.R a
- Menu
- List
C rm
- Entry
- Information
• Access and use special green screen menus
to fo
- Information Assist
- System Request
- Operational Assist
ec ivo
• Access and use the command entry display

• Access green screen help

oy s
Accountability:
pr clu
• Exercise
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 3. Overview of 5250 emulation and help 3-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

n
– Menu
ó
– List
.N ci
– Entry
– Information
.R a
– Information Assist
C rm
– System Request
– Operational Assist
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
In this unit, you learn how to:

• Sign on to the system.
pr clu
• Select a desired menu.

• Run options from a menu.
• Return to previous menus.
Ex
You will also be able is to identify the four types of system displays: Menu, entry, list, and
information. You will learn how to use the command entry display as well as the System Request
Panel group. Lastly, you become familiar with the different types of displays, whether basic or
advanced, that you want to work with.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
ó n
Topic 1: Working with menus and
.N ci
display types
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM. 10.1
Figure 3-2. Topic 1: Working with menus and display types AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
System displays: Overview

IBM i
1 IBM i Main Menu 4 USER User Tasks
n
1. User tasks User Tasks - Help
2. Office tasks
3. General system tasks . . . How to Use a menu
ó
.N ci
1 Menu
2 Entry
.R a
3 List
C rm
4 Information
2 Submit Job (SBMJOB) 3 Work with All Output Queues

to fo
Type choices, press Enter. Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
Command to run . . . . .___
______________________ Opt Queue Library
ec ivo
Figure 3-3. System displays: Overview AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Some terminology:
• Screen: The surface of the workstation or terminal on which information is displayed.
pr clu
• Display: A predefined grouping of information arranged in a specified way and displayed on a

screen. Displays are sometimes referred to as green screens because of the default colors
used to display them (green letters on a black background).
IBM licensed programs use only the four display types listed on the visual to display information.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Menu display overview

IBM i
n
2 1
ó
.N ci
3
.R a
C rm 4
to fo
5
6
ec ivo
Figure 3-4. Menu display overview AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Once a user has signed on, a general menu is displayed. This is the most common type of green
screen display and the one you use most often. It allows you to easily select work that needs to be
pr clu
done without having to remember and enter a long command every time you want to do something.
The IBM i Main Menu shown in the visual is the most powerful menu provided by IBM i operating
system. From this menu, just typing the number of a menu option allows you to access any function
in the system for which you are authorized. Except for option 90, all options on this menu cause
some other menu to be displayed.
Ex
The IBM i Main Menu shows the characteristics of most system menus.
1. Title The name of the menu. The title is located in the center of the top
line.
2. Menu ID The shortened title which is shown in capital letters in the upper left
corner of the first line. Menus are the only types of displays that have
IDs. You can use the menu ID to access a particular menu quickly.
3. List of options The functions which you can perform from this menu. The list of
options includes a list of numbers and descriptions. To perform a
Student Notebook
function, enter the option number on the command line. This list of
options vary by menu.
4. Command line An input area which is provided for entering a menu option, number,
or command.
5. Function keys Keyboard keys (sometimes called active function keys) that allow a
user to select keyboard or programmer functions. They are located
n
below the command line and differ by menu. If there are more
function keys than can be shown on a single display, a user can press
ó
F24 (more keys) to display the additional keys.
6. Message line A blank line (or a line which contains copyright information) at the
.N ci
bottom of the display. If the system needs to communicate with you, a
message is displayed here.
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
How to display a menu

IBM i
IBM i Main Menu
n
1. User tasks
2. Office tasks
ó
3. General system tasks General System Tasks
.N ci
1. Jobs
Menu options 2. Status
3. Messages
Messages
or
.R a
1. Send a message
GO Command 2. Send a break message
C rm
Go to Menu (GO)
3. Display messages
Type choices, press Enter.
Menu..............______ Name, generic*, *ALL

to fo
Library........ *LIBL Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB...
Return point...*YES *YES, *NO
ec ivo
Figure 3-5. How to display a menu AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
There are a couple of ways you can display a menu. You can:
1. Enter menu options to walk through many menus as shown on the top half of the visual.
pr clu
2. Use the GO command to go directly to a menu (this is shorter) as shown in the visual. To use the
GO command, you must know the menu ID.
If you need to display a menu but can only remember the first character or two of its name, use the
go x* form of this command, replacing the x with those beginning characters of the menu name
Ex
which you do remember. After you enter this command, IBM i displays a list of all menus whose
names begin with those characters and allows you to select the one you want to display.
When the GO command is used to move from one menu to the next, the system remembers the
names of the last 10 menus used in the job. Using F12 lets the user back out through those same
10 menus, one at a time.
Student Notebook
Menu navigation
IBM i
IBM i Main Menu
n
1. User tasks
ó
2. Office tasks
3. General system tasks General System Tasks
.N ci
1. Jobs
2. Status
.R a
4. Messages Messages
C rm
1. Send a message
2. Send a break message
3. Display messages
to fo
F3=Exit F12=Cancel
F16=System Main menu F23=Set initial menu
ec ivo
Figure 3-6. Menu navigation AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Function keys 3 and 12 (F3 and F12) are both used to back up through a stack of menus which you
have displayed; however, there is a difference in how the two work. F12 always displays the
pr clu
previous menu in the stack, while F3 might skip one or more menus while backing up.
In this example, we used option 3 on the IBM i Main Menu to display the General System Tasks
menu. We then used option 4 on the General System Tasks menu to display the Messages menu.
With the Messages menu displayed, pressing F12 returns us to the General System Tasks menu,
while pressing F3 from the Messages menu returns us to the IBM i Main Menu.
Ex
Pressing function key 16 (F16) from either the General System Tasks or Messages menu will
cause the IBM i Main Menu to be displayed. On other menus, F16 can have a different function.
The first menu a user sees after sign on depends on the user profile. With proper authority, the user
can change the initial sign on menu. To do this, the user should display the menu wanted at sign on
and then press function key 23 (F23). Doing this permanently changes the user profile.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Menu display help (1 of 5)

IBM i
Cursor in a general area
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 3-7. Menu display help (1 of 5) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Help function on the Power Systems with IBM i displays is cursor sensitive. This means that
depending on the position of the cursor on the display, the corresponding help is shown.
pr clu
On this menu display, the cursor is not in the function key description area or the area where an
option is described when the F1 key or the Help key is pressed. This shows the help about the
whole display.
Ex
Student Notebook

IBM i
Cursor on options description or option number typed
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
Either the cursor is positioned in the area where a menu option is described, in this case, option 4,
or the option is typed in the Selection or command area and F1 or Help is pressed.
pr clu
F22 (extended help) expands from showing only help text for the area selected, in this case, help
for option 4, to include all the help text available for the whole display.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty

IBM i
Hypertext links to additional help

F1
n
SYSTEM General System Tasks
ó
Select one of the following:
1. Jobs
2.
.N ci
3. Option 1 - Help 1. Jobs
4. 2.
5. Select this option to control 3. Job
6. example, you can: 4.
7. o Work with: 5. A job is a unit of work on the system.
.R a
8. - Jobs 6.
9. - Statistics for active jobs 7. Jobs run in subsystems and use system resources, such as
10. - Printer devices 8. storage, disk and processor cycles, to perform their tasks.
C rm
- Job queues 9. Jobs can be allocated priorities and can run either
10. interactively or in batch.
Enter 1. Jobs
Enter 2.
3. Subsystem
4.
to fo
5. Jobs are run in a subsystem. A subsystem creates a suitab
6. environment for a job to do its work. The system can cont
7. one or many subsystems that can be created or deleted by t
8. user.
9.
10. As the number of different types of jobs increases in the
system, more subsystems can be defined to manage those j
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
Hypertext links together a series of help information displays by keywords or phrases. These words
or phrases are called reference phrases and are easy to spot. They are yellow and underlined on
pr clu
color displays or bright and underlined on monochrome (black and white) displays. A reference
phrase indicates that a hypertext link to additional help information is available.
You can move through hypertext links by positioning the cursor on a hypertext link and pressing the
Enter key or double-clicking. If you get lost while using hypertext, do not worry. You can press F6
(Viewed Topics) from any of the help displays to view all of the hypertext displays in the order in
Ex
which you viewed them, or you can use F12 to back up through the topics one-by-one.
Student Notebook

IBM i
Cursor in Function Keys area
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
The cursor is positioned in the area where the function keys are described, and F1 or Help is
pressed.
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty

IBM i
Cursor in selection or command area where DSPLIB typed
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
A command, in this case DSPLIB, is typed in the Selection or command area, and F1 or Help is
pressed.
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Entry display overview

IBM i
n
1
ó
.N ci
.R a
2
C rm
4
3
to fo
5
6
ec ivo
Figure 3-12. Entry display overview AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Entry displays present information and prompts or allow a user to enter new information.
The Submit Job (SBMJOB) display shows the characteristics of entry displays:
pr clu
1. Title The name of the entry display (located in the center of the top line).
2. Default value Value that the system assumes if no other value is entered into the
field. The first time you use an entry display, the system fills in most of
the fields with default values.
Ex
3. Blank field Field into which you might have to enter a value. Some blank fields
can be skipped. The system uses a default value.
4. Choices Valid values that you can enter into the field.
5. Function keys Keyboard keys that allow a user to select keyboard or programmer
functions. These are sometimes called active function keys. They are
located at the bottom of the display and differ by display.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty 6. Message line Line at the bottom of the display which normally is blank or contains
copyright information. If the system needs to communicate with a
user, a message is displayed on this line.
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Entry display help (1 of 2)

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
Position
cursor,
C rm
to fo press Help.
In addition to field help, you can get:

• Extended help
• Message help
ec ivo
Figure 3-13. Entry display help (1 of 2) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
To obtain help information for a field, position the cursor on a field (the field can be blank or filled in)
and press Help. Help information about the field is displayed.
pr clu
On this display, an attempt was made to execute the DSPJOB command which resulted in the error
message:
*FILE not valid for parameter OPTION.
From this point, any of the online help information methods shown on the visual can be used to help
Ex
solve the error.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Entry display help (2 of 2)

IBM i
Cursor in an entry field
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 3-14. Entry display help (2 of 2) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
This is the help display that results when the cursor is positioned in the area shown in the previous
visual and F1 or Help is pressed.
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
List display overview

IBM i
n
1
ó
.N ci
2
.R a
3
C rm 4
to fo
5
6
ec ivo
Figure 3-15. List display overview AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
A list display is a list of objects (for example, jobs, libraries, files, or output queues) which is
requested by a user, gathered from within the system, and displayed in lists (or columns). The Work
pr clu
with All Output Queues display is an example of a list display. Most work with commands display a
list display.
A list display has the following characteristics:
1. Title Name of the list display (located in the center of the top line).
Ex
2. List Column of information which is identified by a short title. For example,

there are five columns on this display (Queue, Library, Files, Writer,
and Status).
3. Input field Field into which you can enter one of the options shown at the top of
the list display. Options vary depending on the list display and your
user authority.
4. Command line Blank line which is usually provided for entering a menu option,
number, or a command.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty 5. Function keys Keyboard keys that allow a user to select keyboard or programmer
functions.
6. Message line Normally, a blank line or a line which contains copyright information. If
the system needs to communicate with a user, a message is
displayed on this line.
To perform one of the options listed on the display (for example, 2 = Change or 4 = Delete), type the
n
associated option number (for example, 2 or 4) in the Opt column along the left side of the display
next to the list element (or elements) on which you want to perform the function. Different options
ó
can be specified for different elements.
If More... is displayed in the lower right corner, there are more list elements available than can be
.N ci
displayed on one display. Use the Page Down/Up (or Roll Up/Down) keys to view these additional
list elements.
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
List display help: Opt column versus F20 (enlarge)

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 3-16. List display help: Opt column versus F20 (enlarge) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
This help display shows up when the cursor is positioned in the Opt column of a list and F1 or Help
is pressed.
pr clu
The screen capture in the lower right shows how the screen can be enlarged using F20 (Enlarge). If
USROPT (*HLPFULL) is specified in a user’s profile, help initially appears in full-screen format.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Information display overview

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 3-17. Information display overview AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Click the Help key from most displays and you see a typical information display. Information
displays simply display information; the information cannot be changed, and new information
pr clu
cannot be added.
The Work with All Output Queues - Help display shows the characteristics of an information display:
1. Title Name of the information display (located in the center of the top line.
2. Information Information you requested from the system. Sometimes the
Ex
information appears in narrative form, and other times it appears in

columns.
3. Function keys Keyboard keys that allow a user to select keyboard or programmer
functions. These are sometimes called active function keys. They are
located at the bottom of the information display and differ by display.
There can be one or two lines of active function keys.
Student Notebook
ó n
Topic 2: System request and
.N ci
commands
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 3-18. Topic 2: System request and commands AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Using the System Request panel group

IBM i
• Shift + Esc
• Enter
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 3-19. Using the System Request panel group AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
A special menu you might find helpful is the System Request panel group.
The key sequence to call up this display is:
pr clu
Non-intelligent workstations:
- Shift (or Alt) + Sys Req
- Enter
Ex
PCs attached using personal communications:

- Actions
- Display pop-up keypad
- SysRq
Look at option 1 (Display sign on for secondary job). This option allows you to suspend whatever
you are doing, start an entirely new job, and then return to exactly where you were in your initial job
when required.
Student Notebook
Options 10 to 14 - Perform the following functions:

• Option 10 - Suspend the job at the current system and transfer back to the previous system
(the source or client system for the current system).
• Option 13 - Transfer back to the home system (the first system on which you entered the
pass-through command or the TELNET command).
• Option 11 - Transfer back to the alternative interactive job on the previous system.
n
• Option 14 - Transfer back to the alternative interactive job on the home system.
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Question
IBM i
• What are some possible scenarios where you might use the
System Request function?
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 3-20. Question AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
TFRSECJOB command or system request opt 1

IBM i
Two interactive jobs
n
Job 1 Job 2
ó
Operating User
the system application
.N ci
General Systems Tasks Application Menu
1 Shift (or Alt) + Sys Req
.R a
1.Jobs
2.Status
C rm
to fo 2 Enter
ec ivo
Figure 3-21. TFRSECJOB command or system request opt 1 AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
CL command TFRSECJOB or option 1 (Display sign on for secondary job) on the System Request
panel group allows a user to easily switch back and forth between two jobs at one workstation. This
pr clu
is a great productivity aid; however, if the user is performing the same or similar functions in both
jobs, it can be difficult to remember which job they are in at the time.
To assist a user in determining which job they are in, they can use the Display Work Station User
(DSPWSUSR) command. This command lists all jobs in the system currently active or suspended at
the display station where the command is entered and shows which is active.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
F9: Retrieve previous command

IBM i
MAIN IBM i Main Menu
n
1. User tasks
2. Office tasks
ó
1. User tasks
Selection or command 2. Office tasks
===> addlible ol29lib
.N ci
Selection or command
F3=Exit F4=Prompt F ===>________________________________
F23=Set initial menu
.R a
F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve
Enter Library OL29LIB added to library list.
C rm
1. User tasks
2. Office tasks
to fo
===> addlible ol29lib
F9 _____________________________________
ec ivo
Figure 3-22. F9: Retrieve previous command AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
While using any system menu, a user can retrieve previously entered commands by using F9. IBM
i remembers all the commands the user entered since signing on.
pr clu
The first time the user presses F9, the last command the user entered is retrieved. Each
subsequent time the user presses F9 (without pressing Enter or one of the supported function keys)
the next older command is retrieved.
Once the correct command is displayed, that command can be optionally modified and then run
Ex
again by pressing Enter. This can reduce much of the need to re-enter commands.
Student Notebook
Using the Command Entry display

IBM i
Call QCMD + Enter
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 3-23. Using the Command Entry display AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Command Entry display is an optional entry display for commands.

To access this display, type call qcmd on a command line, and press Enter.
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Retrieve a prior command

IBM i
1 Press F10.
n
Command Entry I520DVL2
Request level:
All previous commands and messages: 4
ó
>_dsplibl
> dspjob
.N ci
Type command, press Enter.
===> _______________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F10=Exclude detailed messages
.R a
2 Position cursor on command to be retrieved, and press F9.
C rm
Command Entry I520DVL2
Request level:
All previous commands and messages: 4
>_dsplibl
> dspjob
to fo
Type command, press Enter.
===> dsplibl ________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F10=Exclude detailed messages
ec ivo
Figure 3-24. Retrieve a prior command AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
From the Command Entry display a user can retrieve any command entered since signing on. To do
this:
pr clu
• Press F10 (Exclude detailed messages). All of the commands previously entered since signing
on are displayed.
• Position the cursor on the command to be retrieved, and press F9 (Retrieve).
Ex
Student Notebook
ó n
.N ci
Topic 3: Helpful tools
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 3-25. Topic 3: Helpful tools AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Operational Assistant
IBM i
OA For system operator, administrator, and user
ó n
• Tasks simplified:
.N ci
– Managing printer output
– Controlling jobs
.R a
– Handling messages
– Changing password
C rm
• Scheduling:
– Automatic power off and on
– Automatic disk cleanup
to fo
• System management:
– System backup
– Device control
– User enrollment
ec ivo
Figure 3-26. Operational Assistant AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Operational Assistant (OA) provides easy access to the most commonly performed functions.
It is provided free of charge with IBM i and is available to all users on all systems.
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Operational Assistant Menu

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 3-27. Operational Assistant Menu AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The OA functions can be accessed by displaying the Operational Assistant Menu. To display this
menu, enter the go assist command on any command line.
pr clu
IBM i tailors this menu based on the security class of the user accessing the menu.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Assistance levels
IBM i
Basic
n
• Displays that provide the most assistance
• Supports the more common user and operator tasks
ó
• Does not use computer terminology
.N ci
Intermediate
.R a
• Displays that support all system tasks
• Uses computer terminology
C rm
• Complex tasks can be done using this level
Advanced
to fo
• Same type of displays as intermediate assistance level
• Displays contain as many lines of information as possible
• Function keys and options not displayed
ec ivo
Figure 3-28. Assistance levels AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The system allows you to choose the amount of assistance you want to receive when you are
interacting with the system. The various degrees of assistance are referred to as assistance levels.
pr clu
There are three assistance levels: basic, intermediate, and advanced.

The level of assistance that a user chooses determines the number and complexity of the displays
they see. To select the assistance level you want, simply press F21 (Select assistance level) from a
display. Not all assistance levels are available from all displays.
Ex
As a system operator, many of the functions you perform require the use of the intermediate
assistance level, and as you become more familiar with system functions, you might even decide to
use the advanced level.
This course is designed around the intermediate assistance level. The default assistance level
shipped is *BASIC and is stored in the assistance level (QASTLVL) system value. Where the displays
or system actions are significantly different between basic and intermediate levels, basic interface
displays are also discussed.
Student Notebook
The commands below, most of which are discussed later in this course, support the basic
assistance level. To select the basic assistance level from these command displays, press F21.
• DSPMSG: Display messages
• WRKMSG: Work with messages
• WRKUSRJOB: Work with user jobs
n
• WRKSPLF: Work with spooled files
• WRKWTR: Work with writers
ó
• WRKCFGSTS: Work with configuration status
.N ci
• DSPSYSSTS: Display system status
• WRKUSRPRF: Work with user profiles
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Your choice: Basic or intermediate

IBM i
* BASIC
n
OR
ó
.N ci
* INTERMED
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 3-29. Your choice: Basic or intermediate AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
These two displays present identical information, but note the difference in format and wording
between the two. Most commands which support basic assistance level:
pr clu
• Allow you to use F21 to toggle between basic and intermediate level
• Remember the level you request each time you use the command
• Use that same level when you use the command again.
Ex
The default assistance level for a Power is set with a system value by the system administrator.
Student Notebook
User assistance level

IBM i
• Menu: F21 (where available):
n
– Changes the assistance level for the individual session
– Not available from System i Navigator
ó
.N ci
• CL command:
.R a
– Changes user profile:
• F11 - Keywords for command
C rm
• CHGPRF ASTLVL(*BASIC, *INTERMED, or *ADVANCED)
– Changes the assistance level for the individual user
to fo
• System value QASTLVL:
– Sets the default assistance level for system
ec ivo
Figure 3-30. User assistance level AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Information Assistant Options menu

IBM i
1 Option 10 from the IBM i main menu
n
2 F13 from the Help display
3 GO INFO
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 3-31. Information Assistant Options menu AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
To display the Information Assistant Options menu, enter option 10 from the IBM i Main Menu,
press F13 from most help menus, or type the GO INFO command on a command line.
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Information Assistant option one: Where Do I

Look for Information?
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 3-32. Information Assistant option one: Where Do I Look for Information? AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
This display contains links to help text about reference material.

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Information Assistant option two: How Can I
Comment On Information?
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 3-33. Information Assistant option two: How Can I Comment On Information? AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
This visual explains how to send your feedback to IBM.

pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Exercise
IBM i
Refer to Exercise Guide: Appendix A

Use the listed information to perform the lab
n
exercises.
ó
.N ci
Exercise: Using the keyboard and system displays
.R a
C rm
to fo
Inform instructor when you complete the
lab exercise.
ec ivo
Figure 3-34. Exercise AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Fill in the information in Appendix A of the Student Exercises guide. This information is provided by
the instructor. Use the information on this worksheet to perform the exercises.
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i
1. True or false: Any menu can be accessed on the system with

the GO command.
ó n
2. Which function key is used to access Help?
a. F1
.N ci
b. F3
c. F9
.R a
d. F12
C rm
3. Which function key is used to retrieve a command that was
previously entered?
a. F1
b. F3
to fo
c. F9
d. F12
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i
4. True or false: The default assistance level for a system is set

with a system value by the system administrator.
ó n
5. True or false: The Operational Assistant menu supports
functions performed by a user, a system operator, or by a
.N ci
system administrator?
.R a
6. True or false: The command entry display shows what
C rm
commands have been entered since you signed on to the
system.
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

n
– Menu
ó
– List
.N ci
– Entry
– Information
.R a
– Information Assist
C rm
– System Request
– Operational Assist
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 4. Overview of IBM i Access Client Solutions

This unit describes the IBM i Access Client Solutions user interface. We also
discuss the help facilities available for this interface.
ó n
.N ci
• Explain how you get IBM i Access Client Solutions
.R a
• List the tasks supported by IBM i Access Client Solutions
• Describe the IBM i Access Client Solutions main panel
C rm
• Describe the tasks performed IBM i Access Client Solutions
• Explain how to customize what IBM i Access Client Solutions will display
• Describe how to access the different help support available for this
to fo
interface

ec ivo
Accountability:
• Exercise
oy s
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 4. Overview of IBM i Access Client Solutions 4-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
• Explain how to customize what IBM i Access Client Solutions
.R a
displays
C rm
• Describe how to access the different help support available for
this interface
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
What is IBM i Access Client Solutions?

IBM i
IBM i Access Client Solution use 5770-XW1 license
n
• Java based, platform-independent interface
ó
• Supported operating systems:
– Windows 32 and 64-bit interface
.N ci
– Linux
– MAC
.R a
• Create new connections:
C rm
– Right mouse button
• Access IBM i Access programs and functions using:
– Taskbar, Online Help, and Control Panel
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 4-2. What is IBM i Access Client Solutions? AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
IBM i Access Client Solutions uses the same IBM i host servers as the other IBM i Access Family
products. And it requires the same IBM i Access Family license (XW1) in order to use the 5250
pr clu
emulation and Data Transfer features.

IBM i Access Client Solutions also provides two optional platform-specific packages which include
middleware for using and developing client applications.
IBM i Access Client Solutions - Windows Application Package for Windows operating systems.
Ex
Features include:
• Connectivity to DB2 for i using ODBC Net, and OLE DB
• Programming Toolkit for accessing IBM i system objects
• Support for TLS/SSL connections
• AFP printer driver
Student Notebook
IBM i Access Client Solutions - Linux Application Package for Linux operating systems. Features
include:
• Connectivity to DB2 for i using ODBC
• Full support for 64-bit ODBC data types
• TCP/IP connectivity
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
What you can do with IBM i Access Client
Solutions (1 of 2)
IBM i
IBM i Access Client Solutions provides support for:
n
• Emulation services:
– 5250 display station emulation
ó
– Printer emulation
.N ci
• Data transfer between your client system and your IBM i.
– Open Document Spreadsheet (*.ods)
.R a
– Excel Workbook (*.xlsx)
– Excel 97-2003 Workbook (*.xls)
C rm
– CSV (Comma delimited) (*.csv)
• Sign on Navigator for i
– launches the default web browser with sign-on screen for IBM Navigator for i
to fo
• Printer Output Management
– Support spool files transfer to PC
ec ivo
Figure 4-3. What you can do with IBM i Access Client Solutions (1 of 2) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
What you can do with IBM i Access Client

Solutions (2 of 2)
IBM i
IBM i Access Client Solutions provides support for:
n
• Access and analyze DB2 for i
– Run SQL Scripts
ó
– Analyze and optimize SQL
.N ci
• Launch 5250 Console
– LAN
.R a
– HMC
• Configure connection to Hardware Management Interface:
C rm
– Advanced System Management Interface (ASMI)
– Integrated Virtualization Manager (IVM)
– Hardware Management Console (HMC)
to fo
• Virtual Control Panel (VCP)
• SSL, Kerberos
• Service Location Protocol (SLP)
ec ivo
Figure 4-4. What you can do with IBM i Access Client Solutions (2 of 2) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
IBM i Access Client Solutions main panel

IBM i
n
1
ó
2
.N ci
3
.R a
4
C rm
to fo
5
ec ivo
Figure 4-5. IBM i Access Client Solutions main panel AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
BM i Access Client Solutions provides a platform independent interface that consolidates the most
common tasks for using and managing your IBM i system. Additional information about each task is
pr clu
available by either moving the cursor over the task or by using the tab and arrow keys to navigate
between groups and tasks. To select a task, click the task or use the tab and arrow keys to navigate
to a task and then press the enter key.
1. Menu bar Contains the available options for this window. To perform an option,
click it. The tasks available for the displayed window will appear in a
Ex
drop-down box.
2. System Choice: You can select system to work from defined system list.
3. Left pane Contains the following sections:
General
Database
Console
Management
Student Notebook
4. Right pane If a user moves the cursor over the task link in the left pane, the task
description is displayed on the right pane. When user clicks the task
link a new separate window is displayed.
5. Status bar Shows the status of the action being performed.
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Main panel: Left pane

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 4-6. Main panel: Left pane AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
In the left panel click the plus sign (+) next to each section to expand and see listed tasks.
The available tasks depend on the version and release of IBM i Access Client Solutions.
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
File drop-down menu

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 4-7. File drop-down menu AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
You can choose task from the left pane or you can also use the drop-down menus. The drop-down
menus offer additional functions not available in task sections.
pr clu
The File menu allows you to:

• Export Configuration - you can back up current configuration or transfer to another
workstation.
• Import Configuration - you can import configuration from another workstation.
Ex
• Copy Connections - provides an interface for copying system configurations between IBM i
Access Client Solutions and the legacy Windows configuration supported by IBM i Access for
Windows.
The legacy Windows configuration is not compatible with IBM i Access Client Solutions.
Copy Connections provides the capability to copy system configurations between these
products.
Console configurations will not be copied between IBM i Access Client Solutions and IBM i
Access for Windows.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty IBM i Access Client Solutions also provides a Windows platform specific product named IBM i
Access Client Solutions - Application Package.
The IBM i Access Client Solutions - Application Package uses the same legacy Windows
configuration as IBM i Access for Windows.
Copy Connections provides an interface for copying configurations from IBM i Access Clients
Solutions to IBM i Access Client Solutions - Application Package.
n
IBM i Access Client Solutions - Application Package and IBM i Access for Windows share the same
legacy Windows configuration. This shared configuration is identified on the panel as IBM i Access
ó
(Windows).
An Environment is a container of system configurations supported by the legacy Windows
.N ci
configuration. You can switch between Environments using the selection box.
You can also create and delete Environments by using the New and Delete buttons.
.R a
To copy system configurations, select one or more systems and then select the Arrow button to
copy the configuration.
C rm
To delete system configurations, select one or more systems and then select the X button.
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Edit drop-down menu

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 4-8. Edit drop-down menu AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Edit drop-down menu allows you to edit current preferences.

The next few visuals show you the preferences details and explanations.
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Edit - Preferences (1 of 5)
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 4-9. Edit - Preferences (1 of 5) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Use the Locale field to select the locale you want to use.
Use the Logging level to control the types of events logged. Logging is used to store information
pr clu
about the state of your IBM i Access Client Solutions application.

The logging levels are:
• FINEST Detailed tracing messages and the
Ex
• FINE level FINE Basic tracing messages and the CONFIG level
• CONFIG Messages about configuration and the INFO level
• INFO Informational messages and the WARNING level
• WARNING Warning messages and the SEVERE level
• SEVERE Serious failures
• OFF Nothing is logged
Student Notebook
The License refresh interval field allows you to specify the number of minutes to hold an IBM i
Access Family license after the license is no longer being used. Data Transfer and 5250 Emulator
require this license. The license is available when the IBM i Access Family Licensed Product
(57xx-XW1) is installed and configured on the IBM i.
Obtaining a license requires logon credentials. Increasing the license refresh interval might
decrease how often you are prompted for logon credentials, but will hold the license for a longer
period of time.
n
If the Default communication to SSL box is checked, the SSL is enabled for configuration
ó
connection to new system. The Default communication to SSL check box also determines
whether or not to use SSL when connecting to a system that is not currently configured. Checking
Default communication to SSL has no effect on System Configurations which already exist.
.N ci
Tool tip messages are available for some fields and are displayed when the cursor is over the field.
You can disable this function by clearing the Enable tool tip messages check box.
.R a
Information about each task on the main panel is available by either moving the cursor over the task
or by using the tab and arrow keys to navigate between groups and tasks. You can disable this
C rm
function by clearing the Enable description panel box.
Additional tab locations and other accessibility features are enabled when the Enable accessibility
mode box is checked.
to fo
Note
To enable accessibility features like screen readers, it is necessary to download and install the Java
Access Bridge package from Oracle.
ec ivo
If the Client SSL must be FIPS-compliant box is checked, however, the product will attempt to
verify that the current Java Runtime Environment (JRE) is configured to be FIPS-compliant for
secure connections. FIPS compliance must be supported in the currently running JRE in order for
oy s
the application to run in a FIPS-compliant mode.

pr clu
When the Read netrc file for login information box is checked, the product will use the current
user's netrc file for determining login information.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
The settings on this tab show the location where the configuration and service log information is
kept. The Open button allows you to display the contents of that location. The Clear button will
pr clu
remove the files at that location.

The Configuration Root is the root location of the configuration. There are several sub-directories
below this directory where the configuration is stored.
The Logs Directory is relative to the Configuration Root and is the location where the logs are
Ex
stored when you enable logging.

The Dumps Directory is relative to the Configuration Root and is the location where the service
logs are stored when you use Tools > Generate Service Logs from the main menu.
The Service Directory is relative to the Configuration Root and is the location where service
information is stored when you use Tools > Package Service Logs from the main menu.
The location of the Configuration Root defaults to a platform-specific path.
To change the Configuration Root location, set the com.ibm.iaccess.AcsBaseDirectory
property in the AcsConfig.properties file and restart IBM i Access Client Solutions.
Student Notebook
If the path to the Configuration Root does not exist, IBM i Access Client Solutions will fail to start.
If the configuration directories below the Configuration Root do not exist, they will automatically be
created.
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
Change IBM i passwords provides an interface for changing your password on one or more IBM i
systems. In order to change the password on multiple systems at once, the current system
pr clu
password must be the same.

To change your password, select the system (or systems) and click the Change Password button.
Then you are prompted for the old (current) password and the new password, followed by
information is on whether or not the password change attempt was successful for each system.
Ex
Student Notebook
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
The Restrictions tab provides an interface for restricting certain functions of the product. By
checking any of these items, the corresponding function will no longer be available to any users on
pr clu
the current workstation.

For instance, if you check System Configurations, users will no longer be able to launch the
System Configurations interface to create, remove, or edit system configurations.
The Search the local network for console configurations box refers to the console search
Ex
functionality accessed by using the Locate Console... button of the System Configurations user
interface.
If any functions are currently restricted for a user, the user can see which functions are unavailable
by selecting Show Restricted Functions option from the Tools menu.
You must have system administrator privileges to add or remove restrictions.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
Use the Download Location option to set the location where the printer output files are
downloaded.
pr clu
Download to desktop: Printer output is downloaded to the user's desktop and placed in a folder
named after the target system.
Download to a temporary location: Printer output is downloaded into a temporary subdirectory
for the user.
Ex
Download to the product's configuration root: A subdirectory named Splf is created below the
product's configuration root, and printer output is downloaded there. The text area displays the path
name of this directory.
Specify a location: Printer output is downloaded to the specified location.
Regardless of the Download Location setting, printer output is stored in a subdirectory unique to the
target system.
Student Notebook
The Use PDF format if available option is used to determine whether printer output with a *SCS or
*AFPDS device type should be converted to PDF format. If this option is enabled and the host
supports PDF transformations, then the client file is stored in PDF format with the.pdf file
extension. Otherwise, it is stored in plain text and stored with a .txt file extension. The host
supports PDF transformations if the Transform Services product (option 1) is installed and
functional.
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Actions drop-down menu

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 4-14. Actions drop-down menu AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
From the Action drop-down menu you can choose this same tasks which you can find in left pane.
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Tools drop-down menu

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 4-15. Tools drop-down menu AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
From the Tools drop-down menu you can choose following tasks:
Generate Service Logs - Generate log from IBM i Access Client Solutions.
pr clu
Package Service Logs - This function gathers details about the workstation environment and
packages the service logs in to a zip archive that can be sent to IBM.
File Association - Allows you to assign file extension to tasks. The following extension can be
associated:
Ex
• .dttx - Data Transfer upload request

• .dtfx - Data Transfer download request
• .hod - 5250 emulator session profile
• .bchx - multiple session emulation profile
• .ws - 5250 emulator session profile (Personal Communications)
• .bch - multiple session emulation profile (Personal Communications)
Key Management - Can be used to manage trusted signer certificates for Secure Sockets Layer
(SSL) connections. You can manage Key database information or Key database content.
Service Directory - Place on the PC where you can find logs.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Help drop-down menu

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 4-16. Help drop-down menu AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Help drop-down menu offers links to:

• Getting started site
pr clu
• Support home page

• Info about current installation
Ex
Student Notebook
ó n
Starting and basic configuration of
.N ci
the IBM i Access Client Solutions
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 4-17. Starting and basic configuration of the IBM i Access Client Solutions AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
From where do you download?

IBM i
n
Download methods:
ó
• IBM i Access Client Solutions website
.N ci
• Entitled Systems Support (ESS)
.R a
Installation:
C rm • Windows
• Linux
• MAC
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 4-18. From where do you download? AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The IBM i Access Client Solution base package can be downloaded from following site:
https://www-01.ibm.com/marketing/iwm/iwm/web/preLogin.do?source=swg-ia
pr clu
Entitled Systems Support (ESS):

https://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/ess
The IBM i Access Client Solutions can be downloaded from Entitled Systems Support (ESS)
Ex
website under 5761-SS1 or 5770-SS1.ESS site. The base package for IBM i Access Client
Solutions can also be downloaded from Entitled Systems Support (ESS) under 5761-SS1 (feature
codes 5817, 5818, 5819) or 5770-SS1 (feature codes 5817, 5818, or 5819). Using the hide/show
option on the ESS website will allow you to download the base package or just the optional
packages for Windows and Linux.
Because it is running on different operating systems, unzip all files and look at:
../Documentation/GettingStarted.html
for instructions on how to install on your operating system.
Student Notebook
Launch IBM i Access Client Solutions

IBM i
n
Launch by click desktop
shortcut (Windows)
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 4-19. Launch IBM i Access Client Solutions AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Go to the Documentation directory and double-click GettingStarted.html. Follow by the

installation instruction depending on your operating system or environment (32 or 64 bit).
pr clu
In the GettingSatrted.html, depending on the operating system you will find a section on how
to launch the IBM i Access Client Solutions.
For the windows operating system, you should create a shortcut on the desktop, or you can find the
launcher file at the following location (this is an example for 64-bit Windows):
Ex
C:\Users\IBM_ADMIN\IBM\ClientSolutions\Start_Programs\Windows_x86-64\a
cslaunch_win-64.exe
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Configuring connection (1 of 3)
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 4-20. Configuring connection (1 of 3) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
On the left pane click System Configurations.

On the General tab, for the System name field enter your system name (need DNS) or IP address.
pr clu
Optionally you can enter a description in the Description field. Define whether or not SSL will be
used. (This first needs to be set up in Edit > Preferences).
The next visual describes the next two tabs.
Ex
Student Notebook
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
On the Connection tab choose the Password Prompting method.

Next click the Console tab to choose the type of Console (LAN/HMC) and specify either the IP
pr clu
address or Name.
If you are using HMC or IVM for the Hardware Management Interface (for 1 and 2) then enter the
name or IP address and optional description.
Click OK or Save/New if want to add additional partition or server.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
At this point you have configured system or systems connections.

You can modify or delete selected configuration. If you want return to main panel click Close.
pr clu
On the left pane select the system you added. Then you can use the tasks in the left pane to
perform actions like running a 5250 emulator or starting data transfer, and so on.
Ex
Student Notebook
Exercise
IBM i

Instructor provides the information that is listed; this data is used
n
to perform the lab exercises.
ó
Exercise: Overview of IBM i Access Client Solutions
.N ci
Inform instructor when you have completed your exercise.
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i
1. True or false: IBM i Access Client Solutions does not require

any additional software to be installed on the PC.
ó n
2. IBM i Access Client Solutions allows you to manage which of
the following?
.N ci
a. 5250 emulator
b. Printer emulator
.R a
c. LAN/HMC Console session
d. All of the above
C rm 3. True or false: You can restrict some tasks for user with the
IBM i Access Client Solutions.
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i
4. True or false: IBM i Access Client Solutions allows change

user password for many partitions.
ó n
5. Which of the following Hardware Management Interface are
supported?
.N ci
a. HMC
b. IVM
.R a
c. CNN
d. ASMI
C rm
6. True or false: IBM i Access Client Solutions is available in 32-
bit or 64-bit.
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
• Explain how to customize what IBM i Access Client Solutions
.R a
displays
C rm
• Describe how to access the different help support available for
this interface
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 5. Overview of IBM Navigator for i

This unit describes the IBM Navigator for i GUI.
n
ó
.N ci
• Describe IBM Navigator for i and how to install it on the system
• List what functions are and are not included with this GUI
.R a
• Explain which jobs need to be active on the system to support this GUI
• Explain the steps to start this GUI and sign on
C rm
• Explain how to access the tasks available in this GUI
• Explain how to set up which pages open at startup
• Explain how to customize which tasks and functions a user can access
to fo
Accountability:
ec ivo
• Exercise
oy s
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 5. Overview of IBM Navigator for i 5-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

• Describe IBM Navigator for i GUI and how to install it on the
n
system
ó
.N ci
• Explain which jobs need to be active on the system to support
this GUI
.R a
C rm
• Explain how to customize which tasks and functions a user can
to fo
access
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
ó n
Topic 1: What is it and how does it
.N ci
work?
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 5-2. Topic 1: What is it and how does it work? AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
IBM i Access Family

IBM i
• Release 7.2 IBM Access Family of products

– IBM i Access for Windows (5770XE1)
n
• Can be connected to all supported IBM i versions
ó
• Not refreshed for 7.2
• No planned support beyond Windows 8.1
.N ci
– IBM i Access for Web/Mobile (5770XH2)
.R a
• IBM i system hosted HTML-based web product
C rm
• Optimized for mobile access
– IBM i Access Client Solutions (5733XJ1)

to fo
• Java based, platform-independent interface that runs on most operating
systems that support Java
• Support WINDOWS, LINUX, MAC operating systems
ec ivo
Figure 5-3. IBM i Access Family AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
What is IBM Navigator for i?

IBM i
• It is the strategic management console for IBM i
n
• It is the web-based console included in IBM i starting with 6.1
ó
• It is considered a Level 1 console that is used to manage a
.N ci
POWER server with IBM i
.R a
• Starting at 7.1 you can specify which server to access
C rm • It contains 15 task categories and their functions similar to

System i Navigator (over 300 tasks)
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 5-4. What is IBM Navigator for i? AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
IBM Navigator for i allows you to easily manage an IBM i partition without having to purchase or
install anything. Everything is included in the IBM i operating system.
pr clu
Just ensure the HTTP Admin Server is running on your system:

(STRTCPSVR SERVER(*HTTP) HTTPSVR(*ADMIN))
Additional task categories and features appear as plug-ins when you install products such as
BRMS, High Availability, Advanced Job Scheduler, or OmniFind.
Ex
After just a couple of clicks, your desired task appears as a portlet within the console's work area.
Multiple tasks can be active at one time, as each task portlet has its own tab appearing at the top of
the work area for easy access.
Student Notebook
How do you get it?

IBM i
• IBM Navigator for i is included as part of the base operating system

option three (5770-SS1 option three).
n
• The following products must also be installed (and are probably already
ó
on your system):
– Host servers 5770-SS1 option 12
.N ci
– Qshell 5770-SS1 option 30
.R a
– PASE 5770-SS1 option 33
– IBM HTTP Server for IBM i 5770-DG1
C rm
– IBM Developer Kit for Java
– J2SE 5.0 32-bit
5770-JV1
5770-JV1 option 8
to fo
– IBM Toolbox for Java 5770-JC1
ec ivo
Figure 5-5. How do you get it? AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
What is included?
IBM i
• All web-enabled functions of System i Navigator are included:
n
– Organized into 15 different task categories (over 300 tasks total).
– Jobs, messages, system values, database, users, file systems,
ó
security, performance, and so forth.
.N ci
• In addition, functions from the following for - purchase licensed
program products (LPPs) are available with this GUI when the
.R a
LPPs are installed:
C rm
– IBM PowerHA SystemMirror for i 5770-HAS
– BRMS (Backup, Recovery, and Media Services) 5770-BR1
– IBM Performance Tools for IBM i (DiskWatcher) 5770-PT1
to fo
– IBM Performance Tools for IBM i (JobWatcher) 5770-PT1
option three
ec ivo
Figure 5-6. What is included? AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
What is not included?

IBM i
• Management Central functions:
n
– Use IBM Systems Director products for multisystem tasks on the web
• Database functions that involve graphics and charts:
ó
– SQL scripts
.N ci
– Visual Explain
– SQL Assist
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 5-7. What is not included? AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Some functionality which was available on IBM i Navigator is not available IBM Navigator for i.
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
How it works (1 of 2)
IBM i
• Ensure that the HTTP administration servers are running.

– HTTP administration servers are auto start servers beginning in 6.1;
n
starts with the TCP/IP servers.
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 5-8. How it works (1 of 2) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Is also possible to verify that the HTTP administrator server is running from a 5250 screen. Enter
the command to work with active jobs (WRKACTJOB) and look for the QHTTPSVR subsystem.
pr clu
Starting with 6.1, all of the web-based consoles execute on the Integrated Web Application Admin
servers.
The ADMIN2 job must be running in the QHTTPSVR subsystem in order for a user to use the IBM
Navigator for i interface for connection to your system.
Ex
ADMIN, ADMIN2, and ADMIN3 are jobs that automatically start when your system is started or
powered on or when the administrator runs the Start TCP (STRTCP) command.
Student Notebook
What is included: Base functions (1 of 3)

IBM i
Target System and

Adding, selecting system to work with.
Group
n
Frequently usage functions saved as favorite to easy
Favorites
ó
access.
Commonly used system tasks include viewing system
System
.N ci
status, messages, disk status, and passwords.
Monitors Allows you to monitor your system.
.R a
Basic tasks to easily manage lists of messages, printer
Basic Operations
C rm
output, and printers.
Control the work that is performed on the system,
Work Management including support for interactive and batch work. Distribute
resources to ensure applications run well.
to fo
Functions to help you manage both hardware and
Configuration and
software on your system, including system values, time
Service
management, and disk units.
ec ivo
Figure 5-9. What is included: Base functions (1 of 3) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
These functions show after opening (expanding) the IBM i Management task.
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty

IBM i
Network Control TCP/IP configuration, remote access services,

networking servers, and IP policies.
n
Integrated Server Manage servers that are hosted by i and enroll and
ó
Administration manage users and groups.
Plan and implement security on your system, including
.N ci
Security
authorization lists, object permissions, and cryptographic
functions.
.R a
Display and manage a complete list of the users and
Users and Groups
groups, and create, delete, and modify users and lists.
C rm
Perform many common admin database operations,
Databases access and modify objects, work with performance
monitors, and access the health center.
to fo
Journal
Work with journals and journal receivers.
Management
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
These functions show after opening (expanding) the IBM i Management task.
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook

IBM i
Collect performance data, and view the collection to

Performance
investigate potential performance issues.
n
File Systems Link to the most commonly used file systems tasks,
ó
integrated file system, i NetServer, network file system.
Internet Work with IBM i Internet configuration tasks, HTTP server,
.N ci
Configurations digital certificates, IBM IPP, web-based help server, and
Internet Setup wizard.
.R a
Settings Allows IBM Navigator for i service console parameters.
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
This visual continues the list of basic functions displayed when the IBM i Management task is
opened.
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
What is included: More LPPs

IBM i
The PowerHA interface is designed for ease of managing and

monitoring your high availability environment. You can configure
n
your environment, check the environment status, and perform
PowerHA actions to fix problems from any node in the cluster with
ó
PowerHA installed. You need to have PowerHA installed on all
of your cluster nodes in order to use the PowerHA interface
effectively.
.N ci
Simply and easily manage your most critical and complex
Backup, Recovery, backups, including online backups of Lotus servers. You can
.R a
and Media Services also recover your system fully in the event of a disaster or
hardware failure.
C rm
Use browser-based performance tasks to manage performance
data collections, use GUI to collect performance data, and
Performance
graphically view and analyze performance data with Collection
Services, Job Watcher, and Disk Watcher, iDoctor
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 5-12. What is included: More LPPs AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
More LPPs functions become available after you install these products.
The Performance function listed here is different from Performance listed under the basic functions.
pr clu
Under basic Performance, only collection and viewing of performance data is allowed. The
additional Performance functions give you a GUI interface and tools to analyze your performance
data.
Ex
Student Notebook
ó n
.N ci
Topic 2: Overview of this GUI
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 5-13. Topic 2: Overview of this GUI AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Enter the URL

IBM i
• Enter the following URL into a browser:

– http://system:2001 (either sysname or IP address)
ó n
.N ci
.R a
• Supports the following browsers:
C rm
– Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 6.0 or later
– Mozilla Firefox Version 1.0 or later
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 5-14. Enter the URL AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Open a web browser to connect to your system and specify either system name or IP address, and
port number 2001.
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Certificate exchange
IBM i
• Accept the certificate warnings.

– The console runs on SSL. Firefox 2
ó n
.N ci
Internet Explorer
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 5-15. Certificate exchange AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Secure port: Sign-on window

IBM i
• The URL is rerouted to secure path: Port 2005.

• Enter your IBM i user ID and password for this system.
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 5-16. Secure port: Sign-on window AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
On this window, you enter your user ID and password to sign on to your system with IBM Navigator
for i.
pr clu
Notice that the browser is redirected to a secure path using port 2005.
https://<systemname>:2005/ibm/console/logon.jsp
Note
Ex
In IBM i 7.1 this interface does not support expired passwords. If your password is expired and you
are working with a 5250 emulation session, you can specify a new password and continue the
sign-on. However, this interface does not allow a user to specify a new password.
Since 7.2 expired password is supported.
Student Notebook
Web console interface

IBM i
• Expand IBM i Management to view the task categories.

• Click the desired task to view Welcome page for that task.
n
• Click a task on the Welcome page or click Show All Tasks to
ó
view all web-enabled tasks for that category.
• Each selected task appears in a separate portal, and a tab
.N ci
appears at the top of the workspace.
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 5-17. Web console interface AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
All the functions that were accessed by port 2001 earlier (5.4 or earlier) can be reached by opening
the IBM i task page.
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
New controls overview (1 of 3)

IBM i
Left navigation groups all the New tab for each view!
tasks in logical compartments.
ó n
.N ci
Help link!
.R a
Most common
functions
C rm
included on
each Welcome
menu
to fo
All functions
ec ivo
Figure 5-18. New controls overview (1 of 3) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
On the left navigation, there are three main navigation items:

1. Standard Welcome page.
pr clu
2. System with base functions to manage your server and any installed LPPs, like BRMS.
3. Settings like Credential Store, and Console Logging and Tracing.
For each open task, there is an open tab.
Ex
Student Notebook

IBM i
The All tasks view
n
shows every
task that is
ó
supported for
this category in
.N ci
a tree view.
.R a
1. Click tasks to
see actions that
C rm
you can
perform.
2. Click an action
or click task or
to fo
click Close.
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
Expanding All Tasks on the previous visual shows the window on this visual.
In this example, the Jobs task was expanded. The actions list below the Jobs task can be
pr clu
performed by clicking them.

Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty

IBM i
Select an entry
n
• Right-click icon
ó
• Tasks for object
.N ci
.R a
C rm Select one or more entries
to fo
• Check mark
• Select from available actions
- Columns, Filters, Sorts
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
To perform actions against the listed objects, you can either:

• Right-click the icon (next to the name) for your object, and then select an action from the
pr clu
drop-down menu.
• Select an object (place a check mark), and then click the down arrow for Actions at the top of
the display. Then click an action in the drop-down menu. This technique let's you act on multiple
items in the list.
Ex
Student Notebook
New terminology
IBM i
Banner: Common image Page bar: Navigate

across all consoles between pages
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
Navigation
Tree: Group
to fo
tasks
Work area
ec ivo
Figure 5-21. New terminology AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Page opened from the navigation tree group task displays in a separate tab on the page bar.
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
ó n
.N ci
Topic 3: Overview of system task page
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 5-22. Topic 3: Overview of system task page AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Set Target System

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 5-23. Set Target System AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Use the Set target system to perform actions on a system other than the one you signed on to.
The steps to set your target system are:
pr clu
- On the left pane click Set Target System.

- Notice that the current target system is the system to which this browser was started. The
current system IP address, release of the operating system and current user’s ID are
displayed.
Ex
- Click the Add button.

- On the Add Target System display, specify system name or IP address, user ID and
password for target system.
- Click OK.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
System status
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 5-24. System status AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
On the left pane click System and on the main pane the System Status when the dialog opens, it
displays statistical information about your system for that instant in time. The exception is the CPU
pr clu
usage field, which displays a cumulative average during the time displayed in the Elapsed time
field.
You can find more detailed information on the following tabs of this window:
• General
Ex
• Jobs
• Memory
• Processors
• Disk Space
• Addresses
Student Notebook
Setting up 5250 Emulation

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 5-25. Setting up 5250 Emulation AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
For those who prefer to work with the traditional green screen 5250 interface, this GUI provides an
option to open or start an emulation window.
pr clu
- On the left pane click the System task on the left side of your browser window.
- Click the 5250 Emulation link in the work area on the right.
- You can then set the parameters for your emulation session.
Ex
- Click the Start Session button to begin your emulation session.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
5250 Emulation session

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 5-26. 5250 Emulation session AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
After you perform the steps on the previous page, you will see the window on this page.
With this interface, some of the function buttons are listed on the top and some are listed at the
pr clu
bottom of the screen.

Use the Keyboard function keys button to toggle between click function key use and traditional
keyboard use.
When the green light indicator next to Keyboard focus is on, your keyboard on the PC workstation
Ex
is active.
Student Notebook
Change Password
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 5-27. Change Password AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Use the Change Password link to change your own password or with the proper authorization, the
passwords of other user profiles.
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Exercise
IBM i

n
exercises.
ó
Exercise: Overview of IBM Navigator for i
.N ci
.R a
Inform instructor when you have
completed your exercise.
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
Fill in the information in Appendix A of the Student Exercises guide. This information is provided by
the instructor. Use the information on this worksheet for performing the exercises.
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i
1. True or false: IBM Navigator for i requires that additional

software is installed on the PC.
ó n
2. True or false: IBM Navigator for i is included in the OS?
.N ci
3. Which of the following is not included in IBM Navigator for i?
a. Basic Operations
.R a
b. Work Management
C rm
c. Configuration and Service
d. Management Central
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i
4. Which of the following jobs must be running on your system

in order for a user to connect to your system with IBM
n
Navigator for i?
ó
a. Admin
b. Admin2
.N ci
c. Admin3
d. Qhttpsvr
.R a
5. True or false: In the browser, the user should always
C rm
designate port 2005 when they start the connection request.
6. True or false: In IBM Navigator for i, you cannot customize

the startup page.
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Unit summary
IBM i

• Describe IBM Navigator for i GUI and how to install it on the
n
system
ó
.N ci
• Explain which jobs need to be active on the system to support
this GUI
.R a
C rm
• Explain how to customize which tasks and functions a user can
to fo
access
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 6. Messaging concepts

This unit describes the concepts of messaging and how this function works
on the Power Systems with IBM i.
ó n
.N ci
• Describe how the message function works
.R a
• Explain what a message queue is and how they are created
• List the different types of messages that can be sent
C rm
• List where messages can be sent from and where they can be sent to

to fo
Accountability:
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 6. Messaging concepts 6-1

Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
• List where messages can be sent from and where they can be
sent to
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Types of messages
IBM i
Informational
n
The manufacturing program completed successfully.
ó
The system will shutdown at 9:00 p.m.
.N ci
.R a
C rm
Inquiry: Requires reply
Are you finished with the report?
to fo
Do you have the licensed program tape?
Verify alignment on device PRT01. (I C G N R)

ec ivo
Figure 6-2. Types of messages AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
A message is a communication sent from a person or program to another person or program.

Messages are the means of communication among workstation users, between the system
pr clu
operator and workstation users, and between programs and workstation users.
There are two main types of messages that you, as a system operator, will send.
• Informational
These messages do not require a reply.
Ex
• Inquiry
An inquiry message requires a reply. It might also contain information.

Student Notebook
Where messages come from

IBM i
System operator System programs
ó n
System going down Cursor in protected area
.N ci
Work-
station
.R a
C rm
Can accounts receivable
program run?
Mfg. program completed
successfully
to fo
Other workstations Application programs
ec ivo
Figure 6-3. Where messages come from AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
What is a message queue?

IBM i
Think of a message queue as being a kind of mailbox.
ó n
.N ci
Prt01 is out of forms.
.R a
The system will be IPLed in 10 minutes.
C rm
The workstation DSP03 is offline.
Do you have the licensed program tape?

to fo
The program OPR01 compiled
successfully.
ec ivo
Figure 6-4. What is a message queue? AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Even though it might appear that a message is being sent directly to a user or a workstation,
messages are always sent to a message queue.
pr clu
A message queue is similar to a mailbox.

• It receives and holds messages (just like your mailbox receives and holds your mail) until the
messages can be read.
• Just as you can decide when to view and respond to your mail, you can decide when to view
Ex
and respond to messages.

Student Notebook
How are message queues created?

IBM i
Workstation device User profile is

description is created. created.
n
PROFILE
DSP01 AS2401
ó
.N ci
DSP01 AS2401
Workstation User
.R a
message queue message queue
C rm QSYSOPR
ARDEPT
to fo
System operator User-created
message queue message queue
CRTMSGQ
System supplied
ec ivo
Figure 6-5. How are message queues created? AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
A message queue can be created whenever:

• A device description for a workstation (display) is created.
pr clu
A workstation message queue is automatically created when a workstation (or display) is

created. A workstation message queue is created for each display configured on the system.
The message queue name is the same as the display name.
• A user (profile) is created.
Ex
A user message queue is created when a user profile is created. A user message queue exists
for each user profile. The name of the user message queue is the same as the user profile
name unless it is specified differently.
• The system operator message queue (QSYSOPR) is supplied as part of i. When the Power is
configured for the first time, QSYSOPR is created.
• Other message queues can be created by Power implementers with the Create Message
Queue (CRTMSGQ) command.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. Which of the following message types is requesting a reply?

a. Informational
n
b. Questioning
c. Inquiry
ó
d. User
.N ci
2. When you create a user profile, which of the following is automatically
created?
.R a
a. User message queue
b. Workstation message queue
C rm
c. System operator message queue
d. Application message queue
3. Which message type interrupts a user who is signed on to a 5250

to fo
emulation session?
a. Informational
b. Inquiry
c. Workstation
ec ivo
d. Break © Copyright IBM Corporation 2001, 2016
Figure 6-6. Checkpoint AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex

Student Notebook
Unit summary
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
• List where messages can be sent from and where they can be
sent to
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
As a system operator, you are expected to be the message expert. Not only do you display, send,
receive, and remove messages, but you are also asked to help others with their questions. You are
pr clu
asked to explain what the messages mean and how to respond to them.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 7. Messaging using 5250 emulation

This unit describes how to work with and manage the messaging function
when working with a 5250 emulation session.
ó n
.N ci
• Explain how message queues get allocated
.R a
• Discuss the menus and commands used to work with messaging
• Describe the difference between a message and a break message
C rm
• Explain the process used to display and manage messages
• Explain the difference between an informational message and an inquiry
message
to fo
• Explain the different ways that messages are displayed on your screen
• Explain how to determine who allocated a message queue to themselves

ec ivo
Accountability:
• Exercise
oy s
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 7. Messaging using 5250 emulation 7-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

n
• Discuss the menus and commands used to work with
ó
messaging
.N ci
• Describe the difference between a message and a break
message
.R a
C rm
• Explain the difference between an informational message and
an inquiry message
• Explain the different ways that messages are displayed on
your screen
to fo
• Explain how to determine who allocated a message queue to
themselves
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
How are message queues allocated?

IBM i
• At sign-on, you are assigned certain messages queues:
n
– Workstation device message queue
ó
– User profile message queue
.N ci
• Optionally, you can allocate a message queue:
.R a
– By assigning a message queue to yourself:
C rm
• CHGMSGQ QSYSOPR *BREAK
• CHGMSGQ ARDEPT *NOTIFY
– Assuming your user profile is authorized to that specific message
queue
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 7-2. How are message queues allocated? AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
At sign-on, the user is assigned certain message queues. When working with a 5250 green screen
session, the following messages are automatically allocated:
pr clu
• Workstation device message queue: The upper right corner on the sign-on screen shows the
name of the workstation device for your session. The message queue assigned to that device or
workstation session will automatically be assigned to the user.
• User profile message queue: A message queue is automatically created for each user profile
Ex
created on the system. The user message queue is automatically allocated when the user signs
on.
The Change Message Queue (CHGMSGQ) command changes the attributes of the specified
message queue. If the delivery mode is being changed to *BREAK or *NOTIFY, and if the message
queue is not already in *BREAK or *NOTIFY mode or specifically allocated to another job, it is
implicitly allocated by this command.
Student Notebook
Delivery (DLVRY) specifies how the messages sent to this message queue are delivered. The
method of delivery is in effect only while the message queue is allocated to the job. When the
queue is no longer allocated, the delivery mode is changed to *HOLD for workstation, system
operator, and user message queues.
*HOLD The messages are held in the message queue until they are
requested by the user or program.
n
*BREAK When a message arrives at the message queue, the job to which the
message queue is allocated is interrupted, and the program specified
ó
for the Break handling program (PGM) parameter is called, or the
Display Message (DSPMSG) command is processed. When changing
to *BREAK mode, if a program name is not specified, or if
.N ci
PGM(*SAME) is specified, the PGM parameter defaults to *DSPMSG for
the break program and *ALWRPY for the allow other jobs to reply
.R a
attribute.
*NOTIFY When a message arrives at the message queue, an interactive job to
C rm
which the message queue is allocated is notified by the Message light
turning on and a buzzer sounding (if you have that feature).
*DFT Messages requiring replies are answered with their default reply. No
messages are added to the message queue unless the message
to fo
queue is QSYSOPR.
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
General System Tasks menu

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 7-3. General System Tasks menu AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The menu displayed on this page is the General System Tasks menu. The command used to
display the General System Tasks menu is GO SYSTEM.
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Message menu
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 7-4. Message menu AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The menu displayed on this page is the Messages menu.

• The command used to display the Messages menu is Go Message.
pr clu
• Another way to display this menu is to select option 4 - Messages from the General System
Tasks menu, the menu displayed on the previous page.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Option 1: Send Message: SNDMSG

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 7-5. Option 1: Send Message: SNDMSG AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Send Message (SNDMSG) command is used by a display station user to send an immediate
message from their display station to one or more message queues. The message can be sent to
pr clu
the system operator, to other display station users, to a user's message queue, to all currently
active users' message queues, or to the system history log, QHST. The sender can require a reply
from the message receiver. The primary users of this command are display station users and the
system operator.
Restrictions:
Ex
• You must have object operational (*OBJOPR) and add (*ADD) authorities for the message queue.
• You must have use (*USE) authority for the specified message queues and *USE authority for
the libraries in which they are located.
• The SNDMSG command allows a message of up to 512 characters of first-level message text to
be sent.
This command sends inquiry messages (specified by MSGTYPE(*INQ)) to one message queue or to
two message queues if one of the queues is *HSTLOG.
Student Notebook
Option 2: Send Message: SNDBRKMSG

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 7-6. Option 2: Send Message: SNDBRKMSG AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Send Break Message (SNDBRKMSG) command is used to send an immediate message to one
or more work station message queues. An immediate message is a message that is not predefined
pr clu
and is not stored in a message file. The command causes the message to be delivered always in
break mode.
The display message (DSPMSG) display is shown for the message when it is received, regardless
of the setting of the message queue's delivery mode, severity, and break handling program.
However, the message might not be displayed in some cases, depending on the Break Message
Ex
job attribute.
This command is primarily intended for the system operator's use.
Restrictions:
• This command can be used to send break messages to work station message queues only.
• This command cannot send inquiry messages (specified by MSGTYPE(INQ)) to multiple
workstations.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Option 3: Display Message: DSPMSG

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 7-7. Option 3: Display Message: DSPMSG AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Display Messages (DSPMSG) command is used by the display station user to show the
messages received at the specified message queue.
pr clu
If the message queue is not allocated to the job in which this command is entered or to any other
job, it is implicitly allocated by this command for the duration of the command.
When the messages are shown, options are also shown that allow the user to either remove one or
more messages from the queue or to enter a reply to each inquiry message.
Ex
Student Notebook
Display your messages

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 7-8. Display your messages AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The following function keys allow you to manipulate messages:

• F10=Display messages: This includes those messages that were excluded from other
pr clu
displays due to the parameters of the Display Message (DSPMSG) command.

• F11=Remove a message: Position the cursor over a message and press this key. The
message is removed from the message queue.
• F13=Remove all: Press this key to remove all messages from the message queue. The default
Ex
reply is sent for any unanswered inquiry messages.

• F14=Work with problem: Position the cursor over a message that is preceded with an asterisk
(*) and press this key to work with the problem. The key is operational and shown on the display
only when a message has an asterisk.
• F16=Remove all except unanswered: All messages except the unanswered inquiry
messages and sender copy messages are removed.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty • F21=Select assistance level: This function allows you to change the Power interface you are
using. You can choose the:
- Operational Assistant interface
- Current Power interface
• F22=Display list details: This function displays additional information about the message
queue in which the messages are contained.
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Display inquiry messages

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 7-9. Display inquiry messages AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
An inquiry message is a message that is asking a question or expecting a reply. Inquiry messages
can be sent by a user or a program. A user might be asking a question of another user or a program
pr clu
might be asking for input in order to continue processing.

Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Option 4: Display QSYSOPR messages

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 7-10. Option 4: Display QSYSOPR messages AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
When you place the cursor on a specific message on this panel and press the F1 key, it will take
you to the display shown on the next visual.
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Display message details

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 7-11. Display message details AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Additional Messages Information screen is displayed when you place the cursor on a specific
message on the Display Messages screen (see the previous page in the student guide) and press
pr clu
the F1 - help key.

Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Option 6: Work with Message Queues: WRKMSGQ

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 7-12. Option 6: Work with Message Queues: WRKMSGQ AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Work with Message Queues (WRKMSGQ) display shows a list of message queues you have
authority to use. You can use this list to do some common tasks related to messages.
pr clu
The list of message queues shown is based on the value you enter for the message queue (MSGQ)
parameter. For example, if you type T* in the library QGPL, a list of all the message queues starting
with T in library QGPL is displayed.
If you know the name of the object, you can fill in the top blank fields with the option number, object
Ex
name, and library name, and then press the Enter key.
You can also type the option number next to a specific object and press the Enter key. You can type
option numbers next to more than one object at a time to do more than one task, one after the other.
Student Notebook
How messages are displayed

IBM i
Display Messages
n
Queue.... : QSYSOPR Program...: *DSPMSG
Library.... : QSYS Library....:
ó
Severity.. : 70 Delivery....: *HOLD DSPMSG command
.N ci
Type reply (if required), press Enter.
Device COOKPCF no Messages
Display longer communicating.
Device COOKPCI no longer communicating.
Controller Messages
COOKPC has disconnected.
.R a
Queue.... : QPADEV0001 Program...: *DSPMSG
Library.... : QSYS contactedLibrary....:
Controller COOKPC online ITSCTRN.
Select
Device one of the
QPADEV0007
Severity.. : 00 following:
no longer communicating.
Delivery....: *NOTIFY
C rm
1.Send
Type reply a(ifmessage
required), press Enter. Receive a break message
2.Send a: AS2401
From... break message
04/02/08 09:02:14
A break message interrupts your current job
and displays
Selection the message on your screen.
or command
to fo
===>
Function key not allowed Receive on the message line

ec ivo
Figure 7-13. How messages are displayed AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The system displays messages:

• On the display messages display (DSPMSG command).
pr clu
• As a break message. The current job is interrupted and the message is shown on the display.
• On the message line.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Work with Object Locks

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 7-14. Work with Object Locks AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Work with Object Locks (WRKOBJLCK) command allows you to work with the object lock
requests in the system for a specified object. You can work with both held locks and locks waiting to
pr clu
be applied.
This command can be used by a user to determine who has allocated a message queue for their
use. For example, you are not allowed to set a message queue in break mode if somebody else has
already allocated that same queue for their use. This command shows you who already locked, or
allocated, this message queue.
Ex
Before a user can work with a message queue, that user must be authorized to work with that
message queue. The grant object authority command (GRTOBJAUT) is the command that a security
officer or a security administrator would use to grant that authority. This command is discussed in
the security lecture.
Student Notebook
Exercise
IBM i

n
exercises.
ó
Exercise: Messages with 5250 Emulation
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
Inform instructor when you complete
your exercise.
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
Refer to the Student Exercises guide and perform the Messages exercise.
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i
1. True or false: You can allocate an application message queue when

you sign on.
ó n
2. Which of the following delivery value directs the system to take the
default reply to a message?
.N ci
a. Hold
b. Break
.R a
c. Notify
d. Default
C rm 3. When the system creates a workstation device description, which of

the following is automatically created?
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i
4. True or false: You can send a message to any user on the

system.
ó n
5. Which message type interrupts a user who is signed on to a
5250 emulation session?
.N ci
a. Informational
b. Inquiry
.R a
c. Workstation
d. Break
C rm
6. True or false: The default mode for a message queue is
*Notify.
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

n
• Discuss the menus and commands used to work with
ó
messaging
.N ci
• Describe the difference between a message and a break
message
.R a
C rm
• Explain the difference between an informational message and
an inquiry message
• Explain the different ways that messages are displayed on
your screen
to fo
• Explain how to determine who allocated a message queue to
themselves
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
As a system operator, you are expected to be the message expert. Not only do you display, send,
receive, and remove messages, but you are also asked to help others with their questions. You are
pr clu
asked to explain what the messages mean and how to respond to them.
Ex
Student Notebook
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 8. Messaging with IBM Navigator for i

This unit describes how messaging works when using IBM Navigator for i.
n
ó
.N ci
• Explain how to access and use the messaging function with IBM
Navigator for i
.R a
• Explain how to send messages with this interface
• Explain how to send informational versus inquiry messages
C rm
• Explain how to display your messages
• Explain how to customize the messaging function
to fo
Accountability:
ec ivo
• Exercise
oy s
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 8. Messaging with IBM Navigator for i 8-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

• Explain how to access and use the messaging function with
n
IBM Navigator for i
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Basic Operations > Send a Message

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 8-2. Basic Operations > Send a Message AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
From the left pane click Basic operations, then click Send a Message to send a message.
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Inquiry versus informational message

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 8-3. Inquiry versus informational message AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Request a reply specifies to send an inquiry message, which always requires a reply. The inquiry
message is placed on a message queue. The name of the person that the inquiry is sent to is
pr clu
added to the beginning of the message text. The technique allows the receiver of the reply to
determine which user or workstation the reply is from.
If this check box is not selected, the message is an informational message.
If you check the Interrupt user box, the message is an inquiry message.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Request a reply: Send reply to

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 8-4. Request a reply: Send reply to AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Clicking the Request a reply check box let's you specify that the answer goes to a message queue
other than the message queue of the sender.
pr clu
Click Advanced to specify where to send the reply if you are sending an inquiry message.
Send reply to specifies, only if an inquiry message is sent, the name of the message queue that
the reply is sent to. You can choose to have the reply sent to the sender's message queue. Or you
can specify the name of another message queue to receive the reply.
Ex
Coded Character Set ID (CCSID) of message text specifies the CCSID used for the message text
that is supplied on the Send Message dialog. CCSID is a 16-bit number that identifies a specific set
of encoding scheme identifiers, character set identifiers, code page identifiers, and other relevant
information that uniquely identifies the data coded in the graphic representation that is used.
Student Notebook
Send Message: Send to users (1 of 3)

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 8-5. Send Message: Send to users (1 of 3) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Click the Users button to send your message to a specific user.

Click Browse to see this tab, which shows a list of users on your system.
pr clu
One or more user message queues can be selected. Click OK.

Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
You can click the field next to Users and manually type the user to whom the message is sent.
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
For the Send to parameter, click the down arrow to see and choose:
• All users
pr clu
• All signed-on users

• The system operator
• Users to whom messages were previously sent
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Send Message: Send to workstations

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 8-8. Send Message: Send to workstations AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The alternative is to send your message to a workstation.

Click the Workstation button; then click Browse to see this tab.
pr clu
You can click the Select All check box to broadcast a message to all workstation message queues,
or you can select a specific workstation message queue.
Click OK.
Ex
Student Notebook
Send Message: Interrupt user

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 8-9. Send Message: Interrupt user AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Interrupt user specifies to send a break message.

When a break message is sent to a user, the message goes to the workstation message queue that
pr clu
the user is signed on to. If the user is in an emulation session, the message temporarily interrupts
the work that the user is doing.
When a break message is sent to a user who is not signed on, the message goes to the user's
message queue.
Ex
When a break message is sent to one or more workstations, the message goes to the message
queues for the specified workstations.
Note
Break messages do not interrupt IBM Navigator for i users.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Display Messages: Properties

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 8-10. Display Messages: Properties AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Click Messages to see a list of your messages.

You can customize the list to specify which messages you want to include in the list. You can also
pr clu
specify which columns of information you want to display in the list and in what order you want the
columns to be displayed.
From the message list, you can answer a message, send a new message, delete one or more
messages, and display the properties of a message. By default, this function shows the messages
Ex
for the user who signed on to this GUI.

To view the details of a specific message, right-click the message and select Properties.
To delete a specific message, select Delete. The recommendation is to delete messages once they
are read. Clean up the message queue as you go.
Student Notebook
Properties: General and Detail tabs

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 8-11. Properties: General and Detail tabs AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
This tab is displayed when you select Properties. Notice there are two tabs you can click to display
the details for the message.
pr clu
It is recommended that you delete viewed or handled messages. Clean up your message queue as
you go!
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Customize: View
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 8-12. Customize: View AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
You can use the Actions pull down, Include with messages in order to customize your view of the
messages list.
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Customize: Include
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 8-13. Customize: Include AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Include dialog allows for choosing a specific user's messages or a message queue.
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Customize: Columns
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 8-14. Customize: Columns AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
It is possible to customize which columns are displayed when you work with messages. Click
Messages then click the down arrow to access the action columns.
pr clu
Notice that the columns in the right pane display automatically. The columns in the left pane show
more columns of information if chosen when you click this function. You can also move columns up
or down to organize them to your liking.
Ex
Student Notebook
Exercise
IBM i

n
exercises.
ó
Exercise: Messages with IBM Navigator for i
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or false: Any type of message can be sent with IBM

Navigator for i.
ó n
2. When using IBM Navigator for i, you can send a message to
which of the following?
.N ci
a. Users
b. Workstations
.R a
c. System operator
d. All of the above
C rm 3. True or false: A break message interrupts a user who is

signed on using IBM Navigator for i.
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Unit summary
IBM i

• Explain how to access and use the messaging function with
n
IBM Navigator for i
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 9. CL command concepts

This unit briefly explains what a control language (CL) command is and
where commands can be entered. We also discuss assistance provided by
n
IBM i to help you find a command.
ó
.N ci
• Describe how CL commands are entered
.R a
• Describe the types of CL commands available
C rm
• Describe the structure of a CL command
• Explain how command parameters and user values are used to
customize the function performed by a command
to fo
Accountability:
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 9. CL command concepts 9-1

Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
• Explain how command parameters and user values are used
to customize the function performed by a command
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
Commands have a special structure and consist of parameters that give the system specific
instructions on how to execute the requested function.
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Control language
IBM i
• All system functions are controlled by using a single language:

– By the user
n
– In a program
ó
– Interactively or in batch
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 9-2. Control language AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
One way in which you communicate with IBM i is through a special language called control
language (CL). CL consists of commands. Every command instructs the system to perform a
pr clu
specific action.
• A CL command can be run by a user or be included in a program.
• A command can be processed interactively where there is two-way communication between a
user and the system.
Ex
• A program can also be processed in batch mode; after a user submits a command, the system
uses the command with no further information needed from the user.
• All CL commands can be secured; so that only users who are allowed can run a particular CL
command.

Student Notebook
CL commands
IBM i
n
CRTLIB DLTAUTL
CRTMNU DLTDEVD
ó
CRTPF DLTLIB
.N ci
.R a
C rm
WRKMNU HLDWTR
WRKJOBD PWRDWNSYS
WRKMSGQ DSPJOBLOG
to fo
Plus many more
ec ivo
Figure 9-3. CL commands AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
This visual shows just a few of the more commonly used commands. There are many commands
available on the system. Even the most experienced users are seldom familiar with more than a few
pr clu
hundred of these.
Each command name is abbreviated and was standardized so that you can tell what action is being
performed on which object.
Following, in alphabetical order, is a description of the action abbreviations shown on the visual:
Ex
Abbreviation Action performed

CRT... Create
DLT... Delete
DSP... Display
HLD... Hold
PWRDWN... Power down
WRK... Work
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty Following, in alphabetical order, is a description of the object abbreviations shown on the visual:
Abbreviation Item on which action is performed
...AUTL Authorization list
...DEVD Device description
...JOBD Job description
...JOBLOG Job log
...LIB Library
n
...MNU Menu
...MSGQ Message queue
...PF Physical file
ó
...SYS System
...WTR Writer
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex

Student Notebook
CL command structure
IBM i
n
Command name Parameter
ó
.N ci
CRTLIB LIB(PAYLIB)
.R a
C rm
Action Item Keyword Value
abbreviation
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 9-4. CL command structure AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Each command consists of a command name followed by parameters. Some commands use zero
parameters (this command does one thing in one way) while other commands use up to the
pr clu
maximum of 75 parameters.
The format for a command is:
command-name parameter parameter parameter...
A command name consists of two abbreviated parts for easy identification: an action and an object
Ex
on which the action is performed. Even though many commands are available, there is a fairly
limited number of action and object pairs. To execute a command, you need to put the right action
and object pair together.
A parameter also has two parts: a keyword followed, in parentheses, by one or more values. A
parameter is used either to provide information to the command to control what it does.
The CRTLIB LIB(PAYLIB) command shown on the visual instructs the system to create a library
named PAYLIB.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Some other CL command facts

IBM i
• Conditional parameters:
n
– Some additional parameters display based on what is selected
– Some parameters are mutually exclusive
ó
• Each of the supported interfaces provides prompting to assist
.N ci
when entering a command.
• Each of the supported interfaces provides help:
.R a
– To explain what a command is used for
C rm
– To explain the purpose that is served of each parameter
• CL commands are created by an administrator or a
programmer.
to fo
• CL commands can be secured; so you can run only those
commands you are authorized to run.
ec ivo
Figure 9-5. Some other CL command facts AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex

Student Notebook
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or false: A user must memorize the format of a

command since the system does not provide any help.
ó n
2. True or false: CL commands can be specified within a
program.
.N ci
.R a
3. True or false: Parameters are used to customize a CL
command.
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
• Explain how command parameters and user values are used
to customize the function performed by a command
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
Menus and CL commands can take you almost anywhere you want to go. They allow you to do
what you want to do on the system, assuming you have the proper authority.
pr clu
Prompting helps you enter commands by reducing your dependency on memorization and
reference manuals.
When in doubt, use the GO CMDxxx or GO MAJOR commands.
Ex

Student Notebook
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 10. CL commands with 5250 emulation

This unit describes the different menus available to assist users with finding
and using commands. We also discuss the assistance provided by IBM i to
n
help you find a command.
ó
.N ci
• Explain where to enter a CL command
.R a
• Describe what command prompting is and how to use it
C rm
• Explain the use of command parameters and user values
• Explain what conditional parameters are and how these parameters are
used to customize a command
• List the different menus used to find commands
to fo
Accountability:
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 10. CL commands with 5250 emulation 10-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
• Explain what conditional parameters are and how these
parameters are used to customize a command
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Where to enter a command

IBM i
Command line
ó n
.N ci
Command Entry display
.R a
C rm
to fo
- or -
ec ivo
Figure 10-2. Where to enter a command AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
If you have the proper authority, you can enter a command either on a command line or on the
Command Entry screen.
pr clu
• The command line is easy to use and readily accessible.

• The Command Entry screen is specially designed to allow you to efficiently enter commands,
view previously entered commands, duplicate commands for reuse, and receive additional
assistance on error messages.
Ex
From the Operational Assistant menus, pressing the F9 key brings up the command line near the
bottom of the display.
Student Notebook
Command prompting
IBM i
DSPOBJD + F4 or ?DSPOBJD
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 10-3. Command prompting AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
If you need help entering parameters for a command, you can request a display tailored to the
command name. This display shows (or prompts you for) the command parameters. This request is
pr clu
called command prompting.

You can request command prompting in one of the following ways:
• Press F4 after typing the command name on a command line, or after using the F9 key to recall
the last command. In the latter case, command prompting is very useful because it recalls and
Ex
displays the parameters that were previously entered.

• Type a question mark (?) immediately preceding the command name on a command line, and
press the Enter key.
Each command entry display has certain characteristics, which are shown on the visual.
1. The descriptive and abbreviated command name is shown at the top of the display.
2. Choices are shown on the right side of the display. These are some valid values for each
parameter. When an ellipsis (...) follows the last choice entered, it means more choices are
available. They are shown when you position the cursor in the entry field for that parameter, and
press F4 or by entering a question mark (?) and at least one space and pressing Enter.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty 3. + for more values indicates that this is a parameter list (which means that you can enter more
than one value for this parameter). To enter a list, type the first value, type a plus sign (+) on the
next line, and press Enter. A second display is shown, containing multiple value lines. Once you
enter all the values, press Enter again to return to the command entry display.
Once this list is entered, it can be changed.
4. There are some parameters for which you must enter a value. These are called required
n
parameters. You do not have to enter a value for other parameters, called optional parameters;
the system can use a default value instead. In this visual, Object and Object type are required
ó
parameters. The other parameters, Detail, and Output, are optional parameters (the system
uses the default values shown on the visual).
.N ci
5. Function keys
Not all of the available function keys are shown on each command entry display. (In fact, not all
of the function keys shown on the visual are available on the DSPOBJD Command Entry display.)
.R a
You might have to press F24 (Shift + F12) several times to view some of these functions keys.
Even if the keys are not visible, they are active.
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
--
F11: Toggle between keywords or choices

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
F11
ec ivo
Figure 10-4. F11: Toggle between keywords or choices AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
You can display either keywords (shown in the upper left on this visual) or choices (shown in the
lower right) on a command entry display. Your user profile controls the format, either choices or
pr clu
keywords, used when you initially prompt for any command. After you prompted for a command,
F11 serves as a toggle from one format to the other.
In the example on the visual, the choice format was specified in the user profile. When the user
signed on and pressed F11 the first time, the keywords were displayed. When the user pressed F11
again, the choices were displayed.
Ex
The commands used in the student exercises for this course are generally specified in choice
format. If you would like to use the keyword format while performing your exercises, remember to
use F11 after prompting for a command.
You can also use the CHGPRF command to change your user profile's USROPT parameter and
specify *CLKWD in addition to any user options you might already have or now want.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Conditional parameters
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm Enter
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 10-5. Conditional parameters AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Some commands have conditional parameters. These parameters are conditioned by the entry of
certain predefined values for specific standard or additional parameters. The prompts for
pr clu
conditional parameters are displayed automatically but only after you type the conditioning
parameter and press Enter.
In this example, the file to receive output, member to receive output, and replace or add records
parameters are displayed only after the output command is directed to a file when you specify
*OUTFILE for the output parameter.
Ex
Student Notebook
Keyword versus Positional command entry

IBM i
Keyword form
n
Command Entry
Previous commands and messages:
ó
(No previous commands or messages)
.N ci
===> DSPOBJD OBJ(account) objtype(*file) detail(*full) output(*print)
.R a
Positional form
C rm
Command Entry
Previous commands and messages:
(No previous commands or messages)

to fo
===> dspobjd account *file *full *print
ec ivo
Figure 10-6. Keyword versus Positional command entry AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
There is another way to enter commands, it is called the free format method. In this method, the
command and its parameters are entered on a command line as a string of characters. If you use
pr clu
this method, you must be familiar with the commands and its parameters.
There are two ways to use the free format method to enter a command.
• You can enter the command on the command line, which is the first example in this visual.
Or
Ex
• You can call up the Command Entry display (call qcmd), and enter the command using this
interface, which is the second example in this visual.
You can enter the command with its keywords followed by the appropriate values. This is called the
keyword format. If you use the keyword format, you can enter the keywords in any order. If you do
not enter keywords, the parameters must be in the exact order that IBM i expects. This is called
positional form.
Another option available to enter a command is covered on the next page.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Finding a command: Major Command Groups
menu
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 10-7. Finding a command: Major Command Groups menu AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
If you do not know how to spell a command, you can use the Major Command Groups menu to
search for it. To display this menu, do one of the following:
pr clu
• Position the cursor on a blank command line, and press F4.

• Type only a question mark (?) on a command line, and press Enter.
• Enter the command go major.
Ex
Selecting any option on this menu brings up another, more specific menu. Options on the
secondary grouping menus allow you to continually narrow your search until you find the command
you need.
Student Notebook
Finding a command by category

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 10-8. Finding a command by category AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
You can also find a command by either verb or noun category, such as DSP (abbreviation for
display) or LIB (abbreviation for library). Enter the command GO CMDxxx, where xxx is the category
pr clu
of commands you want to be displayed. When the commands in the specified category are
displayed, enter the option for the one you want to run.
In this example, entering GO CMDLIB caused the Library Commands display to be shown. With this
method, you are automatically prompted for the parameters of the command you select.
Ex
Another way to find commands is to enter the command verb followed by an asterisk (*). For
example, entering DSP* displays all commands beginning with DSP, and entering DLT* displays all
commands beginning with DLT.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i
1. True or false: On this system, a user must memorize the

format of a command since the system does not provide any
n
help.
ó
2. Which function key is used to provide prompt assistance with
.N ci
a command?
a. F1
.R a
b. F3
c. F4
C rm
d. F9
3. Which function key is used to retrieve a command?

a. F1
to fo
b. F3
c. F4
d. F9
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i
4. True or false: The F9 and F10 keys show the same additional
parameters.
ó n
5. Which menu provides assistance when looking for a
command?
.N ci
a. Main
b. User
.R a
c. Major
d. Command
C rm
6. True or false: The F11 function key is used to switch between
command keywords or Value choices.
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
• Explain what conditional parameters are and how these
parameters are used to customize a command
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
Menus and CL commands can take you almost anywhere you want to go, and allow you to do what
you want to do on the system, assuming you have the proper authority.
pr clu
Prompting helps you enter commands by reducing your dependency on memorization and
reference manuals.
When in doubt, use the GO CMDxxx or GO MAJOR commands.
Ex
Student Notebook
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 11. Concepts: Object, library, and the IFS

This unit describes the concepts of objects, libraries, library lists, and the
integrated file system (IFS).
ó n
.N ci
• Explain what an object is on the Power Systems with IBM i
.R a
• Explain the difference between an object's simple and fully qualified
name
C rm
• Explain what a library is
• Explain what a library list is and what purpose it serves
• Explain how to display and change your library list
to fo
• Explain what the integrated file system (IFS) is
• List the different types of data supported by the IFS

ec ivo
Accountability:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 11. Concepts: Object, library, and the IFS 11-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

n
• Explain the difference between an object's simple and fully
ó
qualified name
.N ci
.R a
C rm
• List the different types of data supported by the IFS
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
ó n
.N ci
Topic 1: Object concepts
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 11-2. Topic 1: Object concepts AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Object: A definition
IBM i
n
Library
*LIB
ó
File Program
*FILE *PGM
.N ci
User profile Output queue
*USRPRF *OUTQ
.R a
Message queue
C rm
*MSGQ
Command Job queue

*CMD *JOBQ
to fo
Job description Subsystem description
*JOBD *SBSD
ec ivo
Figure 11-3. Object: A definition AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
An object is anything that exists in storage and on which operations can be performed. On the
Power Systems with IBM i, an object is a named storage space, consisting of a set of
pr clu
characteristics that describes itself and in some cases, data. Some examples of objects are listed
on the visual.
Characteristics of an object are that it has a name and occupies space in storage on the system.
Each object type has a corresponding predefined value.
Ex
The values for the object types, including the object types themselves, are shown on the visual; for
example, the object type for file is *FILE, and for program it is *PGM.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Object-based architecture
IBM i
• IBM i defined object types:

– Each object type supports specific methods.
n
– Specific commands are used for each type of object.
ó
• Programs (*PGM) executed
.N ci
• Files (*FILE) processed
Library
.R a
C rm
Program
Job queue
File
to fo
Command
Data area
ec ivo
Figure 11-4. Object-based architecture AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
IBM i supports specifically defined object types:

• There are specific operations that can be performed against each object type:
pr clu
- They are encapsulated with pre-defined interfaces

- Only valid functions are allowed for each object
• Which improves data integrity
Ex
• Specific commands are used to work with specific objects

There are specific actions you can perform on different types of objects. For example:
• Programs are type *PGM; they are executed (run) on the system
• Files are type *FILE:
- Data on the system is stored in a file
- Files are objects that are processed by programs
Student Notebook
IBM: Supplied objects start with Q

IBM i
ó n
QGPL QSYS
.N ci
QBATCH QSYSOPR
.R a
C rm QPRINT QHLPSYS
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 11-5. IBM: Supplied objects start with Q AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Some objects are provided by IBM as part of the operating system known as IBM i at 7.1. In
previous version the OS was known as i5/OS and OS/400.
pr clu
Other objects are provided by IBM as part of the IBM licensed program products (LPPs).
Still, other objects are created by system users.
For easy identification, most of the IBM-supplied objects begin with the letter Q. It is suggested, but
not required, that user-created objects begin with a letter other than Q.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Working with an object

IBM i
n
Simple name: CALL EX1
ó
.N ci
versus
.R a
C rm
Qualified name: CALL AS24xx/EX1
Library Object
to fo
name name
ec ivo
Figure 11-6. Working with an object AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Each object has a name. The name is usually made of up two parts: Library name and object name.
The object type sometimes makes up the third part of the name.
pr clu
When you are working with an object, you can either specify the object name (called a simple
name) or a library name and object name (called a qualified name).
Below is a description of the IBM-supplied objects shown on the visual. Note that the same object
can have multiple identifiers.
Ex
• QGPL (*LIB) General purpose library

• QSYS (*LIB) System library
• QBATCH
- (*CLS) Batch subsystem class
- (*JOBQ) Batch subsystem queue
- (*JOBD) Batch subsystem job description
Student Notebook
• QSYSOPR
- (*USRPRF) System operator user profile
- (*MSGQ) System operator message queue
• QPRINT
- (*OUTQ) Default printer output queue
n
- (*FILE) Default spool output print file for OUTQ (*JOB)
• QHLPSYS (*LIB) System help library
ó
The combination of name, type, and library must be unique.
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
ó n
Topic 2: Library and library list
.N ci
concepts
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 11-7. Topic 2: Library and library list concepts AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
What is a library?
IBM i
MYLIB
n
Obj Type
ó
COURSE *MSGF
.N ci
CUSTMNU *MENU
PRTCHECKS
CUSTPRT *CMD
PROG3 *PGM
.R a
CUSTPRT
PRTCHECKS *FILE
C rm
SETUP *PGM PROG3 SETUP
COURSE
CUSTMNU
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 11-8. What is a library? AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
• A library is a system object that serves as a directory to other objects.

• A library groups related objects and allows the user to find objects by name.
pr clu
• To identify a specific object to the system, a user needs to provide the object name, the object
type, and the name of the library containing the object.
You can create, delete, save, or restore a library.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Purpose of libraries
IBM i
Libraries are used to organize objects.

• For security reasons
n
• For backup reasons APPLICATION
ó
• By application
.N ci
• By owner BACKUP
• By object type: Program versus files
.R a
• By use: Production versus test OWNER
C rm SECURITY
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 11-9. Purpose of libraries AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Libraries are used by IBM i implementers to organize objects. The idea is to group objects for easy
access by who should access them or by the manner in which they are accessed.
pr clu
Libraries can be set up based on:

• Security
You can ensure security by specifying which users have authority to use the library and what
they are allowed to do with it. You can also simplify security by having an automatic
Ex
authorization list and a public authority assignment for newly created objects based on the
CRTAUT parameter value of the library. Auditing attributes for newly created objects can be set
based on the create object audit (CRTOBJAUD) parameter value.
• User
You can group certain objects for individual users. For example, you might group all files used
by a particular user in a particular library. This makes it easy for the users to work with the files.
When they work with the files, they must add only one library to the library list.
Student Notebook
• Application
You can group all objects used for an individual application. For example, you might associate
all your order entry files and programs with an order entry library called OELIB. You must add
only one library to the library list to ensure that all your order entry files and programs are in the
list. This is advantageous if you do not want to specify a library name every time you use an
order entry file or program.
n
• Save/restore
You can simplify save and restore operations by associating objects saved and restored at the
ó
same time with the same library. You can then use the save library (SAVLIB) command instead
of saving objects individually by using the save object (SAVOBJ) command. This saves you a lot
.N ci
of time.
• Object type
.R a
You can group objects by type. For example, you might associate all programs with one library
and all files with another.
C rm
• Use
You can group objects by how they are used. For example, you can associate all objects used
for production with one library and those used for testing with another.
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
IBM: Supplied libraries

IBM i
Library Description
n
QSYS System library
ó
QSYS2 System library for CPIs
.N ci
QUSRSYS System library for users
.R a
QHLPSYS Online documentation for some system functions
C rm
QGPL User's general-purpose library
QTEMP User's temporary library
QSPL Spooling library

to fo
QDOC Documents and folders filed by office users
ec ivo
Figure 11-10. IBM: Supplied libraries AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
There are a number of IBM-supplied libraries that are shipped either with IBM i or the IBM LPPs.
This visual shows just a few of the more commonly used of these libraries. (Notice they all begin
pr clu
with the letter Q.)

You should not delete these libraries or the objects in them.
QSYS is the library file system. This file system supports the library structure of your system.
This file system provides access to database files and all of the other IBM i object types that the
Ex
library support manages in the system and to basic user auxiliary storage pools (ASPs).
QSYS2 library is a supplemental library for objects that do not begin with the letter Q. For
example, objects for call program interfaces (CPIs) are included in QSYS2.
Student Notebook
Native library versus hierarchical structure

IBM i
System
library QSYS
n
File
System
Program
Job objects
ó
Queues
Data command
Areas
.N ci
User
QTEMP
LIBA LIBB LIBC
.R a
libraries QTEMP
QTEMP
C rm
File File File
User Program
Program Program
objects Job
Queues
Job
Queues
Job
Queues
command Data command
Data COMMAND Data
Areas Areas
Areas
to fo
Compare
Hierarchical
structure
ec ivo
Figure 11-11. Native library versus hierarchical structure AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
This visual is used as a graphical representation of the hierarchical differences between IBM i
versus windows.
pr clu
The top half of this visual shows how the operating system, IBM i, or i5/OS or OS/400, is stored in
the library named QSYS. From a windows perspective, this is the root. All user and IBM LPP
(licensed program product) libraries are stored as a first level off of QSYS. In this environment you
do not create a library inside another library.
Ex
The bottom half of this visual shows a graphical representation of a hierarchical structure, a
graphical representation of how directories are stored in windows. In this environment, a user can
create a directory inside of another directory, and so on. In this environment, you can go 256 levels
deep, completely opposite of what is supported by the IBM i operating system.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Library list
IBM i
DSPLIB
QSYS
n
*LIBL
System libraries QSYS2
QHLPSYS
ó
(15 maximum) QUSRSYS
.N ci
Product libraries QRPG
QCBL
.R a
Current library PAYLIB *CURLIB *USRLIBL
C rm User libraries
QGPL
QTEMP
PAYTSTLIB
to fo
(250 maximum)
One associated with every job

ec ivo
Figure 11-12. Library list AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
A library list is a list that indicates which libraries are searched for an object and the order in which
they are searched. Sometimes a library list is referred to as a library search list.
pr clu
Every job on the system has its own library list. While the library lists for multiple jobs can be
identical, each is used only by the job to which it belongs. Library lists are not objects and cannot be
created or deleted. A library list for a job is automatically set up when the job begins and is deleted
when the job ends.
Ex
There are a number of ways to reference an object in a library list. You can use the simple name of
the object, in which case the system searches each library named in the library list for a job until it
finds the object. You can instruct the system to look only in a specific library, or you can use all or
just a portion of the library list for the job to search for the object.
The first part of a library list is the system part. This part can contain the names of up to 15 libraries.
When the system is shipped, the system value QSYSLIBL contains the names of the libraries to
become the system part of the library list. The libraries named in this part of the library list for each
job are normally specified by the programmer, and are used by all jobs on the system. Thus, while
each job has its own separate library list, this part of each library list is usually identical for almost all
jobs on a system.
Student Notebook
The second part of each library list, called product libraries, contains the names of up to two
libraries associated with the use of particular program products. These library names are
automatically added to and removed from a job's library list as the products are used within a job. A
product library can be a duplicate of the current library or of a library in the user part of the library
list.
The next part of a library list is the current library of the job. This library should be the one
containing the objects most frequently used by the job. This library name usually comes either from
n
the user profile associated with the job or from a command that is run within the job.
ó
The last part of the library list for a job is called the user portion of the list. Up to 250 library names
(which is the default from V5R2 on) can be contained in this part of the library list. The library names
found in this part of a library list can come from:
.N ci
• The system value (QUSRLIBL)
• The job description associated with the job, which will be discussed later in this class
.R a
• Commands executed (run) from a command line
C rm
• Commands run in a user's initial program
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Finding an object
IBM i
Simple name: CALL PAY02

Qualified name: CALL PAYTSTLIB/PAY02
ó n
QSYS INQLIB Job's library list
.N ci
QSYS
QCWW QCXXX PAY77 AP60 QSYS2
QHLPSYS System libraries
.R a
QCZZZ QCYYY PAY1010 AP55 QUSRSYS
C rm
QRPG
QCBL Product libraries
PAYTSTLIB PAYLIB
PAYLIB Current library
AP55 PAY02 PAY01 PAY04
to fo
QGPL
PAY01 AP05 PAY02 PAY05 QTEMP User libraries
PAYTSTLIB
INQLIB
ec ivo
Figure 11-13. Finding an object AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
If you include a library name when referencing an object, only that one library is searched for the
object. The library named in the qualified reference to the object does not have to be in the library
pr clu
list for the job. However, if you do not specify a library name when searching for an object, the
library list is used to search for the object.
Look at the library list on the visual. Note which objects are associated with each library. Now
answer the following questions about this library list.
Ex
• Which libraries are searched to find the program PAY02?

First QSYS and then QSYS2, QHLPSYS, QUSRSYS, QRPG, and QCBL. Finally, the program is found in
PAYLIB.
• If you use the simple name PAY02, will the object named PAY02 in the PAYTSTLIB be found?
No.
There are a number of CL commands you can use to work with library lists. These commands do
not affect libraries or the objects to which they point. They affect only the library list for the job.
Student Notebook
The following commands can be used from within a job to modify the library list for that job:
• CHGLIBL LIBL (name of the lib list) CURLIB (name of the lib) completely
replaces the library names currently specified in the user part of the library list for the job with
the library names specified in the command. This command can also be used to change the
current library of the job to one specified in the command.
• EDTLIBL displays the user part of the current library list for the job and allows one or more
n
library names to be added to or removed from the list. It also allows the sequence of library
names to be changed.
ó
• ADDLIBLE LIB(name)POSITION(*FIRST/*LAST) adds the specified library name to the
beginning or the end of the user part of the library list for the job.
.N ci
• ADDLIBLE LIB(name) POSITION(*AFTER/*BEFORE name) adds the specified library name
immediately after or before a library name already on the user part of the library list for the job.
.R a
• ADDLIBLE LIB(name)POSITION(*REPLACE name) places the specified library name on the
user part of the library list for the job in place of a library name already on the list. The replaced
C rm
library name is removed from the list.
• RMVLIBLE LIB(name) removes the specified library name from the user part of the library list
for the job.
• CHGCURLIB CURLIB(name) changes the current library of the job to the one specified in the
to fo
command.
• DSPLIBL displays the names of all libraries in all parts of the library list for the job and identifies
which part of the library list each library is in.
ec ivo
Note
The above commands allow the user to see and change a library list for a job. They have no effect
on the libraries themselves.
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Quiz
IBM i
Which library does each of the following commands use?
ó n
DSPOBJD PAYTSTLIB/PAY02 TYPE(*PGM)
.N ci
DSPOBJD PAY02 TYPE(*PGM)
.R a
DSPOBJD *USRLIBL/PAY02 TYPE(*PGM)
C rm
DSPOBJD *CURLIB/PAY02 TYPE (*PGM)
DSPOBJD *ALLUSR/PAY02 TYPE(*PGM)

to fo
DSPOBJD *ALL/PAY02 TYPE(*PGM)
ec ivo
Figure 11-14. Quiz AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Answer these questions.

pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Answers
IBM i
PAYTSTLIB
DSPOBJD PAYTSTLIB/PAY02 TYPE(*PGM)
Qualified name
n
DSPOBJD PAY02 TYPE(*PGM) PAYLIB
ó
Library list for a job
.N ci
DSPOBJD *USRLIBL/PAY02 TYPE(*PGM) PAYLIB
User portion of library list,
.R a
including current library
C rm
PAYLIB
DSPOBJD *CURLIB/PAY02 TYPE (*PGM)
Current library
DSPOBJD *ALLUSR/PAY02 TYPE(*PGM) PAYLIB
to fo
Searches all non-system
libraries
DSPOBJD *ALL/PAY02 TYPE(*PGM) PAYLIB
Search all libraries
ec ivo
Figure 11-15. Answers AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
When you specify an object name, and *ALL or *ALLUSR for the library name, the system searches
for the object in multiple libraries. And the search returns objects with the specified name and type,
pr clu
to which you have authorized access.

Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
ó n
.N ci
Topic 3: Integrated file system concepts
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 11-16. Topic 3: Integrated file system concepts AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
What is the integrated file system?

IBM i
n
Integrated file system
ó
.N ci
Directories
Libraries Folders
.R a
Stream
Database files
C rm
Documents
files
Objects
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 11-17. What is the integrated file system? AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The key features of the integrated file system (IFS) are as follows:
• Support for storing information in stream files that can contain long, continuous strings of data,
pr clu
for example, the text of a document or the pixels in a picture. The stream file support is
designed for efficient use in client/server applications.
• A hierarchical directory structure that allows objects to be organized in a branch-like structure.
Specifying the path through the directories to an object accesses the object.
Ex
• A common interface that allows users and applications to access not only the stream files but
also database files, documents, and other objects stored in your system.
• A common view of stream files stored locally on your system, an Integrated xSeries Server for
Power Systems with IBM i, or a remote Windows server. Stream files can also be stored
remotely on a local area network (LAN) server, another remote Power Systems with IBM i, or a
network file system server.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Overview of the IFS

IBM i
• Support for storing unstructured data (stream files):

– Files that contain long, continuous strings of data
n
– Designed for efficient use in client/server applications
ó
.N ci
• Hierarchical directory structure:
– Allows tree-like organization of objects
.R a
– Allows access of objects through directory path
C rm
• Common Access Interface for all objects stored on Power i:
– Stream files
– Library objects
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 11-18. Overview of the IFS AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Support for storing unstructured data (stream files).

• Files that contain long, continuous strings of data:
pr clu
- Text documents
- Picture elements
- PC file systems
Ex
- Other platform file systems:

• Linux
• AIX
• Windows
• Designed for efficient use in client/server applications
Student Notebook
Hierarchical directory structure.

• Allows tree-like organization of objects
• Allows access of objects through directory path
Common Access Interface.
• All objects stored on Power Systems with IBM i
n
- Stream files
• Unstructured data
ó
- Library objects:
.N ci
• Programs
• Database table
.R a
• Data areas
• Message queues
C rm
• And so forth
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
File system concept

IBM i
UNIX, IBM i,
IBM i Linux PC clients
Linux, PC clients
ó n
Power i Users
.N ci
Applications IFS
APIs menus/commands
.R a
Integrated Integrated
NFS AIX IBM i IBM i
LINUX Windows
server Server Netserver File Server
Server Server
C rm
IFS interface
IASP
Root QOpenSys QSYS.LIB QSYS.LIB QDLS
file file file file file
system system system system system
to fo
QOPT QFileSvr.400 UDFS NFS QDLS
file file file file file
system system system system system
ec ivo
Figure 11-19. File system concept AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
A file system provides you with the support to access specific segments of storage organized as
logical units. These logical units on your system are files, directories, libraries, and objects.
pr clu
Each file system has a set of logical structures and rules for interacting with information in storage.
These structures and rules can be different from one file system to another. In fact, from the
perspective of structures and rules, the IBM i support for accessing database files and various other
object types through libraries can be thought of as a file system. Similarly, the IBM i support for
accessing documents (which are really stream files) through the folders structure might be thought
Ex
of as a separate file system.

The integrated file system treats the library support and folders support as separate file systems.
Other types of file management support that have differing capabilities are also treated as separate
file systems.
You can interact with any of the file systems through a common interface. This interface is
optimized for the input and output of stream data, in contrast to the record input and output provided
through the data management interfaces. The provided commands, menus and displays, and
application programming interfaces (APIs) allow interaction with the file systems through this
common interface.
Student Notebook
File systems supported by the IFS

IBM i
• Root (/)
• QOpenSys
n
• UDFS
ó
• QSYS.LIB
.N ci
• Independent ASP QSYS.LIB
• QDLS
.R a
• QOPT
C rm
• QNTC
• QFileSvr.400
• NFS
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 11-20. File systems supported by the IFS AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
“root” (/) file system

The “root” (/) file system takes full advantage of the stream file support and hierarchical
pr clu
directory structure of the integrated file system. It also has some characteristics of the DOS file
system.
Open systems file system (QOpenSys)
The QOpenSys file system is compatible with open system standards based on UNIX, such as
Ex
POSIX and X/Open Portability Guide (XPG). Like the “root” (/) file system, this file system takes
advantage of the stream file and directory support provided by the integrated file system.
User-defined file systems (UDFSs)
The user-defined file systems (UDFSs) reside on the auxiliary storage pool (ASP) or
independent auxiliary storage pool (ASP) of your choice. You can create and manage these file
systems.
Library file system (QSYS.LIB)
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty The QSYS.LIB file system supports the IBM i library structure.
Independent ASP QSYS.LIB
The independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system supports the IBM i library structure in independent
auxiliary storage pools (ASPs) you create and define. This file system provides access to
database files and all of the other IBM i object types that the library support manages in the
independent ASPs.
n
Document library services file system (QDLS)
The QDLS file system supports the folders structure. It provides access to documents and
ó
folders.
.N ci
Optical file system (QOPT)
The QOPT file system provides access to stream data stored on optical media.
.R a
IBM i NetClient file system (QNTC)
The QNTC file system provides access to data and objects stored on an Integrated xSeries
C rm
Server (IXS) running Windows NT 4.0 or later, or Linux operating system. The QNTC file system
also provides access to data and objects stored on remote servers running Windows NT 4.0 or
later, Linux Samba 3.0 or later, or supported versions of IBM i NetServer.
IBM i file server file system (QFileSvr.400)
to fo
The QFileSvr.400 file system provides transparent access to other file systems that reside on
remote IBM i platforms. It is accessed through a hierarchical directory structure.
Network File System (NFS)
ec ivo
The Network File System (NFS) provides the user with access to data and objects stored on a
remote NFS server.
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
IFS accessed with Windows browser

IBM i
• Tree-like
• Hierarchical organization
n
User view from PC desktop
Single drive
ó
represents
entire Power i
.N ci
PC style directories
.R a
C rm
Folders and documents
POSIX-compliant name space

to fo
Native i objects
ec ivo
Figure 11-21. IFS accessed with Windows browser AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Stream files versus database files

IBM i
Database files
n
field-a field-b field-c field-d record 1
ó
field-a field-b field-c field-d record 2
.N ci
.R a
field-a field-b field-c field-d record n
C rm Stream files
.........................................................................
to fo
.........................................................................
.........................................................................
ec ivo
Figure 11-22. Stream files versus database files AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Database files are those traditionally created on the Power Systems with IBM i. They have
predefined subdivisions that consist of records and fields. They have a specific layout that consists
pr clu
of records and within a record, a fixed number of fields.

The IFS provides support for storing and operating on information in the form of stream files. A
stream file is a file that contains a continuous stream of data.
Documents stored in Power Systems with IBM i folders are stream files. Other examples of stream
Ex
files are PC files and the files in UNIX systems. An IFS stream file is a system object that has an
object type of *STMF.
Student Notebook
Locating objects in the IFS

IBM i
n
/ Root
ó
Absolute path name
Dir 1
.N ci
/Dir1/Dir2/File
.R a
Dir 2 Relative path name
C rm
Dir2/File
to fo
File
ec ivo
Figure 11-23. Locating objects in the IFS AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
A path name (also called a pathname on some systems) tells the system how to locate an object.
The path name is expressed as a sequence of directory names followed by the name of the object.
pr clu
Individual directories and the object name are separated by a forward slash (/), for example:
directory1/directory2/file
For the convenience of PC users, the backslash (\) can be used instead of the forward slash in IFS
commands.
Ex
There are two ways of indicating a path name.

• An absolute path name begins at the highest level, or root directory, which is identified by the
forward slash (/).
/Dept2/Photo/Smith
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty • If the path name does not begin with the forward slash (/), the system assumes that the path
begins at the user's current directory. This type of path name is called a relative path name. For
example, if a user's current directory is Dept2 and it has a subdirectory named Photo
containing the file Smith, the relative path name is:
Photo/Smith
Notice that the path name does not include the name of the current directory. The first item in
n
the name is the directory or object at the next level below the current directory.
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i
1. True or false: An object is anything that exists in storage and

on which operations can be performed.
ó n
2. A (blank) is a special object that has a named set of objects
associated with it and is used to group objects. (Select all
.N ci
that apply.)
a. Directory
b. Link
.R a
c. Library
d. File system
C rm
3. A PC object is stored in which of the following file systems in
the IFS?
to fo
a. Root
b. QDLS
c. QSYS.LIB
d. QOPT
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i
4. True or false: A library list is used by the system when you

use simple naming to work with an object.
ó n
5. The IBM i operating system is stored in the (blank) system
library.
.N ci
a. QUSRSYS
b. QGPL
.R a
c. QSPL
d. QSYS
C rm 6. True or false: All libraries on the system are in the system

library QGPL.
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Unit summary
IBM i

n
• Explain the difference between an object's simple and fully
ó
qualified name
.N ci
.R a
C rm
• List the different types of data that is supported by the IFS
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 12. Object management with 5250 emulation

This unit describes how to work with objects, libraries, the library list, and the
IFS when using a 5250 emulation session. Commands and menus relating to
n
these are also discussed.
ó
.N ci
• Use the correct commands to work with objects
.R a
• Display the attributes of an object
C rm
• Use the correct commands to create a duplicate object
• Use the correct command to copy a file
• Use the correct command to create a library
to fo
• Use the correct command to display the contents of a library
• Use the commands to add or remove a library to or from the library list
• Use the correct command to display the IFS
ec ivo

Accountability:
oy s
• Exercise
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 12. Object management with 5250 emulation 12-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
• Use the commands to add or remove a library to or from the
library list
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
ó n
.N ci
Topic 1: Working with objects
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 12-2. Topic 1: Working with objects AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
The DATA and FILE menus

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 12-3. The DATA and FILE menus AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
You can use the DATA menu to work with the different types of objects on the system. You can also
navigate to this menu with the GO DATA command or from the main Help menu, select option 4.
pr clu
Use the FILE menu to work with files on the system. You can navigate to this menu by selecting
option 1 from the DATA menu or use the GO FILE command.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Work with Objects command

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 12-4. Work with Objects command AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Work with Objects (WRKOBJ) command shows a list of objects from one or more libraries. To
locate an object on the system, you must specify the following:
pr clu
• Name of the object

• Library where this object is stored
• Type of object that you are searching for
Ex
Place your cursor on the Object type parameter and press F4 to see a full list of all the different
types of objects that can exist on your system.
Student Notebook
Work with Objects display

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 12-5. Work with Objects display AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
This is the display shown when you specify the command on the previous page and specify *ALL
for both the name and type parameter. In this case, you specified the AS2401 library.
pr clu
This display shows all of the objects located in a specific library. Notice the columns and the
different types of information it shows you on this first display. You can also use the function keys to
see additional information.
Also, notice the actions (by using the option column) that you can perform for these objects,
Ex
assuming you have the correct authority to perform these actions.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Display Object Description command

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 12-6. Display Object Description command AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Display Object Description (DSPOBJD) command shows the names and attributes of specified
objects in the specified library or libraries.
pr clu
• Place your cursor on the Library parameter and use the F4 prompt key to see a list of the values
you can specify for this parameter.
• Use the Detail parameter to specify what level of detailed information you want to display for
your object. Use the Help key on this parameter, and play with it to see exactly what the system
Ex
shows you depending on which value you specify.

You can display object description information for any object on which you have authority other than
*EXCLUDE authority. Libraries for which you do not have execute (*EXECUTE) authority cannot be
shown, even if they are specified in the command.
If only one object will be shown, you can specify it by entering the object name, object type, the
name of the library where it is located, and the ASP device where the library is located.
Student Notebook
Display Object Description details (1 of 2)

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 12-7. Display Object Description details (1 of 2) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Display Object Description - Full display presents the names and attributes of selected objects
in a requested library or libraries.
pr clu
Pressing Enter returns you to the previous display or, when more than one library is displayed, take
you forward through the libraries, for example, library one of four.
If you see More... on the lower right side of your display, there is more information to view. Press
Page Down (or Roll Up) to move toward the end of the information. Press Page Up (or Roll Down)
Ex
to move toward the beginning of the information.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Display Object Description details (2 of 2)

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 12-8. Display Object Description details (2 of 2) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
If you see Bottom instead of More..., you are at the end of the list.
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Create Duplicate Object command

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 12-9. Create Duplicate Object command AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Create Duplicate Object (CRTDUPOBJ) command copies a single object or a group of objects:
• The new object must be renamed if it is created in the library that contains the original object.
pr clu
• The newly created object can retain the name of the original object if it is created in a library
different than the one that contains the original object.
• You can copy a group of related objects by specifying a generic object name or by specifying
*ALL or more than one object type. When copying a group of related objects, you must specify a
Ex
different library in which the new objects are created.

• The Duplicate data (DATA) parameter specifies whether the data records in database physical
file or save files are copied to the new object. Members of database physical files are copied
whether or not the data contained in them is copied.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Copy File command

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 12-10. Copy File command AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Copy File (CPYF) command copies all or part of a file from the database or from an external
device to the database or to an external device.
pr clu
Note sometimes when source and target file have a different structure you should consider using
additional parameters. Like Record format field mapping FMTOPT and use some useful option like
*MAP *DROP and others.
Ex
Student Notebook
ó n
Topic 2: Working with libraries and
.N ci
library lists
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 12-11. Topic 2: Working with libraries and library lists AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Library and Library Commands menu

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 12-12. Library and Library Commands menu AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Use the Go Library command to see the menu displayed in the upper left on the visual on this
page. This menu displays the actions you can perform for a library.
pr clu
The screen on the lower right side of this visual is the Library Commands menu. To display the
Library Commands menu you can either:
• Use the GO CMDLIB command.
• Select option 70 - Related commands from the Libraries menu.
Ex
Student Notebook
Work with Libraries command

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 12-13. Work with Libraries command AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Work with Libraries (WRKLIB) display shows a list of libraries that you have authority to use. You
can use this list to do some common tasks related to libraries.
pr clu
The list of libraries presented is based on the value you enter for the Library (LIB) parameter. For
example, if you type AS24*, a list of all the libraries starting with AS24 is displayed.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Create Library command

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 12-14. Create Library command AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Create Library (CRTLIB) command adds a new library to the system. Before any objects are
placed into a library, the library must be created.
pr clu
When the library is created, it appears as though it exists in the QSYS (system) library within the
IFS.
Ex
Student Notebook
Display Library List command

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 12-15. Display Library List command AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Display Library List (DSPLIBL) command displays the library list for the current thread, including
the system portion, and, if they exist, the product libraries, the current library entry, and the user
pr clu
portion.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Library List: Add and Remove

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 12-16. Library List: Add and Remove AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Add Library List Entry (ADDLIBLE) command adds a library name to the user portion of the
library list for the current thread. The user portion is the last portion of the library list. It follows the
pr clu
system portion and, if they exist, any product libraries and the current library entry. You can specify
where the library should be placed in the user portion of the library list.
The Remove Library List Entry (RMVLIBLE) command removes a library from the user portion of the
library list for the current thread. The user portion is the last portion of the library list. It follows the
system portion and, if they exist, any product libraries and the current library entry.
Ex
Student Notebook
ó n
.N ci
Topic 3: Working with the IFS
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 12-17. Topic 3: Working with the IFS AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
IFS access using 5250 emulation

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 12-18. IFS access using 5250 emulation AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
From the Main menu, select option 4 to see the Data menu in the upper left. Select option 5 to see
the Integrated File System menu, which is displayed in the middle screen capture. Select option 2
pr clu
Object commands to see the Object commands menu in the lower right.
Select option 1 - Work with object links to see the screen on the next page.
• Specify this option to display a list of objects in directories and options to work with them.
• To perform operations on the objects, you must have *USE authority to the command used by
Ex
the operation and appropriate authority to the objects on which the command is being
performed.
These same actions can be reached by using the WRKLNK command. In both methods, you see
your current IFS catalog.
Student Notebook
Work with Object Links display

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 12-19. Work with Object Links display AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
This display shows a list of names of objects in a directory and provides options for performing
operations on those objects.
pr clu
You can type an option number next to one or more object links. When you press Enter, the function
associated with the selected number is performed for that link. For most options, you can get
assistance in using the option by typing the option number and pressing F4 (Prompt) instead of
Enter.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Exercise
IBM i

n
exercises.
ó
.N ci
Exercise: Object management with 5250 emulation
.R a
C rm
to fo
Inform instructor when you complete your
exercise.
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i
1. True or false: The Create Duplicate Object command can

copy a file.
ó n
2. Which command is used to show a list of objects based on
your search criteria?
.N ci
a. DSPOBJ
b. LSTOBJ
.R a
c. SHWOBJ
d. WRKOBJ
C rm
3. The command that is used to display an object’s description
is?
a. DSPOBJD
to fo
b. LSTOBJD
c. SHWOBJD
d. WRKOBJD
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i
4. True or false: You cannot see a list of the directories on your

system when using a 5250 emulation session.
ó n
5. The (blank) command is used to copy a single object or a
group of objects.
.N ci
a. DSPOBJD
b. RSTOBJ
.R a
c. CRTDUPOBJ
d. WRKOBJ
C rm 6. True or false: The WRKLIB command shows you a list of all

the libraries that you have authority to use.
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Unit summary
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
• Use the commands to add or remove a library to or from the
library list
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 13. Object management with IBM Navigator
for i
n
This unit describes how to work with and administer objects, libraries, and
user profiles, run commands, and duplicate objects when working with IBM
ó
Navigator for i.
.N ci
.R a
• Use IBM Navigator for i to work with objects
C rm
• Use IBM Navigator for i to create a duplicate object
• Use IBM Navigator for i to copy a file
to fo
• Use IBM Navigator for i to create a library
• Use IBM Navigator for i to display the contents of a library

ec ivo
Accountability:
• Exercise
oy s
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 13. Object management with IBM Navigator for i 13-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
ó n
.N ci
Topic 1: Running commands
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 13-2. Topic 1: Running commands AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
System: Run a command

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 13-3. System: Run a command AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
There are some functions that do not have a graphical equivalent, thus they cannot be done from
IBM Navigator for i. For those functions not supported, it is possible to run a command from IBM
pr clu
Navigator for i. This is equivalent to submitting a command to run in batch mode.

Even for those functions supported by a GUI equivalent, like changing a user profile, you can
submit a command or perform the function.
Click the System task, and then select the Run a Command link to see the window on the next
Ex
page.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Run a command
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 13-4. Run a command AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The usage buttons on this web page are:

• IBM i Option: Allows you to set some job log parameters or inquiry messages
pr clu
• Prompt: Provides the same functions as the F4 function key in a 5250 screen
• Previous Command: Provides the same functions as the F9 function key in 5250 screen
• Run Command: Equal to the Enter key
Ex
Student Notebook
Run a command with prompting

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 13-5. Run a command with prompting AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
If you know the format for the command, you can enter the command in the window presented in
this visual. If you are not sure of the format, or if you require assistance, you can use the Prompt
pr clu
button to see the command with parameters.

Once on the prompt window, you can press Help for more assistance for any of the parameters.
Click OK to submit the command.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
ó n
.N ci
Topic 2: Creating a library
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 13-6. Topic 2: Creating a library AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Databases: Create Library

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 13-7. Databases: Create Library AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
One way to create a library is by using the Databases task.

• Click System then Database task, and then click Databases link.
pr clu
• This shows you the pane on the right. Right-click (select and open) your database. The next
steps are covered on the next page.
Often the name of the database is equal to the system name (or system serial number). The name
can be changed but it is always the LOCAL database type.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Schemas: New Schema

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 13-8. Schemas: New Schema AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Right-click Schemas, and then click New > Schema to see the tab on the right.
Complete the parameters as follows:
pr clu
• Name: Specify unique name for the new schema (library).

• Add to displayed list of schemas: Click this option to add the schema to your list of displayed
schemas. The default is to display the new schema in your list of schemas.
Ex
• Create as a standard library: Check this option if you want to create a standard library versus
a schema.
• Create in: Specifies where the schema (or library) is created. It can be created in the system
disk pool, in disk pools (2-32), or in an independent disk pool group. Click the down arrow to
make your selection.
• Text: Specify a description for the schema.
Click OK to create your new schema (library).
This same can be reached by selecting (click box next to) Schemas and click Actions menu and
New > Schema.
Student Notebook
File systems: New Folder (library)

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 13-9. File systems: New Folder (library) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
A second way to create a library is by way of the File Systems task. To see the windows in the
visual:
pr clu
• On the left pane, click the File Systems task; then click IFS (Integrated File System). Right-click
the QSYS.LIB > New folder.
The library name must be a unique name, and if you create a library then after the name you must
add.LIB in the field name, for example AS2401.LIB.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
IFS: Display list of libraries (1 of 2)

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 13-10. IFS: Display list of libraries (1 of 2) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
To display a list of the libraries on the system:

• Click the left pane File systems task, and then click Integrated File System link. Right-click
pr clu
QSYS.LIB and Open.

By default, IBM Navigator for i displays a list of all of the libraries on the system.
Ex
Student Notebook
IFS: Display list of libraries (2 of 2)

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 13-11. IFS: Display list of libraries (2 of 2) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Performing the actions on the previous page displays a list of libraries in the QSYS.LIB file system.
To narrow down this list, you can click the Actions down arrow and select Include from the
pr clu
drop-down menu. You can then specify the list of libraries to be shown.
For example, to see your libraries, you might request all of the libraries named AS24xx* be
displayed.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Databases: Display list of schemas (1 of 2)

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 13-12. Databases: Display list of schemas (1 of 2) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Another way to display list of libraries (schemas) is click Database task then click Databases link.
When the list of databases is displayed, right-click and Open your database. Right-click Schemas
pr clu
and click Select Schemas to Display.

Ex
Student Notebook
Databases: Display list of schemas (2 of 2)

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 13-13. Databases: Display list of schemas (2 of 2) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
This page allows you to specify and add a library, which are displayed in the list of libraries. You can
also search for libraries from a list of all libraries. Or you can specify a name or part of a name with
pr clu
the wildcard characters, *, or %.

Note that an asterisk * in the library name is allowed both in IBM Navigator for i and 5250 emulator
sessions. The % is not allowed in 5250 emulator sessions.
On the upper right corner is a Remove button that allows remove library name from the list. This
Ex
function not deleting the library.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Display contents of schema

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 13-14. Display contents of schema AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
To display the contents of schema:

• On the left pane click Database then on the main pane Database link. Choose your local
pr clu
database and right-click and choose Open. On the list on the right, click Schemas and then
Open. From the schemas list, choose Schema and click Open. On the displayed window, you
can choose particular type of objects or you can choose All Objects. Right-click All objects
and click Open.
Ex
Now you see all the objects in the schema. Note that this method do not show contents of the
library, except those objects created by SQL.
Student Notebook
Display contents of your team library

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 13-15. Display contents of your team library AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
To display the contents of your library:

• On the left pane, click File Systems > Integrated File Systems. Right-click your library from
pr clu
those listed, and click Open.

• Now you see your library contents.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
ó n
.N ci
Topic 3: Object properties
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 13-16. Topic 3: Object properties AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Supported actions by object type

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 13-17. Supported actions by object type AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The actions you can perform on an object (see how the objects looks in the visual) are determined
by what type of object it is.
pr clu
• On the left side of the visual, you see the actions supported when you right-click a program type
object.
• On the right side of the visual, you see the actions supported when you right-click a file type
object.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Object properties
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 13-18. Object properties AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
When you click the Properties of the object you can see the information displayed on the different
tabs.
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
File systems: Copy

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 13-19. File systems: Copy AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
IBM Navigator for i supports the copy function for the File Systems task. In the example in the
visuals:
pr clu
• Click the File Systems task, then click the Integrated File System link, next right-click the
QSYS.LIB; then click Open.
• Right-click the AS2401 library, and then click Open (to see a list of objects in this library).
• Locate and right-click the file that you want to copy, and then click Copy.
Ex
• In the window that is presented, specify the target library, or use Browse button to find library. If
you specify the name, then you must specify a fully qualified path. In the example this is:
/QSYS.LIB/AS2401.LIB. Click Copy.
The system recognizes the type of object that is being copied, in this case it processes the copy file
command on the system to copy the file from one library to the other.
You can also locate other types of objects, for example, a program, and do a copy and paste. In this
example, the system processes the Create Duplicate Object command.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Database: Copy File

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 13-20. Database: Copy File AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
IBM Navigator for i also supports the copy function for the Database task; however, you can copy
and paste only database objects, such as a file.
pr clu
Stepping through the graphical interface presents the graphical view of the copy file (CPYF)
command. To get to the panel in this visual, perform the following:
• Click the Databases task, and then click Databases link and right-click the arrow your
database, and then click Open.
Ex
• Right-click Schemas, and then click Open. Right-click your schema (library of choice), and then
click Open.
• Right-click Tables, and then click Open. Right-click your file, and then click Data > Copy.
These steps present the copy file (CPYF) command screen. Fill in your parameters, and then click
OK to process your command.
Student Notebook
Exercise
IBM i

n
exercises.
ó
Exercise: Object management with IBM Navigator for i
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i
1. True or false: IBM Navigator for i does not provide an option

to manage users.
ó n
2. Which task in IBM Navigator for i provides the link to run a
command?
.N ci
a. System
b. Work management
.R a
c. Configuration and service
d. Security
C rm 3. True or false: Prompting a command is not available with

IBM Navigator for i.
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i
4. Which of the following does not provide an option to create a

library?
n
a. System
ó
b. Database
c. File system
.N ci
d. Network
.R a
5. True or false: IBM Navigator for i provides a graphical
C rm
version of the copy file command.
6. True or false: IBM Navigator for i does not display a list of

to fo
libraries.
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 14. Introduction to work management

This unit provides a brief introduction to work management. The work
management terminology and concepts addressed in this unit includes:
n
Power Systems with IBM i job processing (interactive and batch), job, types
of jobs (including interactive, batch, and spooling jobs) and subsystems.
ó
.N ci
.R a
• Explain the difference between interactive and batch processing
• State the definition of a job
C rm
• List the different types of jobs that can be run on the system
• Explain what a job queue is and how it is used
• Describe what a job description does and how it controls work on the
to fo
system
• Explain what a subsystem is and how it is used on the system
• Explain what a memory pool is
ec ivo

Accountability:
oy s
• Exercise
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 14. Introduction to work management 14-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

• Explain the difference between interactive and batch
n
processing
ó
.N ci
.R a
• Describe what a job description does and how it controls work
C rm
on the system
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
In this unit, you become familiar with work management concepts and terminology. We discuss the
types of work (or processing) the Power Systems with IBM i does (mainly interactive and batch).
pr clu
What a job is and some of its characteristics, the types of jobs that can run on the Power Systems
with IBM i and their characteristics. And, what a subsystem is and the relationship between a job
and subsystem.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Methods of processing
IBM i
Interactive processing
n
Sign on
1
Menu displayed
ó
2
Enter menu option
3
.N ci
Menu displayed
4
.R a
Batch processing
C rm
Submit job
1
2 System
runs
program
to fo
User free to do
other work on system
ec ivo
Figure 14-2. Methods of processing AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The system performs two types of processing: Interactive and batch.

Interactive processing requires continual two-way communication between a display station user
pr clu
and the system. It is similar to a conversation. First, the user says (types) something to the system,
and then the system replies.
Batch processing requires only that the user send information to the system for processing. After
that, the system can usually complete the processing on its own. This leaves both the user and the
Ex
display station free to do other work.

The Power Systems with IBM i is designed to handle both interactive and batch processing
simultaneously.
Student Notebook
What is a job?
IBM i
A job is an environment that enables work to be performed on the system.

COMMAND
n
Display Library List
Process
ó
Opt Library Type Text
===> DSPLIBL request __ QSYS SYS System library
__ QSYS2 SYS System library for CPIs
.N ci
__ QHLPSYS SYS
Menu option User Tasks
.R a
Process
request 1. Display or change your job
C rm
===> 1 2. Display messages
3. Send a message
4. Submit a job
RUN PROGRAM
Customer Inquiry
to fo
Process Enter customer no. _______
===> CALL PROG1 request
ec ivo
Figure 14-3. What is a job? AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
All work done on a Power Systems with IBM i is performed through a job. Each active job contains
at least one thread (the initial thread) and can contain additional secondary threads. Threads are
pr clu
independent units of work. Job properties are shared among threads of the job, but threads also
have some of their own properties, such as a call stack.
The job serves as the owner for properties shared among threads within the same job. Work
management provides a way for you to control the work done on your system through the
properties of a job.
Ex
The general properties of a job determine how the system runs each job. Some of the properties
are grouped in the job description for easier multiple job management. Based on how the job
properties are specified, the system knows what properties to get and when. The system runs
different types of jobs to serve various needs.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Types of jobs
IBM i
System jobs
ó n
Q...
.N ci
User jobs
Spooling
.R a
Interactive
C rm Autostart
Batch
to fo
Communication
ec ivo
Figure 14-4. Types of jobs AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
All jobs on the system fall into one of two very broad categories: system jobs and user jobs. System
jobs are created by the IBM i operating system. User jobs are created by users. Most jobs that a
pr clu
system operator works with fall into the user job category.
Interactive jobs are workstation or 5250 emulation jobs. All work performed between sign-on and
the corresponding sign-off, regardless of what type of work, is part of one interactive job. Interactive
jobs are sometimes incorrectly called sessions. A session refers to everything that transpires at the
workstation.
Ex
Traditionally, batch jobs are run by submitting requests for data processing by programs that do not
need to interact with the user. These requests are placed on a job queue and run when system
resources become available.
A communication job is an interactive or batch job started by a program request from a remote
system over telecommunications.
An autostart job is similar to a batch job. It does repetitive work or one-time initialization work that is
associated with a particular subsystem.
Student Notebook
The lifecycle of a job

IBM i
Batch job
n
Submit Job queue Subsystem Memory pool Output
ó
.N ci
.R a
Interactive job
C rmUser starts interactive job Subsystem Memory pool Output

to fo
ec ivo
Figure 14-5. The lifecycle of a job AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
To understand the basics of Power Systems with IBM i work management, follow a simple batch job
as it moves through the system. The life of a simple batch job begins when you submit it to the
pr clu
system. The job is then sent to a job queue where it waits to enter a subsystem where it can run.
Once the job moves to the subsystem, it is allocated memory in which to run. The printer output file
(also called the spooled file) is then sent to the output queue to await further instruction on what to
do (for example, printing).
Not every job follows this exact path; however, you can better understand how other work is
Ex
completed on the system by learning about the following steps.

1. When a job is submitted to Power Systems with IBM i, it is created and enters the system. At
this time, the properties are given to the job. Once the job receives its job description (explained
later in this unit) and determines its properties, it moves to the job queue, where it waits to enter
the subsystem.
2. Job queues are work entry points through which batch jobs enter the system. They can be
thought of as waiting rooms for a subsystem. A number of factors affect when the job is pulled
off the job queue into the subsystem. Such as the job priority on the job queue, the sequence
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty number of the job queue, and the maximum number of active jobs. When all of these factors
work together, the job is pulled off the job queue to start running in the subsystem.
3. When the job enters the subsystem, it becomes active. Until a job gets its activity level and
memory from a memory pool, it cannot run. The job uses several pieces of information before it
can receive memory to run. The subsystem description (explained later in this unit), like the job
description, carries information, such as which memory pool to use, the routing entry, the
maximum number of active jobs, and the number of active jobs currently in the subsystem.
n
4. Memory is a resource from the memory pool that the subsystem uses to run the job. The
ó
amount of memory from a memory pool, including how many other jobs are competing for
memory, affects how efficiently a job runs. Subsystems use different memory pools to support
different types of jobs that run within them. The subsystem gives the memory pool the
.N ci
information it needs to process the order in which jobs are allocated memory, and the memory
pool allocates memory for the job to run to completion.
.R a
5. Printer output for a job (spooled files) is sent to an output queue where it waits to be sent to a
printer or file. The output queue is similar to the job queue in that it controls how the output is
C rm
made available to the printer. The output queue allows the user to control what files are printed
first.
An interactive job is active from the time a user signs on to a display station until they sign off. While
they are signed on, an interactive job typically goes through the following steps:
to fo
1. A user signs on to a display station.
2. IBM i runs this job and might generate printed output, which is placed in a spooled file and put
on an output queue.
3. This spooled file waits on the output queue to be sent to a printer file.
ec ivo
4. The user either signs off, at which point the system ends the interactive job, or stays signed on,
in which case the job keeps running.
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Job name
IBM i
n
Qualified job name
ó
.N ci
000578 AS24xx DSP01
.R a
Job number User name Job name
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 14-6. Job name AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
A user profile identifies a user on the system and sets up the characteristics for all of the work that
performed by the user. One of the values assigned by way of the user profile is a job description.
pr clu
The job description specifies the job queue that is used by a user when they submit jobs to run in
batch, and the processing priority that is assigned to those jobs.
When a batch job is submitted, the job is placed on a job queue. A job queue is an object that
contains a list of batch jobs waiting to be processed. Each job has a job queue priority (one through
nine) assigned to it; where one is the highest and nine is the lowest priority.
Ex
Work management processes jobs in a first-in first-out order according to their priority. The jobs are
sent to a subsystem when it is their turn to process. Each subsystem is set up to run a specific
number of jobs concurrently, in this example two jobs are allowed to run.
There are six job queue commands. We focus on one of the job queue commands, Work with Job
Queue (WRKJOBQ), in this unit. The other commands can be run as options from the Work with Job
Queue display or from a command line.
• Clear Job Queue (CLRJOBQ)
• Create Job Queue (CRTJOBQ)
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty • Delete Job Queue (DLTJOBQ)

• Hold Job Queue (HLDJOBQ)
• Release Job Queue (RLSJOBQ)
• Work with Job Queue (RKJOBQ)
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
What is a job queue?

IBM i
Subsystem (2)
HIGH
n
Job queue 1 JOB2
JOB5
JOB1 (2)
ó
JOB2 (1) 2 JOB1
JOB4
.N ci
JOB3 (4)
JOB4 (2) 3
.R a
JOB5 (1)
JOB6 (4)
C rm
4 JOB3
. JOB6
.
.
to fo
LOW
ec ivo
Figure 14-7. What is a job queue? AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Each job has a unique name called a qualified job name, which consists of three parts (or
qualifiers):
pr clu
• A job number, which is a unique number assigned by the system that allows you to identify jobs.
• A user name, which is the name of the user profile under which the job was started.
• A job name, which is the name of the workstation the user signed on to.
Ex
When you search for a job, you can search for the entire qualified name if you know all of the
qualifiers. For example:
WRKJOB JOB(000578/AS24xx/DSP01)
You can also search for the job using only some of the qualifiers. For example, you can search by
user name and job name or by job name only:
WRKJOB JOB(AS24xx/DSP01)
WRKJOB JOB(DSP01)
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty There are several commonly used commands for finding jobs on the Power Systems with IBM i:
Work with Active Job (WRKACTJOB)
Work with User Jobs (WRKUSRJOB)
Work with Submitted Job (WRKSBMJOB)
After entering one of these commands, one of the Work with... displays appears, showing you a list
n
of jobs.
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Job/thread
IBM i
• Thread:
n
– A unit of work managed by IBM i: Job-1 Job-2
• Allocates system resource (processor cycles)
ó
• Execution priority Job-3
.N ci
• Job:
Job-4
– Single threaded job
.R a
– Multithreaded job
– Each thread is an independent task-stream
C rm
• User request (left-click or Enter): Job#
– Interacts with application thread

to fo
– Dispatched and managed separately Thread#1 Thread#n
– Assigned processor cycles

ec ivo
Figure 14-8. Job/thread AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Although an operating system gives the impression that it is concurrently executing many tasks,
each processor in a symmetric multiprocessor (SMP) traditionally executes a single task' instruction
pr clu
stream at any moment.

The QPRCMLTTSK system value controls whether to enable the individual SMP processors to
concurrently execute multiple instruction streams. Each instruction stream belongs to separate
tasks or threads. When enabled, each individual processor concurrently executes multiple tasks at
the same time. The effect of its use will likely increase the performance capacity of a system or
Ex
improve the responsiveness of a multithreaded application.

Running multiple instruction streams at the same time does not improve the performance of any
given task. As with any performance recommendations, results vary in different environments.
The way that multithreading is done depends on the hardware model, and therefore, the
performance capacity gains vary. IBM Power Systems support this approach through a concept
called simultaneous multithreading (SMT).
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty Older iSeries processors use the approach that is called hardware multithreading (HMT). With the
hardware multithreading approach, the hardware automatically switches between the tasks of any
long processing delay event, for example, cache misses. Some models do not support any form of
multithreading, which means the QPRCMLTTSK system value has no performance effect. Because
the QPRCMLTTSK system value enables the parallel use of shared processor resources, the
performance gains depend highly on the application and the model.
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
What is a job description?

IBM i
It is used to set specific job-related attributes, such as:

• Which job queue to use for your jobs
n
• What scheduling priority is assigned to your jobs
ó
• Which output queue is used for your output
.N ci
• What priority is assigned to your output jobs
• Specific routing data for your jobs
.R a
• The library list that is used for your jobs
C rm
• What level of error logging to do for your jobs
to fo
It basically determines how and where
a user’s job is run on the system.
ec ivo
Figure 14-9. What is a job description? AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
A job description is an object that contains a set of information, also called attribute, that specifies
how a job should be run. There are many job descriptions on every Power Systems with IBM i.
pr clu
Each job must be associated with a job description. Each job description can have multiple jobs
associated with it. The IBM-supplied default job description is QDFTJOBD, and it is located in the
QGPL library.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
How a user profile relates to a job description

IBM i
A user profile specifies:

• The user’s password and when it expires
n
• The classification (*USER, *SYSOPR, and so on)
ó
• The job description that is assigned to this user
.N ci
• Which output queue is used for this user’s jobs
• The name of the current library for this user
.R a
• And so forth
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 14-10. How a user profile relates to a job description AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Some of the attributes for a user are set in the user profile. Others are set in the job description that
is used for the user’s jobs. There are some attributes, like output queue, that are specified in both
pr clu
places.
The system first checks in the job description, and, if it does not find a value there, it looks for that
value in the user’s profile. Therefore, the values in the job description take precedent and override
the user profile.
Ex
Security is covered in greater detail later in this class.
Student Notebook
What is a subsystem?
IBM i
SUBSYSTEM QINTER SUBSYSTEM QBATCH

Power
n
System
with IBM i
ó
.N ci
Interactive Batch
processing processing
.R a
C rm Spooling
to fo
Web server jobs
SUBSYSTEM QSPL SUBSYSTEM QHTTPSVR

ec ivo
Figure 14-11. What is a subsystem? AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
From the earlier discussion about different types of jobs (interactive, batch, and spooling), you
might correctly assume that any particular job would run most efficiently on a system designed to
pr clu
run only that specific type of job.

The system can contain one or more operating environments called subsystems. A subsystem is a
single, predefined operating environment through which the system coordinates the work flow and
system resources. Each job, as it starts, is assigned to a subsystem.
Ex
By using different subsystems, each with its own unique operating characteristics, IBM i work
management makes it appear to the jobs running in each subsystem that the entire system was
designed to run only that type of job.
Like jobs, subsystems have descriptions that carry important information needed to complete the
work; this is the purpose of the subsystem description.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Subsystem description
IBM i
The subsystem description defines:
n
• The characteristics of a subsystem
• How much work can be initiated and where that work is
ó
performed, including:
.N ci
– Maximum number of concurrent jobs
– Memory pools that are used
.R a
• The sources of work for a subsystem, such as:
C rm
– Autostart jobs
– Communication
to fo
– Job queues
– Prestart jobs
– Workstations
ec ivo
Figure 14-12. Subsystem description AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The subsystem description is an object that defines the environment that the jobs that run in the
subsystem need in order to run most efficiently.
pr clu
There are a number of commands used with the subsystem descriptions.

• Change subsystem Description (CHGSBSD)
• Create subsystem Description (CRTSBSD)
Ex
• Delete subsystem Description (DLTSBSD)

• Display subsystem Description (DSPSBSD)
• Print subsystem Description (PRTSBSDAUT)
• Work with subsystem Description (WRKSBSD)
The most useful is the WRKSBSD command because from this display you can create, change,
delete, display, or work with subsystem jobs, or you can start or stop a subsystem.
Student Notebook
Subsystem configurations shipped by IBM

IBM i
• IPL starts only the subsystem that is named in QCTLSBSD system value
• Environment as shipped (default) - QCTLSBSD = QBASE
n
Autostart job
QBASE QSPL Spooling
ó
Console, interactive, batch, communications
QSYSWRK System initiated functions
.N ci
QSERVER File server
QUSRWRK User initiated functions
.R a
• Complex environment - QCTLSBSD = QCTL
C rm
Autostart job
QCTL QINTER Interactive
Console
QBATCH Batch
QSYSWRK
QSPL Spooling
to fo
System functions
QUSRWRK QCMN Communication
System functions QSERVER File server

ec ivo
Figure 14-13. Subsystem configurations shipped by IBM AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The default subsystem configuration consists of a controlling subsystem called QBASE, a system
function subsystem called QSYSWRK, and a spooling subsystem called QSPL. All jobs on the
pr clu
system run in this environment except for some system jobs and spooling jobs that are run under
the control of the QBASE subsystem. Certain system jobs run under the control of QSYSWRK.
Spooling jobs run under the control of the QSPL subsystem.
A more complex subsystem configuration is also provided and can be used instead of the default
QBASE/QSPL configuration. It consists of:
Ex
• QCTL Controlling subsystem

• QSYSWRK Runs certain system jobs initiated by the OS
• QUSRWRK Instituted in V5.1. subsystem used by the system for system jobs that are
user-oriented
• QINTER Subsystem for interactive jobs
• QBATCH Subsystem for batch jobs
• QSPL Subsystem for spooling
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty • CMN Subsystem used for communicating jobs

• QSERVER Subsystem used for file serving jobs
• QHTTPSVR Subsystem used for web server jobs and programs
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Memory pools
IBM i
• Logical subdivisions of main storage:

Machine Pool
n
– Shared pools:
• Shared by multiple subsystems
ó
User-Defined Pools
• Used for system activity
.N ci
– Private pools:
• Assigned to a specific subsystem *BASE
.R a
• Not shared across subsystems
C rm
– Up to 64 memory pools
• Different from disk pools:
– Auxiliary storage pools (ASP)
to fo
– Independent auxiliary storage pools (IASP)
ec ivo
Figure 14-14. Memory pools AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Logical subdivisions of main storage:

• Shared pools:
pr clu
- Shared by multiple subsystems:

• *Base
• *INTERACT
Ex
• *SPOOL
• *SHRPOOL1-n (up to 60)
- Used for system activity
• *Machine
• Private pools:
- Assigned to a specific subsystem
- Not shared across subsystems
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty Up to 64 memory pools.

Different from disk pools:
• Subdivision of disk space
- Auxiliary storage pools (ASP)
- Different from independent auxiliary storage pools (IASP)
n
• Grouped by disk drives
• Optional
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Work management overview

IBM i
n
SBMJOB
ó
.N ci
Job Subsystem Output Writer
queue pool queue
.R a
Batch
Sign-on Printer
C rm
to fo Interactive
ec ivo
Figure 14-15. Work management overview AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
There are many different types of jobs, and most move through many stages. A working knowledge
of work management is absolutely necessary to effectively control jobs on the system.
pr clu
The flow for an interactive job is:

1. An interactive job does not place jobs in a job queue. This step is null in this environment.
2. An interactive job is started when a user signs on to the system.
Ex
3. The interactive job is assigned to a subsystem designated to run interactive jobs.

- The QINTER subsystem is the default system for interactive jobs.
- An administrator can create additional subsystems where interactive jobs are run.
4. Work management determines how much memory is assigned to each subsystem.
- This determines how much memory gets assigned to run these types of jobs.
- The system administrator defines how the memory is allocated (into shared memory pools
or private memory pools).
5. Output queue details are covered later in the course.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty 6. Writer details are covered later in the course.

The flow for a batch job is:
A batch job includes one additional step in the beginning. Once the job flows out of the subsystem,
the steps are the same for both types of jobs.
1. A user either chooses a menu option that issues the command to submit a job, or the user
manually issues the submit job command on the command line.
n
2. A batch job is placed in a job queue and awaits its turn to be processed.
ó
- Job queues are created by programmers or by administrators.
- The job description in your user profile is used by work management to determine to which
.N ci
job queue your job are sent.
- Your job description defines what priority is assigned to your batch jobs.
.R a
- Jobs are processed in a FIFO (first-in first-out) order based on priority.
3. The batch job is assigned to a subsystem designated to run batch jobs.
C rm
- The QBATCH subsystem is the default system for batch jobs.
- An administrator can create additional subsystems where batch jobs are run.
to fo
- The system administrator defines how the memory is allocated (into shared memory pools
or private memory pools).
ec ivo
5. Output queue details are covered later in the course.

6. Writer details are covered later in the course.
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i
1. True or false: A job is an environment that enables work to be

performed on the system.
ó n
2. Which of the following is not considered a user job?
a. Interactive
.N ci
b. Batch
c. Autostart
.R a
d. Spooling
C rm
3. When a batch job is submitted, it is placed in a (blank).
a. System memory
b. Subsystem
to fo
c. Job queue
d. Output queue
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i
4. True or false: The highest priority in a job queue is priority

nine.
ó n
5. The system job that generates a print report runs in which of
the following subsystems?
.N ci
a. QHTTP
b. QINTER
.R a
c. QBATCH
d. QSPL
C rm 6. True or false: An interactive job is placed in a job queue when

it is submitted.
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Unit summary
IBM i

• Explain the difference between interactive and batch
n
processing
ó
.N ci
.R a
• Describe what a job description does and how it controls work
C rm
on the system
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 15. Work management with 5250 emulation

This unit provides a brief introduction to work management. We look at the
commands and screens, windows, and panes to display related information
n
on the system.
ó
.N ci
• Use the command to display a job description
.R a
• Identify which job description is used by a user profile
C rm
• List the subsystems that are active
• Use the command to display system status information

to fo
Accountability:
ec ivo
• Exercise
oy s
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 15. Work management with 5250 emulation 15-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Job description: What is it?

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 15-2. Job description: What is it? AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The command used to display the screen capture on this visual is:
pr clu
DSPJOBD JOBD(QGPL/QDFTJOBD)
Press the Page down or Page up keys to move through the initial three pages displayed when you
run this command. Press the Enter key to move to the next screen, which is the visual on the next
page.
A job description is an object that contains a set of information, also called attributes, that specify
Ex
how a job should be run. There are many job descriptions on your system. The IBM-supplied
default job description is QDFTJOBD (in the QGPL library).
Notice the information that can be specified in a job description on these initial three pages.
Student Notebook
Job description: Library list

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 15-3. Job description: Library list AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Press the Enter key on the previous page to see the screen capture on this page.
On this screen, you can see the parameter that can specify either the list of libraries in the system
pr clu
library list or that can specify a system value that contains this information.
The default library list is used for jobs that use this job description. The default library list contains
the library names specified in the system value QUSRLIBL at the time a job using this job description
is started.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
How a user profile relates to a job description

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 15-4. How a user profile relates to a job description AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Use the work user profile (WRKUSRPRF *all) command to see a list of user profiles. From that
screen, select the profile of interest and specify option 5 to display the information stored in that
pr clu
profile.
Page down to get to the page captured in the visual. Notice the type of information stored in a user
profile.
Specifically, make note of the last parameter on this page where you specify the job description
Ex
specified for this user.
Student Notebook
Work with Subsystems

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 15-5. Work with Subsystems AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Work with subsystems (WRKSBS) display shows the status of, and information about, each
subsystem in the system.
pr clu
You can use this list to determine whether a specific amount of main storage was assigned to a
subsystem and, if so, which pool IDs within the subsystem were assigned that main storage.
You can also see how many jobs are active in each subsystem.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Work with System Status

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 15-6. Work with System Status AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Work with System Status (WRKSYSSTS) command shows the display on the visual, it shows a
group of statistics that depicts the current status of the system.
pr clu
This display shows:

• Number of jobs currently in the system.
• Total capacity of the system ASP.
Ex
• Percentage of the system ASP storage currently in use.

• Amount of auxiliary storage for temporary objects and machine data currently in use.
• Maximum amount of auxiliary storage space required for temporary objects and machine data
since the last initial program load (IPL).
• Percentage of machine addresses used.
• Statistical and reference information related to each storage pool that currently has main
storage allocated to it.
Student Notebook
Pressing the F24 function key displays the additional function keys available in the lower right.
Those are discussed on the next page.
Remember to use the F1 - Help key to get an understanding of all of the information displayed on
this screen.
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Using the additional function keys

IBM i
F14
n
F15
ó
.N ci
F16
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 15-7. Using the additional function keys AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Using the F24 - Additional function keys from the Work with System Status display allows you to
process other commands that show the screens captured on this visual.
pr clu
Using the F14 - Work with subsystems function key processes the WRKSBS command to show the
screen that was discussed earlier in this unit.
Using the F15 - Work with active jobs function key processes the WRKACTJOB command. The Work
with Active Jobs display shows the performance and status information for jobs currently active on
Ex
the system. More detail about jobs is covered later in this class.
Using the F16 - Work with disk status function key processes the WRKDSKSBS command. The Work
with Disk Status display shows performance and status information about the disk units on the
system. It displays the number of units currently on the system, the type of each disk unit, the size
of disk space, whether the disk is currently on the system, the percentage of disk space used, and
other statistics about the disk drives.
Student Notebook
Exercises
IBM i

Use the information that is listed to perform the exercises.
ó n
OPTIONAL: Perform these exercises at your discretion, on your
time.
.N ci
Exercise: Work management with
.R a
5250 emulation
C rm
Exercise: Work management with
IBM Navigator for i
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 15-8. Exercises AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Refer to your Student Exercises guide.

These exercises are optional. Time is not allocated during class to perform these lab exercises.
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or false: The name of the default job description is

QDFTJOBD.
ó n
2. The command that is used to display a job description is:
a. DSPUSRPRF
.N ci
b. WKRJOBD
c. DSPJOBD
.R a
d. DSPOBJD
C rm
3. True or false: The library list is one of the parameters that are
specified in a user profile.
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Unit summary
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 16. Job control with 5250 emulation

Monitoring and controlling the jobs that run on the system and the printed
reports these jobs generate are the most important aspects of a system
n
operator's job.
ó
.N ci
• Explain how to use the Work with User Jobs command
.R a
• Explain how to use the Work with Active Jobs command
C rm
• Explain how to submit jobs and the commands used to display these jobs
• Explain how to use the Work with Job Queue command and the options
available for these jobs
• Explain how to schedule jobs
to fo
• Explain how and when to end a job abnormally
• Explain how and when to disconnect a user job
ec ivo

Accountability:
oy s
• Exercise
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 16. Job control with 5250 emulation 16-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

n
ó
• Explain how to submit jobs and the commands used to display
.N ci
these jobs
• Explain how to use the Work with Job Queue command and
.R a
the options available for these jobs
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
Monitoring includes such functions as:

• Locating information about a job, whether it is on a job queue, is active, or has spool files on an
pr clu
output queue
• Determining the status of jobs and printed output
• Displaying detailed information about a job
Ex
Controlling includes such functions as:

• Changing the way a job is or will be processed
• Holding, ending, or releasing a job (active or on a queue)
• Holding, deleting, or releasing printed output
• Answering system messages sent to a job
• Moving printed output from one output queue to another
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Work with User Jobs command

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 16-2. Work with User Jobs command AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Work with User Jobs (WRKUSRJOB) command allows you to work with a list of selected user
jobs.
pr clu
Depending on the values, you specify on the STATUS, ASTLVL, and JOBTYPE parameters, you can
use this command to perform the following tasks:
• From the Work with Signed-On Users display, you can select options to send messages to or
sign off users who are signed on to the system. You can also select options to display
Ex
messages or display details about signed-on users. To show the Work with Signed-On Users
display, specify STATUS(*ACTIVE), ASTLVL(*BASIC), and JOBTYPE(*INTERACT).
• From the Work with Jobs display, you can show the status of all batch jobs on the system. You
can select options to hold, end, or release the jobs shown. You can also select options to work
with printer output or display messages. To show the Work with Jobs display, specify any value
for the STATUS parameter, ASTLVL(*BASIC), and JOBTYPE(*BATCH).
Student Notebook
• From the Work with User Jobs display, you can show the status of user jobs running on the
system and the status of user jobs on job queues or output queues. You can select options to
change, hold, end, work with, release, or disconnect the jobs shown. You can also select
options to work with spooled files and display messages.
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Work with User Jobs display

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 16-3. Work with User Jobs display AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Work with User Jobs display shows the names and status information of user jobs running in
the system and the status of user jobs on job queues or output queues.
pr clu
You can type an option next to one or more jobs. When the Enter key is pressed, the function
associated with the number you typed is performed for that job.
If you press the Enter key without typing any other data, you are returned to the previous menu or
display.
Ex
You can type parameters on the command line if you want to override the defaults for the options
you typed. Typing parameters is valid only if you used one of the options. For example, you must
type 4 next to one or more jobs and, if you want to, type OPTION(*IMMED) to change from the
default, OPTION(*CNTRLD).
Student Notebook
Working with Signed-On Users

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 16-4. Working with Signed-On Users AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
To see the display in the visual, enter the command:

pr clu
WRKUSRJOB USER(*ALL) STATUS(*ACTIVE) JOBTYPE(*INTERACT) ASTLVL(*BASIC)

An easy way to work with and control users who are signed on to the Power is by running the
WRKUSRJOB command shown on the top of this visual. This command brings up the Work with
Signed-On Users display. From this display: you can send a user a message, sign the user off the
system, display details about the user (for example, user name and description and display station
Ex
name and description), and display a message that requires a reply from a user. This display can
make working with users a lot easier.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Work with Active Jobs

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 16-5. Work with Active Jobs AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Work with Active Jobs (WRKACTJOB) command allows you to work with performance and status
information for the active jobs in the system. The sequence of jobs can be changed with the
pr clu
Sequence (SEQ) parameter or through operations on the display. Other parameters allow the
selection of jobs to be shown on the display. The selection parameters can also be changed by
operations on the display.
The Work with Active Jobs (WRKACTJOB) display shows the performance and status information
for jobs currently active on the system. All information is gathered on a job basis.
Ex
The jobs are ordered on the basis of the subsystem in which they are running. Jobs that run in a
subsystem (autostart jobs, interactive jobs, batch jobs, readers, and writers) are alphabetized by
job name and indented under the subsystem monitor job field with which they are associated.
Subsystem monitors (with the jobs in the subsystem grouped under each monitor job) are
alphabetized and presented before system (SYS) jobs. The system jobs (SCPF, QSYSARB,
QLUS) are alphabetized by job name and presented following the subsystem monitors and jobs
within the subsystems.
Student Notebook
Option 5: Work with Job

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 16-6. Option 5: Work with Job AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Work with Job and the Display Job menus allow you to select options to work with or to
change information related to a user job.
pr clu
Information about the following options can be shown regardless of where the job is located in the
system (on a job queue, on an output queue, or active):
• Job status attributes
• Job definition attributes
Ex
• Spooled file information

Information about the following options can be shown only when the job is active:
• Job run attributes
• Job log information
• Call stack information
• Job lock information
• Library list information
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty • Open file information

• File override information
• Commitment control status
• Communications status
• Activation groups
n
• Threads
• Media library attributes
ó
Note
.N ci
A job is not considered to be in the system until all of its input is completely read in. Only then is an
entry placed on the job queue.
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Question
IBM i
• What are some scenarios where you might need to view active
jobs in the system or currently signed on users?
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Submitting a batch job

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 16-8. Submitting a batch job AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
You already know how to start an interactive job; all you do is sign on to a workstation. To start (or
submit) a batch job, you use the Submit Job (SBMJOB) command; however, batch jobs are usually
pr clu
assigned to menu options for an application.

There are several ways to assign characteristics to a batch job, such as which job queue it is
submitted to, what priority it is assigned, to which output queue its associated files go to and at what
priority, and which print device should be used. If you use the SBMJOB command, there are
parameters for each of these characteristics. There is also a parameter to specify which job
Ex
description to use. Unless specified explicitly on the command, the submitted job gets its
characteristics from the job description. Which job description you should use might depend on the
user profile of the user submitting the job.
If nothing is specified, the system uses the job description specified in the user profile, QDFTJOBD.
This default job description specifies that batch jobs should be submitted to the job queue, QBATCH
in the QGPL library. This job queue runs its jobs in either the QBATCH or the QBASE subsystem,
depending on how your Power is set up.
Student Notebook
Work with Submitted Jobs

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 16-9. Work with Submitted Jobs AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
As the command name implies, the Work with Submitted Jobs (WRKSBMJOB) command can be used
only to display and work with batch jobs. It is easiest to use this command to check on the status of
pr clu
your batch jobs.

The WRKSBMJOB command displays those jobs submitted from:
*USER The user ID associated with the job running the WRKSBMJOB command
*WRKSTN The workstation running the WRKSBMJOB command
Ex
*JOB The job running the WRKSBMJOB command

The following information is shown for each batch job:
• The job name
• The user profile of the person who submitted the job
• The type and status of the job
• The last system function that the job used
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Work with Job Queue

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 16-10. Work with Job Queue AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
As a system operator, you can work with all submitted jobs. The names of all job queues on a
system are displayed when you select the menu options illustrated in this visual or use the Work
pr clu
with Job Queue (WRKJOBQ) command. For each queue listed, the number of jobs waiting in that
queue, the status of the queue, and the subsystem that runs jobs placed on that queue are listed.
An entire job queue (and all jobs on it) can be controlled from this display by entering the
appropriate options.
Option 3: Holds a job queue. No new jobs are started from a job queue that is held. Any jobs
Ex
already started from the queue are not affected. Additional jobs can be submitted to the queue, but,
like the ones already there, they do not run until the queue is released. The Hold Job Queue
(HLDJOBQ) command can be used to perform the same function.
Option 4: Deletes the job queue. In order for this to happen, there can be no jobs on it. This option
runs the Delete Job Queue (DLTJOBQ) command.
Option 5: Allows you to see and work with the individual jobs waiting to run from a job queue. This
option runs the Work with Job Queue (WRKJOBQ) command.
Student Notebook
Option 6: Releases a held job queue and allows jobs to be restarted from that queue by the
associated subsystem. The Release Job Queue (RLSJOBQ) command can be used to perform this
same function.
Option 8:
• Allows you to view job scheduled entries for a selected job queue.
• Provides schedule information on future jobs to be submitted to this job queue.
n
• Runs the Work with Schedule Entries (WRKJOBSCDE) command.
ó
This option is discussed in more detail later in this unit.
Option 14: Clears all jobs from the job queue. This option causes the Clear Job Queue (CLRJOBQ)
.N ci
command to be run.
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Working with jobs on a job queue

IBM i
Enter
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 16-11. Working with jobs on a job queue AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
By selecting option 5 from the Work with All Job Queues display or specifying the name of a job
queue on the WRKJOBQ command, you can display the status and selection priority of the jobs
pr clu
waiting from a specific job queue. Jobs are listed here in the order in which they were placed on the
queue in priority sequence. This is the order in which they are run. Users with *JOBCTL rights in
their profile can control the jobs in the queue from this display. As a system operator, you have
authority to hold, release, change, or end jobs. To change the attributes for a job before it runs,
select option 2. The CHGJOB command prompt is displayed.
Ex
When the Change Job prompt appears, the full three-part job name is already filled in and cannot
be changed. Change the attributes of the job as required, and press Enter. Note that F10
(Additional parameters) is available to allow access to additional attributes.
From the Work with Job Queue display, individual jobs can also be held and released or ended. Use
option 3 to indicate that a job is to be held. A job held on a job queue remains there but is not
started by the subsystem that is processing jobs on the queue. Use option 6 for a job being held, to
make that job once again eligible to be started.
Student Notebook
Use option 4 to end a job on a job queue. Ending a job means removing it from the system. Once
ended, there is no way to restart the job. If you end a job by mistake, a new job with exactly the
same attributes as the one that was ended must be submitted. For that reason, when you end a job
on a job queue, you must confirm your selection. Be aware that if you prompt for option 4 from this
display, no confirmation display appears. The job is simply ended.
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Working with job scheduler

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 16-12. Working with job scheduler AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
A standard Job Scheduler is included as part of the operating system. It provides basic scheduling
options for your jobs.
pr clu
The Add Job Schedule Entry (ADDJOBSCDE) command allows you to schedule batch jobs by adding
an entry to the job schedule. You can use this command to schedule a batch job to be submitted
once or to schedule a batch job to be submitted at regular intervals.
The job schedule entry contains all of the information needed to submit the job. Including the
Ex
command the job runs, the job description and user profile under which the job is run, the job queue
to which the job is submitted, and the message queue to which messages are sent.
At the date and time you specify on this command, the job is submitted to the specified job queue.
This command does not guarantee that the job begins running at the scheduled time, however. The
job will not begin running if the job queue is held, not attached to an active subsystem, or if the
maximum number of active jobs allowed to run in the subsystem or on the system at one time is
reached.
Student Notebook
The Work with Job Schedule Entries (WRKJOBSCDE) command allows you to work with an entry,
entries, or generic entries in the job schedule. Each job schedule entry contains the information
needed to automatically submit a batch job once or at regularly scheduled intervals.
This command shows the Work with Job Schedule Entries display. From the display, you can select
options to add, change, remove, hold, or release entries. You can display details of an entry or work
with the last job submitted for an entry. You can also select an option to immediately submit a job
using the information contained in the job schedule entry.
n
You can also add Job Schedule Entry using WRKJOBSCDE and then function key F6.
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Working with Advanced Job Scheduler

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 16-13. Working with Advanced Job Scheduler AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Advanced Job Scheduler, also knows as AJS, provides many more scheduling options than the
standard Job scheduler. The AJS is a licensed program product that can be purchased by the
pr clu
customer.
The Add Job using the Job Scheduler (ADDJOBJS) command allows you to schedule batch jobs by
adding an entry to the job schedule. Jobs can be a single job or a member of a group of jobs or an
application. You can use this command to schedule a batch job to be submitted once, at a regular
interval, and so on, based on the schedule code you specify. You can schedule jobs with
Ex
user-defined calendars, holiday exception calendars, and fiscal year calendars.

The Work with Jobs using the Job Scheduler (WRKJOBJS) command allows you to work with a single
job, groups of jobs, or all jobs that you have set up in the Advanced Job Scheduler. You can
sequence the display by job, by date, or by group.
When you select jobs that you want to work with, you are taken to the Work with Jobs display. From
this display, you can perform most job related functions.
Student Notebook
Ending a user job abnormally

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
+ F4
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 16-14. Ending a user job abnormally AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
If you have tried to end a job immediately and it is still active after 10 minutes, you might have to
use the End Job Abnormal (ENDJOBABN) command. This command is not available as an option on
pr clu
a list display. It must be entered as a command. You cannot use the ENDJOBABN command unless
a user's job ended immediately and is still active after 10 minutes.
In order to run the ENDJOBABN command, you must be signed on as QPGMR, QSYSOPR, or QSRV or
have *ALLOBJ authority. You must also know the full three-part job name of the job you want to end.
Use option 5 on the WRKUSRJOB display to determine the full job name. After ending the Work
Ex
with Jobs menu, prompt for the ENDJOBABN command on any command line (on this visual, the
ENDJOBABN command is in the process of being entered on the Work with User Jobs display) and
enter the recorded job name.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Disconnecting a user job

IBM i
n
Order entry User job
ó
.N ci
Sign on
.R a
Disconnect User... User job
Password...
C rm Reconnect Order Entry
User job
to fo
automatically
at sign-on
ec ivo
Figure 16-15. Disconnecting a user job AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Option 13 on the Work with User Jobs display runs the Disconnect Job (DSCJOB) command, which
disconnects an interactive job that is not currently held. When you select option 13 for one or more
pr clu
jobs:
• The job information is saved.
• The sign-on display appears on the user's workstation.
• The job is resumed if the same user later signs on to the same workstation.
Ex
The DSCJOB command is not allowed for a pass-through job. In order to disconnect a pass-through
job, the user must press the System Request key and return to the source system.
To run option 13, you must have *JOBCTL authority.
The disconnect job interval system value (QDSCJOBITV) is used to control how long the system
holds this job in the background. This system value is shipped with a value of 240 minutes. If the
user does not sign back in within 240 minutes, then the system cancels the job.
Student Notebook
Exercise
IBM i

ó n
Exercise: Job control with 5250 emulation
.N ci
.R a
C rm
Inform instructor when you
complete your exercise.
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. The Work with User Jobs command allows you to select which of the
following types of jobs?
n
a. Active
b. Job queue
ó
c. Output queue
d. All of these
.N ci
2. On the Work with User Jobs display, which of the following options
.R a
show you all of the characteristics of a job?
a. Option 2: Change
C rm
b. Option 5: Work with
c. Option 7: Display messages
d. Option 8: Work with spool files
to fo
3. True or false: Option 3: Hold, on the Work with Active Jobs display
and on the Work with User Jobs performs the same function.
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Unit summary
IBM i

n
ó
• Explain how to submit jobs and the commands used to display
.N ci
these jobs
• Explain how to use the Work with Job Queue command and
.R a
the options available for these jobs
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 17. Job control with IBM Navigator for i

reports these jobs generate are the most important aspects of a system
n
operator's job. This unit details the windows and navigation used to display
these types of information when working with the IBM Navigator for i
ó
interface.
.N ci
.R a
• Navigate to display your user jobs
C rm
• Navigate to display all active jobs on the system
• Customize the windows and data displayed as you navigate this interface
• Navigate to display the properties for a job
to fo
• Navigate to display information for the active subsystems
• Navigate to display information about jobs that were put on a scheduler
ec ivo

Accountability:
oy s
• Exercise
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 17. Job control with IBM Navigator for i 17-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

n
ó
• Customize the windows and data displayed as you navigate
.N ci
this interface
.R a
C rm
• Navigate to display information about jobs that were put on a
scheduler
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
Monitoring includes such functions as:

• Locating information about a job, whether it is on a job queue, is active, or has spool files on an
pr clu
output queue
• Determining the status of jobs and printed output
• Displaying detailed information about a job
Ex
Controlling includes such functions as:

• Changing the way a job is or will be processed
• Holding, ending, or releasing a job (active or on a queue)
• Holding, deleting, or releasing printed output
• Answering system messages sent to a job
• Moving printed output from one output queue to another
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Basic Operations: User Jobs

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 17-2. Basic Operations: User Jobs AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
In this example, User Jobs under Basic Operations is selected. By default, this shows you a list of
your jobs. You can work with your jobs on a specific Power Systems with IBM i.
pr clu
What can you do with jobs?

• Tailor the Jobs display
- Change whose jobs are displayed (by using Actions > Include).
Ex
- Change which columns are displayed (by using Actions > Columns).
- Sorting a list or column.
• Display the job log (right-click the job, and select Job Log).
• Hold a job (right-click the job, and select Hold).
• Delete a job (right-click the job, and select Delete).
If you choose to execute any action from the Actions menu like Include, it applies to selected
(checked) items in the list.
Student Notebook
User Jobs: Include

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 17-3. User Jobs: Include AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
In the include function you can specify what you are interested to see; you can specify either job
name, user name or job number. For the user parameter you can use the default, Current signed-on
pr clu
user, then specify a user name using the line below or use the Browse button to see list of all users.
You can also watch jobs with the status check box (Active jobs and Jobs on job queues are the
defaults).
Search for job can be done by job queue, which you can also specify on this screen.
Ex
Note
This filter remains active until you change it.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Work Management: Active Jobs

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 17-4. Work Management: Active Jobs AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
In this example, Active Jobs under Work Management is selected.

Active jobs refer to jobs that started but are not yet completed. Active jobs do not include jobs on a
pr clu
job queue waiting to be started or jobs that completed processing but are waiting for a spooled file
to be printed.
Following are some characteristics of an active job:
• Contains running code
Ex
• Has a call stack

• Has objects locked
• Has the status of an active job, for example, running or waiting for (x)
Controlling work in the system is performed mainly at the job level. Most commands and APIs
operate against the entire job.
Inactive jobs are jobs on a job queue waiting to be started or jobs that completed processing but are
waiting for a printer output file (spooled files) to be printed.
Student Notebook
Active Jobs: Columns

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 17-5. Active Jobs: Columns AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The columns being displayed on Active Jobs screen were customized for active jobs using
Columns from the Actions pull down menu.
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Active Jobs: Filter

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 17-6. Active Jobs: Filter AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
This interface allows you to search for a specific entry. In this example, you might search for
specific active jobs. To invoke this function:
pr clu
1. Key your search argument into the Quick filter box (upper right of the display). The active job
list changes based on your search argument. You can click the x in the box to end the filter or
click Clear filter to return to your unfiltered list.
2. Alternately, click the icon for Advanced filter (it is the upper right icon next to the Quick filter
Ex
box and on the left under check boxes column). Once this icon is selected and active, you are
presented a dialog box that allows you to fine tune your search by specifying a search of the
contents of a column.
3. Use the Column down arrow to choose the column on which you will search. In this example,
we are searching the Current User column.
4. Click the down arrow for Condition and choose one of the following:
• Contains
• Is
Student Notebook
• Starts with
• Ends with
• Does not contain
• Is not
• Does not start with
n
• Does not end with
• Is empty
ó
5. Fill in the text designating your search value. For example, you might specify Starts with
.N ci
AS24. (Notice you do not need to end with an asterisk (*).)
• That presents an updated window with entries that meet your search criteria.
.R a
6. To return to the original window, click Clear filter. Alternatively, you can click Close.
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Active Jobs > Customize your window

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 17-7. Active Jobs > Customize your window AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
You can monitor jobs on the system. If you are using 5250 emulation, type the Work with Active
Jobs (WRKACTJOB) command to display the active jobs. If you are using IBM Navigator for i, click
pr clu
the down arrow for Actions, choose Include, and specify your criteria.
You can view Work Management panels and lists more easily and efficiently by customizing them.
By taking advantage of these customization options, you can improve performance. For example,
by sub-setting the list of objects for a particular library using Include, you can limit the number of
objects that must be retrieved from the host and displayed.
Ex
The methods for customizing Work Management panels are:

• Columns: Specify the columns of information displayed in the list and the order in which they
are displayed using the Columns dialog.
• Sort: Specify how objects are sorted in the list using the Sort dialog.
• Include: Limit the list of objects to those that meet the criteria you specify using the Include
dialog.
Student Notebook
Note: The columns you select can affect the performance of displaying the list of jobs. While every
column displayed can have a slight performance effect, some columns have additional performance
considerations. That might result in a more noticeable performance difference, particularly when the
displayed list contains a large number of jobs.
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Customize this view > Include

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 17-8. Customize this view > Include AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Include specific objects in the list: For jobs and job queues, you can determine which objects
should be displayed in a list. For example, you can change the Active Jobs list to include only the
pr clu
active jobs for a particular user. This action allows you to limit the list of objects displayed in IBM
Navigator for i to those that meet the criteria you specify. Use the Active Jobs list to find jobs and job
queues more quickly and efficiently, especially for large systems with a large number of jobs.
To customize the contents of Active Jobs:
Ex
1. In this example, we selected Work Management then Active Jobs.

2. Click the down arrow for Actions, click Include.
3. This displays the window in the visual.
4. Fill in your criteria for the Include tab.
5. Click OK.
Student Notebook
Customize this view > Columns

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 17-9. Customize this view > Columns AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Specify which columns to display: You can customize Work Management to specify which
columns of information are displayed in a list and the order in which those columns are displayed.
pr clu
To customize columns:
1. In this example, we selected Work Management then Active Jobs.
2. Click the down arrow for Actions, click Columns.
Ex
All of the columns currently displayed are listed under Current columns. Any more columns that
can be displayed are listed under Available columns.
3. Select the columns you want displayed, and use the Add Before and Add After buttons to add
them to the Current columns list in the order you want them displayed.
To remove or reorder a column from the Current columns list, select the column and click
Remove or Move Up or Move Down.
4. Click OK.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Customized to show qualified job name

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 17-10. Customized to show qualified job name AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
In this visual, the columns for Active Jobs were arranged from the default view to show the fully
qualified job name.
pr clu
Easy you can temporary arrange the view using Configure Options button that is next to Actions
menu.
Ex
Student Notebook
Job properties (1 of 2)
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 17-11. Job properties (1 of 2) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Notice the actions you can take for a job when you right-click it or click check box next to job name
and then click Actions and choose Details.
pr clu
Job attributes from the job description and user profile appear in the properties of a job.
To display job information in a green screen environment, you use the Work Active Jobs
(WRKACTJOB) command and then option 5 (Work with) for the job of interest.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Job properties (2 of 2)
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 17-12. Job properties (2 of 2) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
All of the attributes for a job can be displayed using this notebook. If you have the proper authority,
you are allowed to make changes to the job attributes. Select (check) the job, then use the Actions
pr clu
down arrow to select Properties.

• The General tab shows the name of the job description that the job is using and the subsystem
controlling the job.
• The Performance tab shows the run priority, time slice, used CPU, and temporary storage
Ex
usage and job performance statistics.

• The Printer Output tab allows you to view and change properties that affect the printing output
for the job.
• The Messages tab shows how messages sent to and from this job are handled.
• The Job Log tab describes how much detail is kept in the job log.
• The Server tab allows you to view information about server jobs. For each server job, you can
see the type of server, the job user identity, and, if available, the client IP address.
• The Security tab identifies the user profile for the job.
Student Notebook
• The Date/Time tab allows you to view and edit settings related to system time.
• The International tab allows you to view or change properties related to text and character
format and the language and country associated with the job.
• The Threads tab allows you to view or change information related to threads for a job that is
currently active or on a job queue.
• Use the Resources tab to view information about system resources, such as memory pool and
n
disk pool group for the job, including information on memory and processor affinity.
• The Other tab allows you to view or change the accounting code, the decision to keep DDM
ó
connections active, the switch settings, and the device recovery action.
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Subsystems
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 17-13. Subsystems AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
On the left pane click Work Management. From the Work Management tab, click the Active
Subsystems link in order to display currently active subsystems on the system. Remember, the
pr clu
subsystem is where work is processed. All jobs, with the exception of system jobs, run within
subsystems. A subsystem is a single, predefined operating environment through which the system
coordinates work flow and resource use. The system can contain several subsystems, all operating
independently of each other. One subsystem can be set up to handle only interactive jobs, while
another subsystem handles only batch jobs. Subsystems can also be designed to handle many
Ex
types of work.
A subsystem can be either active or inactive. An active subsystem is one that is started. An inactive
subsystem is one that either has not yet been started or was stopped.
The controlling subsystem is the interactive subsystem that starts automatically when the system
starts, and it is the subsystem through which the system operator controls the system during
system startup.
A subsystem job is a job created by the operating system to manage resources and start, control,
and end jobs.
Student Notebook
Subsystems > Properties

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 17-14. Subsystems > Properties AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Right-click a subsystem in the list (QINTER) and then click Properties. The run-time characteristics
of a subsystem are defined in an object called a subsystem description.
pr clu
A subsystem description acts as a set of instructions telling the subsystem how much work enters a
subsystem, how and where it enters, and which resources the subsystem uses to perform the work.
A subsystem is created when a subsystem description is defined or created. An active subsystem
takes on the simple name of the subsystem description.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Active Job Queues

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 17-15. Active Job Queues AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
To see the window on this visual, select Active Job Queues on the Work Management tab.
To see the jobs in a specific job queue, such as Qbatch, right-click the arrow and select Jobs to see
pr clu
the window on the next page.

Ex
Student Notebook
Explore Qbatch job queue

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 17-16. Explore Qbatch job queue AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
On this visual you see jobs on the job queue, Qbatch.

• In this example there is one job on this queue.
pr clu
• Right-click the job to see the drop-down menu. This shows you what you can do to manage jobs
on a job queue.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Exercise
IBM i

Use the listed information to perform the exercises.
ó n
.N ci
Exercise: Job control with IBM Navigator for i
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or false: IBM Navigator for i allows you to display

information relating to your jobs on the system.
ó n
2. The Active Jobs link is available under which of the following
tasks in IBM Navigator for i?
.N ci
a. Basic Operations
b. Work Management
.R a
d. Users and Groups
C rm
3. Which task is used to display details about subsystems
running on your system?
a. Basic Operations
to fo
b. Work Management
d. Users and Groups
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

n
ó
• Customize the windows and data displayed as you navigate
.N ci
this interface
.R a
C rm
• Navigate to display information about jobs that were put on a
scheduler
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 18. Print concepts

Monitoring and controlling the printed reports known as spool files on the
Power is one of the most important aspects of a system operator's job. In this
n
unit, we discuss the concepts you need to know to understand how printing
works on this system.
ó
.N ci
.R a
• Describe how the printing process works
• Explain what an output queue is
C rm
• Explain how an output queue is created
• Explain the decision process the system uses to determine where to
send your printed output
to fo
• List what you can do with your output
• Explain what a print writer is and the function it performs
ec ivo

Accountability:
oy s
• Exercise
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 18. Print concepts 18-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
• Explain the decision process the system uses to determine
where to send your printed output
.R a
C rm
• Explain what a print writer is and the function it performs
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
IBM i printing process

IBM i
Application • Overrides
n
program • Printer file
• Job description
ó
• User profile
• Device description
• System values
.N ci
Output
data
.R a
Spooled
file
C rm
Output
queue Print
writer
Data
stream
to fo
Device description
Printer
ec ivo
Figure 18-2. IBM i printing process AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The following steps offer a high-level overview of the IBM i printing process:
1. The printing process starts when:
pr clu
a. An application program runs. The application program creates output data. The output data
is based on the application program and information contained in the printer file.
b. A user runs a command that generates output data and sends it to a spooled file instead of
the display.
Ex
2. When performing work on the system, the user can specify:

a. If print spooling is selected, the output data is placed in a spooled file, and the spooled file is
placed in an output queue.
b. If direct printing is selected, the output data is sent directly to the printer.
3. The destination of the output data is based on values stored in several printing elements. This
includes overrides that might be in place, a print file, the job description, the user profile,
workstation description, or system values. Output queues are used to manage spooled files.
Student Notebook
4. The printer writer program included in IBM i supports various printer data streams. Print
Services Facility for IBM i provides additional function that provides support for the Advanced
Function Presentation (AFP) Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS).
Each printer must have a printer device description. The printer device description contains a
configuration description of the printer. Printers can be attached by a variety of attachment
methods.
n
5. A remote writer allows you to route spooled files from an output queue on your system to
another system.
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
How are output queues created?

IBM i
Printer description
is created
n
PRT01
ó
.N ci
PRT01
.R a
output queue
C rm
to fo
CRTOUTQ
QPPRINT command
QEZJOBLOG
System supplied User created

ec ivo
Figure 18-3. How are output queues created? AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
An output queue is an object. An output queue contains printer output waiting to be printed. This
printer output is also called a spooled file. There can be many output queues, each containing
pr clu
spooled files from many different jobs and users.

An output queue can be created whenever:
• A device description for a printer is created.
An output queue is automatically created at the same time a printer description is created. An
Ex
output queue is created for each printer configured on the system. The output queue name is
the same as the printer name.
• There are several output queues supplied as part of i. When the Power is configured for the first
time, QPRINT, QEZJOBLOG, and so forth, are created.
• User created output queues can be created by Power implementers with the Create Output
Queue (CRTOUTQ) command.
Student Notebook
Why did the output end up there?

IBM i
(2) Printer device file
SPOOL(*YES)
n
OUTQ(name or *JOB)
(1) Overrides
ó
(3) Job description command
OUTQ(*USRPRF)
.N ci
(4) User profile
.R a
OUTQ(*WRKSTN)
C rm
(5) Device description
PRTDEV(*SYSVAL)
OUTQ(*DEV)
to fo
(6) System value
QPRTDEV(PRT01)
ec ivo
Figure 18-4. Why did the output end up there? AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Work management sets up and maintains information about each job. Among the many pieces of
information kept for each job are what output queue is used for printed output. This is the process
pr clu
used by the system to determine where a user’s output is sent.

As each job is started, work management checks in the following order to determine where your
printed output is sent until an output queue is selected.
1. If overrides were put in place by entering a command or through programming, this determines
Ex
the attributes for your printed jobs. The command used to implement overrides is the Override
with Printer File (OVRPRTF) command.
2. A printer device file is an object created by the application programmer and is incorporated into
the application. A printer device file is used by a programmer to identify the characteristics that
are used to generate a spooled file. It defines things like the printer device used and the
spooling requirements; it does not contain data.
3. A job description is an object that specifies the attributes for a user’s job, such as how and
where a user’s work is processed.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty 4. A user profile identifies a user on the system. One of the values that can be set is where a
user’s printed output is sent.
5. A device description is used to identify the display device being used by the user. It can also
specify which printer is used when a user is working from this display.
6. System values are used to define how things work on your system. The system value QPRTDEV
is used to define the system default printer.
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
What can you do with a spool file?

IBM i
• Print them
n
• Keep as records
• Use as input to other applications
ó
• Transfer to other output queues
.N ci
• Send as email
.R a
• Use to create PDF files
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 18-5. What can you do with a spool file? AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Spooled files in output queues can be:

• Printed
pr clu
• Kept as records
• Used as input to other applications
• Transferred to other output queues
Ex
• Sent as email
• Used to create PDF files
The printer writer program interacts between the output queue and the printer and can be used to
convert the printer data stream.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Start Printer Writer command

IBM i
Spooled files
ORDREG
n
APREG
ORDER Printer
APSUM
ó
writer
APCHECK
*OUTQ (PRT01) PRT01
.N ci
PAYCHECK
.R a
PAYREG
ORDSUM
Printer
writer
C rm
INVOICE
*OUTQ (PRT02)
PRT02
WAITING
to fo
EMPTY Printer
writer
*OUTQ (PRT03) PRT03
ec ivo
Figure 18-6. Start Printer Writer command AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Start Printer Writer (STRPRTWTR) command starts a spooling writer to the specified printer. The
writer is a system job that takes spooled files from an output queue and produces (writes) the
pr clu
output on the printer device. This command specifies the name of the printer, the names of the
output and message queues used, and the name of the writer. The spooled files on an output
queue remain there until a printer writer is started.
Normally, you have an output queue for each printer on your system, and the printer and output
queue have the same name. For example, as shown on the visual, the PRT01 output queue is
Ex
associated with the PRT01 printer, the PRT02 output queue is associated with the PRT02 printer.
However, you can use the printer writer to assign any output queue to any printer on the system.
(For example, the PRT01 output queue might be associated with the PRT02 printer, while the
PRT02 output queue might be associated with the PRT01 printer.)
Once started, the printer writer program selects the next available entry from its associated output
queue and prints the report on the named printer.
Student Notebook
Printer load balancing

IBM i
STRPRTWTR DEV(_____) OUTQ(_____) APREG
ó n
PRT01
.N ci
ORDER
APSUM
PAYREG
APCHECK
.R a
DEV(PRT02) OUTQ(PRT01)
PAYCHECK
C rm
ORDSUM
INVOICE PRT02
*OUTQ (PRT01)
to fo
ORDREG
ec ivo
PRT03
Figure 18-7. Printer load balancing AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
In the previous visual, we talked about starting the writer for one printer from one output queue.
Additional writers can be started (up to a maximum of 10 per output queue). This allows multiple
pr clu
printers to begin printing spooled output files from the same output queue. This allows you to more
easily balance the printing load among multiple printers.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Question
IBM i
• How would you use printer load balancing at your

organization?
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Set an expiration date for spool file

IBM i
• An expiration date can be set:
n
– At create time
– Using the Change Spooled File Attributes (CHGSPLFA) command
ó
• File expires at midnight on the specified date.
.N ci
• Must run the Delete Expired Spool File (DLTEXPSPLF)
command to actually remove the spool file from the system.
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 18-9. Set an expiration date for spool file AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Change Spooled File Attributes (CHGSPLFA) command allows you to change attributes of a
spooled file while it is on an output queue. These changes affect only the current processing of the
pr clu
file. The next time the job runs and the file is produced. The file attributes are derived from the
device file description and the program.
The Delete Expired Spooled Files (DLTEXPSPLF) command removes expired spooled files on the
system or the ASP group specified by the user. A spooled file expires at 23:59:59 system local time
on the date specified in the Expiration Date for File (EXPDATE) spooled file attribute. To automate the
Ex
removal of expired spooled files, you can create a job schedule entry that runs the DLTEXPSPLF
command once a day.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Detach spooled files from jobs: QSPLFACN

IBM i
• Spooled files can:

– Optionally be detached from a job and
n
– Managed independently of the job that created them.
ó
.N ci
X
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 18-10. Detach spooled files from jobs: QSPLFACN AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Prior to V5R2, spooled files were attached to a job until they were deleted either as a result of being
sent to the printer or explicitly by the user. Since V5R2, spooled files can be detached by doing the
pr clu
following:
• Set the system value QSPLFACN to *DETACH.
• Set the job description SPLFACN attribute:
- To *DETACH to detach the spooled file
Ex
- To *SYSVAL to use the value in QSPLFACN system value

When *DETACH is used, spooled files are detached from the job when the job ends, allowing the job
to leave the system and freeing up the job structures to be used by another job.
The shipped/default value for these parameters is *KEEP. This keeps any jobs structures with at
least one spooled file remaining when the job ends and the status of the job is updated to indicate
that the job completed (for spooled files in SYSBASE).
Student Notebook
Work management overview

IBM i
SBMJOB
n
ó
queue pool queue
.N ci
Batch
Sign-on Printer
Interactive
.R a
C rm WRKJOBQ WRKACTJOB WRKOUTQ
WRKSPLF
WRKWTR
to fo
WRKUSRJOB
WRKSBMJOB
ec ivo
Figure 18-11. Work management overview AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
A working knowledge of work management is necessary to control jobs on the system.

The flow for an interactive job follows:
pr clu
1. An interactive job does not place jobs in a job queue. This step is null in this environment.
2. An interactive job is started when a user signs on to the system.
3. The interactive job is assigned to a subsystem designated to run interactive jobs.
Ex
- The QINTER subsystem is the default system for interactive jobs.

- An administrator can create additional subsystems where interactive jobs are run.
- The system administrator defines how the memory is allocated: into shared memory pools
or private memory pools.
5. Most jobs generate output, a printed report.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty - Output is placed in an output queue.

- Several output queues are provided by the system, for example, QPRINT.
- Output queues can be created by a programmer or by an administrator.
- Work management will:
• Go through the process outlined in this unit for the visual titled Why did the output end
n
up there.
• This process is used to determine which output queue is used.
• This determines the characteristics for the print job, such as:
ó
- Form type
- Number of copies
.N ci
- Expiration date
- Print priority
• Your job description defines what priority is assigned to your batch jobs.
.R a
- Jobs are processed in a first-in first-out (FIFO) order based on priority.
C rm
6. A writer program is started to assign an output queue to a printer. At this point the report prints
and the job ends.
The flow for a batch job follows:
A batch job includes one additional step in the beginning. Once the job flows out of the subsystem
to fo
the steps are the same for both types of jobs.
1. A user either chooses a menu option that issues the command to submit a job, or the user
manually issues the submit job command on the command line.
ec ivo
2. A batch job is placed in a job queue and awaits its turn to be processed.
- Job queues are created by programmers or by administrators.
- The job description in your user profile is used by work management to determine to which
job queue your job is sent.
oy s
- Your job description defines what priority is assigned to your batch jobs.
- Jobs are processed in an FIFO order based on priority.
pr clu
3. The batch job is assigned to a subsystem designated to run batch jobs.

- The QBATCH subsystem is the default system for batch jobs.
- An administrator can create additional subsystems where batch jobs are run.
Ex

-This determines how much memory gets assigned to run these types of jobs.
- The system administrator defines how the memory is allocated: into shared memory pools
or private memory pools.
5. Most jobs generate output, a printed report. The steps are the same as above.
6. A writer program is started to assign an output queue to a printer. At this point, the report prints
and the job ends. Steps are the same as above.
Student Notebook
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. Which of the following are created on the system when a printer is

connected (select all that apply)?
n
a. Device description
b. Message queue
ó
c. Output queue
d. Printer profile
.N ci
2. What is the first place that the system looks to determine where to
.R a
send your output file?
C rm
a. Printer device file
b. Job description
c. User profile
d. System value
to fo
3. True or false: The system administrator can create an output queue on
the system with the Create Output Queue (CRTOUTQ) command.
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
• Explain the decision process the system uses to determine
where to send your printed output
.R a
C rm
to fo • Explain what a print writer is and the function it performs
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 19. Print control with 5250 emulation

reports that these jobs generate are the most important aspects of a system
n
operator's job. In this unit, we cover how to perform these functions using a
5250 emulation session.
ó
.N ci
.R a
• Use a 5250 emulation interface to monitor and control
- Printer output
C rm
- Output queues
- Printers
- Print writers
to fo
• Discuss the attributes that can be changed for a spool file
• Explain how to set expiration dates for spool files
ec ivo

Accountability:
oy s
• Exercise
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 19. Print control with 5250 emulation 19-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

n
– Printer output
ó
– Output queues
.N ci
– Printers
– Print writers
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Printer menu
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 19-2. Printer menu AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Use the GO PRINTER command to display the menu in the visual.

You can use this menu to monitor and control your spool files, your output queues, and any printers
pr clu
on your system.
Ex
Student Notebook
Work with All Spooled Files (WRKSPLF)

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 19-3. Work with All Spooled Files (WRKSPLF) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Select option 1 from the menu on the previous page to display the screen on the upper left in the
visual. The Work with Spooled Files (WRKSPLF) command is a powerful and flexible command that
pr clu
allows you to work with spooled files. By specifying selection criteria on the prompt display, you
control which spooled files are displayed.
In this example, only the spooled files produced by jobs that were run by the current user, AS2401,
were selected. Note that spooled files associated with multiple output queues are shown. The
status of each, the number of pages per copy, and the number of copies to be printed are displayed.
Ex
Note that a spooled file that is currently being processed by a printer writer remains on the output
queue and can be held from this display. This is unlike job queues, where a job is removed from the
job queue as soon as it becomes active and can no longer be worked with from the WRKJOBQ
display.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Work with User Jobs: Spooled Files

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 19-4. Work with User Jobs: Spooled Files AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
If you know the user and job that produced the spooled files that need to be controlled, consider
specifying option 8, Work with spooled files, on the Work with User Jobs display. The Work with Job
pr clu
Spooled Files display appears, showing a list of all spooled files produced by a user’s job.
From this list display, you can easily change the attributes of one or more spooled files of a job. You
can also hold, end (delete), display, or 1 or more of these files by using the same options for each
as on the Work with Spool File command just discussed.
Ex
Student Notebook
Change Spooled File Attributes

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 19-5. Change Spooled File Attributes AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Selecting option 2, Change, from the screens displayed on either of the two previous pages in this
guide calls the Change Spool File Attributes (CHGSPLFA) command, which is the command
pr clu
displayed on this page.

Notice all of the attributes that can be changed for your spooled file: printer, forms type, number of
copies, output queue, expiration date, and so forth.
An expiration date is a value that can be specified at creation time by the application that generates
Ex
the output or by processing this command for a specific spool file.

The parameter Expiration date for file (EXPDATE) specifies the expiration date for the spooled file.
The spooled file expires at 23:59:59 system local time on the date specified.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Delete Expired Spooled files

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 19-6. Delete Expired Spooled files AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Delete Expired Spooled Files (DLTEXPSPLF) command removes expired spooled files on the
system or the ASP group specified by the user.
pr clu
To automate the removal of expired spooled files, you can create a job schedule entry that runs the
DLTEXPSPLF command once a day. See the examples below for an example using the Add Job
Schedule Entry (ADDJOBSCDE) command.
Restriction: You need spool control (*SPLCTL) special authority to use this command.
Ex
Note
Setting the expiration of spooled files by way of the printer file and spooled file attributes does not
cause the system to remove expired spooled files. Files are not be removed until the DLTEXPSPLF
command is used to remove expired spooled files.
Student Notebook
The Operational Assistant provides automatic cleanup of spooled files (job logs) only in output
queues QEZJOBLOG and QEZDEBUG. The DLTEXPSPLF command deletes spooled files (if expired) in
any output queue on system or in ASPs.
Examples for DLTEXPSPLF
Example 1: Deleting all expired spooled files.
DLTEXPSPLF ASPGRP(*ALL)
n
This command deletes all expired spooled files on the system.
ó
Example 2: Deleting all expired spooled files in the system ASP (ASP 1) and all defined basic user
ASPs (ASPs 2-32).
.N ci
DLTEXPSPLF ASPGRP(*SYSBAS)
This command deletes all expired spooled files in the system ASP (ASP 1) and all defined basic
.R a
user ASPs (ASPs 2-32).
Example 3: Creating a job schedule entry to remove expired spooled files.
C rm
ADDJOBSCDE JOB(DLTEXPSPLF) CMD(DLTEXPSPLF ASPGRP(*ALL))
FRQ(*WEEKLY) SCDDATE(*NONE) SCDDAY(*ALL) SCDTIME(010000)
JOBQ(QSYS/QSYSNOMAX) TEXT('DELETE EXPIRED SPOOLED FILES
SCHEDULE ENTRY')
to fo
This command creates a job schedule entry that causes the DLTEXPSPLF command to run daily at
the time specified in the SCDTIME parameter in the job queue specified in the JOBQ parameter.
Using the FRQ(*WEEKLY) and SCDDAY(*ALL) parameters schedule the job to run every day of
the week.
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Work with Output Queue

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 19-7. Work with Output Queue AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
From the Printer menu, use option 5, Work with output queues, or enter the WRKOUTQ command
directly to see the screen captured in the upper left on the visual. Use this method to work with
pr clu
spooled files if you know that all the spool files you want to work with are in the same output queue.
The type of information displayed and the options available should look quite familiar by now.
Whereas we viewed spooled files for only one user and only one job in prior examples, here we see
all spooled files on a specific output queue, regardless of which user or job produced the output.
Ex
In addition to the options available through the two prior methods, option 7 on this display shows
messages relating to the printing status of a spooled file.
Student Notebook
Work with All Printers

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 19-8. Work with Writers AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
From the Printer menu, select option 2, Work with printer, or enter the Work with Writers
(WRKWTR) command to determine whether a writer was started for a particular printer.
pr clu
The status of each writer is shown. The status can be END (ended), STR (started), HLD (held), MSG
(message waiting), or JOBQ (job queue).
Most of the options available on this display allow you to perform familiar functions but with a printer
writer instead of a user job or queue.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Restarting a printer
IBM i
F21 = Shitf+F9
n
Basic
assistance
ó
level
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
Opt 11 + Enter
ec ivo
Figure 19-9. Restarting a printer AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The basic assistance level version of the Work with Printers list display looks quite similar to the
intermediate assistance level display. But the options, status, and function keys are slightly
pr clu
different. Notice that you cannot change, hold, release, or work with a writer at the basic assistance
level.
One feature that you can perform more easily from the basic assistance level display is the restart
function, option 11.
Ex
If you need to stop printing a report and restart on another page or if you had a printer device error
(such as a paper jam) and need to reprint a portion of a report, option 11 from the basic assistance
level display simplifies the task for you. This option combines the functions of hold and release,
which are available when you are using the intermediate assistance level.
Student Notebook
Start Printer Writer command

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 19-10. Start Printer Writer command AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Start Printer Writer (STRPRTWTR) command starts a spooling writer to the specified printer.
The writer is a system job that takes spooled files from an output queue and produces (writes) the
pr clu
output on the printer device. This command specifies the name of the printer, the names of the
output and message queues used, and the name of the writer.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Exercise
IBM i
Refer to Exercise Guide Appendix A:

ó n
Exercise: Print control with 5250 emulation
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
Inform instructor when you complete
your exercise.
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
Refer to the Student Exercises guide and perform the job and print control exercise.
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
The flow of a job

IBM i
SBMJOB
n
ó
queue pool queue
.N ci
Batch
Sign-on Printer
Interactive
.R a
C rm WRKJOBQ WRKACTJOB WRKOUTQ WRKWTR
to fo
WRKSPLF
WRKUSRJOB
WRKSBMJOB
ec ivo
Figure 19-12. The flow of a job AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
There are many different types of jobs, and most move through many stages. A working knowledge
of work management is absolutely necessary to effectively control the jobs on your system.
pr clu
The commands listed at the bottom of this visual are positioned relative to the stage of a job, where
each command is used.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Exercise
IBM i

n
Exercise: Print control with 5250 emulation
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm Inform instructor when you
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. Which command is used to work with your spool files?

a. WRKPRTF
n
b. WRKSPLF
c. WRKJOBF
ó
d. WRKPRT
.N ci
2. Which option is used to delete an individual report (a spooled
file) on the Work with Output Queues screen?
.R a
a. Option 2: Change
C rm
b. Option 4: Delete
c. Option 5: Display
d. Option 8: Attributes
to fo
3. True or false: Changing the spool file attributes is all that you
have to do for an expired file to be deleted on the system.
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

n
– Printer output
ó
– Output queues
.N ci
– Printers
– Print writers
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 20. IBM i Access Client Solutions Printer
Output
n
Printer Output provides an interface that allows you to view files in the IBM i
output queues and also provides the capability to download these files to
ó
your client system.
.N ci
.R a
• Filter spool files to view or download based on:
C rm
- Current user
- Selected user
- All users
to fo
- Output queue

ec ivo
Accountability:
• Exercise
oy s
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 20. IBM i Access Client Solutions Printer Output 20-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

n
– Current user
ó
– Selected user
.N ci
– All users
– Output queue
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Printer Output
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 20-2. Printer Output AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
On the left pane IBM i Access Client Solutions click Printer Output.
Printer Output provides an interface that allows you to view files in the IBM i output queues and
pr clu
also provides the capability to download these files to your client system. By default, the current
user's output files are displayed for all output queues.
Ex
Student Notebook
Actions
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 20-3. Actions AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
You can select file or files by click it and then right-click to see possibilities operations or use
Actions menu:
pr clu
• Download Only: Download the selected files.

• Download and View: Download the selected files and then open them. The program used to
open the files is platform dependent based on the file extension.
• View Only: Download the selected files to a temporary location and then open them. The
Ex
program used to open the files is platform dependent based on the file extension.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Actions: Download, View

IBM i
View
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm Download
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 20-4. Actions: Download, View AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Depending which action you chose, you can see your spool file in PDF format or download it. You
can choose both download and open in one operation.
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Preferences
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 20-5. Preferences AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
On the Printer Output window click Edit menu and then Preferences.
Use the Download Location option to set the location where the printer output files are downloaded.
pr clu
Download to desktop: Printer output is downloaded to the user's desktop and placed in a folder
named after the target system.
Download to a temporary location: Printer output is downloaded into a temporary subdirectory
for the user.
Ex
Download to the product's configuration root: A subdirectory named Splf is created below the
product's configuration root, and printer output is downloaded there. The text area displays the path
name of this directory.
Specify a location: Printer output is downloaded to the specified location.
Regardless of the Download Location setting, printer output is stored in a subdirectory unique to the
target system.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty The Use PDF format if available option is used to determine whether printer output with a *SCS or
*AFPDS device type should be converted to PDF format. If this option is enabled and the host
supports PDF transformations, then the client file is stored in PDF format with the.pdf file extension.
Otherwise, it is stored in plain text and stored with a .txt file extension. The host supports PDF
transformations if the Transform Services product (option 1) is installed and functional.
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Printer Output View menu

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 20-6. Printer Output View menu AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
On the Printer Output click View menu you can see following items:
Active Tasks Pane
pr clu
From the View menu, you can enable or disable the Active Tasks Pane. This pane displays the
progress for printer output currently being downloaded. When the task is complete, the task is
removed from this pane.
Download Pane:
Ex
From the View menu, you can enable or disable Download Pane. This displays an area labeled
Downloaded Files that shows downloaded printer output. From this pane, you can drag / drop
files to your local file system.
On the download pane you can select downloaded files and use Open or Delete button to
manage files.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty Download Directory:

From the View menu, choose Download Directory. This launches your platform's file browser
to the location of the downloaded files. For instance, on Windows operating systems, Windows
Explorer is launched.
Set Filter:
You can customize the printer output based on user and output queue.
n
Options for filtering by User are:
ó
- Current user (*CURRENT): Printer output is displayed for the current user.
- All users (*ALL): Printer output is displayed for all users.
.N ci
- Select user: Printer output is displayed for the selected user.
Options for filtering by output queue are:
.R a
- All output queues (*ALL): Printer output from all output queues are shown.
C rm
- Select a specific output queue: Printer output is displayed for a specific output queue. The
output queue must be specified in LIBRARY/FILE format.
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Exercise
IBM i

n
Exercise: Print output using IBM i Access Client Solutions
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or false: IBM i Access Client Solutions provides an option that

allows you to see the output that is generated by another user.
ó n
2. Under which of the following is the Printer Output branch found?
a. General
.N ci
b. Database
c. Users and Groups
.R a
d. Management
C rm
3. Which of the following actions can be performed for a spool file from
the Printer output?
a. Download
b. View
to fo
c. Download and View
d. All above
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Unit summary
IBM i

n
– Current user
ó
– Selected user
.N ci
– All users
– Output queue
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 21. Print control with IBM Navigator for i

reports that these jobs generate are the most important aspects of a system
n
operator's job. In this unit we cover how to perform these functions using IBM
Navigator for i.
ó
.N ci
.R a
• Use IBM Navigator for i to monitor and control:
- Printer output
C rm
- Output queues
- Printers
- Print writers
to fo
ec ivo

Accountability:
oy s
• Exercise
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 21. Print control with IBM Navigator for i 21-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

n
– Printer output
ó
– Output queues
.N ci
– Printers
– Print writers
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Basic Operations: Printer Output

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 21-2. Basic Operations: Printer Output AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
IBM Navigator for i allows you to find and manage printer output. Perform the following steps to
display all spooled files associated with the current user.
pr clu
1. Expand your system.

2. On the left pane click the Basic Operations task.
3. Click the Printer Output link.
Ex
This shows all of your output. This is the equivalent of running the Work with Spool (WRKSPLF)
command on a 5250 emulation session.
Student Notebook
Printer Output: Include

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 21-3. Printer Output: Include AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
You can customize the Printer Output tab to display printer output files according to user, location,
form type, status, and the date and time they were created. If you have many printer output files on
pr clu
your system, this can help you more quickly locate the files you need to see.
To customize what is included in the Printer Output tab, follow these steps:
1. Once you are on the Printer Output tab, click the down arrow for Actions.
2. On the pull-down menu, select Include.
Ex
3. This displays the Include tab. Review the options available to specify your preferred settings.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Printer Output: Columns

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 21-4. Printer Output: Columns AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
You can also determine which columns are displayed and the sequence they appear in by:
1. Once you are on the Printer Output tab, click the down arrow for Actions.
pr clu
2. On the pull-down menu, select Columns.

3. This displays the Columns tab. Review the columns available to display and specify your
preferred settings.
Ex
Student Notebook
Printer Output: Individual report

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 21-5. Printer Output: Individual report AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Right-click a spooled file to see the context menu displayed.

Notice the different actions that you can perform on the selected spooled file.
pr clu
Use the Export as > PDF using Infoprint Server options to convert printer output files to PDF and
send them as email, save them as stream files in the IFS, or save them as printer output files.
The following LPP is required to use this output method:
Ex
• Infoprint Server for Power i (5722-IP1)
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Printer Output: Open

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 21-6. Printer Output: Open AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
If you right-click and Open a spooled file, its contents are displayed.
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Printer Output: View as PDF

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 21-7. Printer Output: View as PDF AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
If you right-click and choose View as PDF, a spooled file is download to the workstation as a PDF
file and you can open it with PDF reader.
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Options for a spool file

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 21-8. Options for a spool file AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
By right-clicking a spooled file, a context menu appears from which you can click Advanced and go
to Manage Output Queue or Printer (if active).
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Spool file Properties

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
Selected spool
file Properties
ec ivo
Figure 21-9. Spool file Properties AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Select (check) a spooled file or right-click and from the Actions content menu choose Properties.
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Properties: General and Printer / Queue

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 21-10. Properties: General and Printer / Queue AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Use the General tab of the Properties window for the spooled file to view the basic properties of the
printer output, which include information that identifies the printer output.
pr clu
Under the General tab of the Properties window, you can only change the user-specified data that
describes the printer output.
Use the Printer/Queue tab to view information about the printer device and the output queue
associated with the printer output.
Ex
You can click Move to move the printer output to a different printer device or output queue.
You can click Manage Output Queue to work with the current output queue for the printer output.
Student Notebook
Properties: Copies/Pages and Forms

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 21-11. Properties: Copies/Pages and Forms AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Use the Copies/Pages tab to display or to change the copy and page properties for the printer
output.
pr clu
Use the Forms tab to display or change the properties that control the type of forms and how the
printer output should print.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Properties: Layout and Staples

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 21-12. Properties: Layout and Staples AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Use the Layout tab to display or to change the properties that control the layout of the printer
output.
pr clu
For example, you can specify whether to print on both sides of the paper or whether to rotate the
text on the paper.
Use the Staples tab to display or to change the properties that control stapling of the printer output.
Ex
Student Notebook
Properties: Overlay and Font

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 21-13. Properties: Overlay and Font AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Use the Overlay tab to display or to change the properties that control the overlay information for
the printer output.
pr clu
An overlay is a collection of predefined data such as lines, shading, text, boxes, or logos that can be
merged with variable data on a page while printing.
Use the Font tab to display the font information used for the printer output.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Properties: Origin/Expiration and User-defined

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 21-14. Properties: Origin/Expiration and User-defined AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Use the Origin/Expiration tab to display information about how and when the printer output
originated.
pr clu
The Expiration parameter displays information about the expiration date for the printer output file.
The expiration date is the date that the printer output file is eligible to be removed from the system.
Expired printer output files can be removed by running the Delete Expired Spooled Files
(DLTEXPSPLF) command interactively from a command line or from IBM Navigator for i or by
Ex
running a CL program that contains that command.

Here you can set expiration for the spooled file by specifying date or by setting how many days to
expiration.
Use the User-defined tab to display information about user-defined objects, user-defined data, and
user-defined options related to the printer output.
Student Notebook
Printer Output: Export as ASCII text

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 21-15. Printer Output: Export as ASCII text AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
IBM Navigator for i allows you to export printer output as ASCII text files to your desktop. Perform
the following steps to export printer output as ASCII text.
pr clu
1. Expand your system.

2. On the left pane click the Basic Operations task.
3. Click the Printer Output link.
Ex
4. Right-click the printer output file.

5. Select Export as and then ASCII Text.
If you confirm export, you can download ASCII text file to selected place in your PC.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Active Jobs: Printer Output

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 21-16. Active Jobs: Printer Output AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
A user can also display the output for a specific job by doing the following:
• From the left pane click the Work Management task, and then click the Active Jobs link.
pr clu
• Page down to find your job, right-click it, and select Printer Output on the drop-down menu.
Ex
Student Notebook
Work Management: Output Queues

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 21-17. Work Management: Output Queues AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
You can display all of the output queues on the system by:
• On the left pane clicking Work Management, and then click the Output Queues link.
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Add a Printer wizard

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 21-18. Add a Printer wizard AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
IBM Navigator for i allows you to create printer device. On the left pane click the Basic Operations
then click the link Add a Printer. You see the first window of the Add a Printer wizard.
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Printers: Columns
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 21-19. Printers: Columns AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
IBM Navigator for i allows you to find and manage printers.

To see a list of printers:
pr clu
• On the left pane click the Basic Operations task, and then click the Printers link.
You can determine which columns are displayed and the sequence they appear in by clicking:
• The down arrow for Actions menu.
Ex
• Columns (as shown in this visual).

• Customize the columns, and specify the order for them to be displayed.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Printers: Printer Output

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 21-20. Printers: Printer Output AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
On the left pane click Printers then right-click your printer, and click Printer Output.
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
System Values: Detach printer output

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 21-21. System Values: Detach printer output AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
On the left pane click the System Values task, right-click Jobs and then click Properties and go to
the Printer Output tab in order to see how the system handles printed output after the job that
pr clu
produces it ends. The Detach printer output after jobs have ended check box specifies whether
printer output is kept with a job or detached from the job.
Keeping printer output with jobs allows you to display printer output when you select Printer
Output on jobs that ended. The ended jobs still count toward the limit of jobs defined by the
maximum jobs system value. The job status becomes Completed (OUTQ) when the job ends.
Ex
Detaching printer output from a job means that the job is removed from the system when the job
ends. This reduces the use of system resources by allowing job structures to be recycled when the
job ends.
Because the job is removed from the system, the job interfaces can no longer be used to work with
the printer output for the job; however, this option does not delete the printer output. To view the
printer output for a job that is removed from the system, open Navigator for i and select Basic
Operations; then, select Printer Output.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Exercise
IBM i

ó n
Exercise: Print control with IBM Navigator for i
.N ci
.R a
C rm Inform instructor when you have
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
Refer to the Student Exercises guide and perform the print control exercise.
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i
1. True or false: You can export printer output as a PDF in IBM

Navigator for i.
ó n
2. Which Properties option would display which system the
printer output came from?
.N ci
a. Origin / Expiration
b. Layout
.R a
c. Other 1
d. Other 2
C rm
3. True or false: You can view the output for a specific job by
clicking Work Management and then clicking Active Jobs.
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i
4. True or false: You can email spool files or keep them as

records.
ó n
5. When using printer load balancing, what is the maximum
number of writers that can be attached to an output queue?
.N ci
a. 5
b. 8
.R a
c. 10
d. 15
C rm 6. True or false: You can delete an expired spool file.

to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Unit summary
IBM i

n
– Printer output
ó
– Output queues
.N ci
– Printers
– Print writers
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 22. Starting and stopping the system

This unit describes how to start (initial program load) and stop (power down)
the Power Systems with IBM i.
ó n
.N ci
• Start the Power Systems with IBM i:
.R a
- Perform unattended IPL
- Perform attended IPL (change IPL options)
C rm
- Enable automatic IPLs
- Identify and work with system values that affect IPL
• Stop the Power Systems with IBM i:
to fo
- Use the Power Down System command
- Use the Power On and Off Tasks menu
- Use the Power push button
ec ivo

Accountability:
oy s
• Exercise
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 22. Starting and stopping the system 22-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

n
– Perform unattended IPL
ó
– Perform attended IPL (change IPL options)
.N ci
– Enable automatic IPLs
– Identify and work with system values that affect IPL
.R a
– Use the Power Down System command
C rm
– Use the Power On and Off Tasks menu
– Use the Power push button
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
ó n
.N ci
Topic 1: Starting the system
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 22-2. Topic 1: Starting the system AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
IPL overview
IBM i
• There are several reasons to power on the Power i system:
n
– Starting normal operation
ó
– Starting a remote system
– Changing configuration options IPL
.N ci
– Recovering after a power failure
.R a
• Several ways exist to power on (IPL)
C rm
the Power i system:
– Normal (unattended)
to fo
– Manual (attended)
ec ivo
Figure 22-3. IPL overview AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Starting a Power is referred to as initial program load (IPL). During an initial program load (IPL),
system programs are loaded from the system auxiliary storage, and the system hardware is
pr clu
checked. In addition, the system recognizes changes to certain system characteristics.

Use the operating mode to determine the number of options presented to the operator during and
after the IPL.
There are four operating modes:
Ex
Normal (unattended)
After the power on, the Power in normal (unattended) mode requires no operator intervention
during the IPL.
When you turn on the Power in normal mode, it performs the IPL and presents the Sign On
display on all available display stations. The operator cannot change the system during the IPL.
Dedicated service tools (DST) and the operating system do not present any display during this
IPL.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty Manual (attended)

After power on, operating the Power Systems with IBM i on manual (attended) mode means
that an operator uses the control panel to direct the system for special needs.
During manual mode, IPL, DST, and the operating system present menus and prompts that
allow you to make changes to the internal system environment. This can include entering debug
mode for service representatives to diagnose difficult problems.
n
In older server model you can meet also following keylock positions:
Auto (automatic)
ó
Use auto mode for an automatic remote IPL, automatic IPL by date and time, and an automatic
.N ci
IPL after a power failure.
Secure
.R a
Use secure mode to prevent use of the control panel to perform an IPL. This mode is a form of
IPL, but it provides a means to prevent an unauthorized or inadvertent IPL from the control
panel.
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
IPL speed
IBM i
The following factors influence the IPL speed:

• The number of attached disk drives and other peripheral devices
n
• The amount of main storage (memory)
ó
• How much cleanup is needed since the last IPL
.N ci
• The parameters that are specified on the PWRDWNSYS command
• Settings for IPL attributes:
.R a
– Possible values are:
C rm
• Fast: Used for routine operations
• Slow: Used for full diagnostics
– The CHGIPLA command sets these attributes
to fo
– The control panel can temporarily override these settings
ec ivo
Figure 22-4. IPL speed AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
You can specify the type of IPL you need to perform from the system control panel. The Increment
/ Decrement buttons are used to change the IPL type and mode on systems without a mode
pr clu
button. Use Function 02 to select the IPL type (A, B, or D) and mode (Normal or Manual).
Additionally you can specify from which Power firmware copy you want to start:
PIPL from disk using copy P (permanent) of the system Licensed Internal Code.TIPL from disk
using copy T (temporary) of the system Licensed Internal Code.
Ex
To select IPL type and mode from the control panel, perform the following actions:
1. Use the Increment / Decrement buttons to select Function 02, and press Enter.
2. Use the Increment / Decrement buttons to select the IPL type and mode you want, and then
press Enter to save.
3. You can also specify a fast or slow IPL that can only be set one time at the console panel when
the system is turned off. Select Function 02, and press Enter twice. Use the Increment /
Decrement buttons to select F (fast), S (slow), or V (value from IPL attributes).
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty The power-on speed override fields are available for POWER5, POWER6, and POWER7 (firmware
level AL710 only) servers only.
The IPL speed setting is stored in a system value. Use the Change IPL Attributes (CHGIPLA)
command to set the system-defined speed.
Use F (fast) to set the IPL speed for routine work. This setting causes the system to run only a
minimum of self-diagnostic tests.
n
Use S (slow) to set the IPL speed for special needs. When you select the slow speed, the system
runs a full set of self-diagnostic tests. Use it when you:
ó
• Change hardware
.N ci
• Suspect intermittent hardware failures
• First install your system
.R a
You can use the control panel to set IPL speed; however, if you change (override) the IPL speed
from the control panel, it affects only the next IPL. Subsequent IPLs use the system-defined speed.
C rm
The Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) command can also affect IPL speed.
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Change IPL Attributes

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 22-5. Change IPL Attributes AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Change IPL Attributes (CHGIPLA) command allows you to change the settings of attributes used
during the IPL.
pr clu
Restrictions: To run this command, the user must have security administrator (*SECADM) and all
object (*ALLOBJ) special authorities.
Restart Type (RESTART): Specifies the point from which the IPL restarts when RESTART(*YES) or
RESTART((*YES *IPLA)) is specified on the Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) command.
Ex
Specifying *SYS rather than *FULL can reduce the time required to restart the system. The initial
(shipped) value for this parameter is *SYS.
Keylock Position (KEYLCKPOS): Specifies the keylock position. A change to this attribute takes
effect immediately.
Hardware Diagnostics (HDWDIAG): Specifies whether certain hardware diagnostics should be
performed during the IPL. The list of diagnostics is predetermined by the system and cannot be
modified by the user.
Compress Job Tables (CPRJOBTBL): Specifies when the job tables should be compressed to
remove excess unused entries.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty Check Job Tables (CHKJOBTBL): Specifies when particular damage checks on the job tables
should be performed.
Rebuild Product Directory (RBDPRDDIR): Specifies when the product directory information
should be fully rebuilt.
Mail Server Framework Recovery (MSFRCY): Specifies whether mail server framework (MSF)
recovery is done during abnormal IPLs.
n
Display Status (DSPSTS): Specifies whether the status of IBM i IPL steps is displayed at the
console during IPL.
ó
Start TCP/IP (STRTCP): Specifies whether the Start TCP/IP (STRTCP) command is automatically
submitted at the completion of IPL and when the controlling subsystem is restarted to bring the
.N ci
system out of the restricted state. The STRTCP command is not submitted during installation IPLs or
when the Power is starting to the restricted state.
.R a
Spooled File Recovery (SPLFRCY): Specifies what should be done with all spooled files during
IPL when a job table is detected as damaged or if *YES is set for the following three IPL attributes:
C rm
Clear Job Queues (CLRJOBQ), Clear Output Queues (CLROUTQ), and Clear Incomplete Job Logs
(CLRINCJOB).
Clear Job Queues (CLRJOBQ): Specifies whether to clear the jobs from all job queues.
Clear Output Queues (CLROUTQ): Specifies whether to clear all output queues, thus removing all
to fo
spooled output from the system.
Clear Incomplete Job Logs (CLRINCJOB): Specifies whether to delete the job logs for jobs that
were active at the time of the last system power down.
Start Print Writers (STRPRTWTR): Specifies whether to print writers should be started at IPL time.
ec ivo
Start to Restricted State (STRRSTD): Specifies whether the system should be started to the
restricted state, which means that only the system console is active.
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
What can you do with the control panel?

IBM i
• Specify which type of IPL to perform:

– Normal
n
– Manual
ó
– Auto
– Secure
.N ci
• Choose the IPL source:
– Disk (B or A)
.R a
– Alternate device: Tape/CD/virtual resources, Network (D)
C rm
– Service (C) used by service personnel
• Choose copy of Power server
System firmware
Attention
– P permanent
to fo
– T temporary
• Display function code/data information:
– Selected function (IPL type)
ec ivo
– System Reference Codes (SRC)

Figure 22-6. What can you do with the control panel? AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
From the control panel, an operator or administrator can specify:

• The mode or type of IPL to be performed on the system.
pr clu
• If the system should do a normal IPL; using the disk image or off of a backup tape or a CD.
• You can choose which copy of the power firmware is used to Initiate the power system.
• Use the Increment / Decrement keys (the up and down arrows) to display SRC information.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Control panel function codes (1 of 4)

IBM i
01 Displays the current IPL parameters.

This function is available in both normal and manual operating mode.
n
02 Used to select the IPL type, system operating mode, IPL speed, and firmware IPL mode.
This function is available in both normal and manual operating mode.
ó
03 Restarts an IPL of the system using the selected IPL parameters. This function is available
only in manual operating mode and when the system power is on.
.N ci
04 Performs a lamp test; all displays and indicators are lit. This function is available in both
normal and manual operating mode.
.R a
05-06 Reserved. In older models Power5-Power6 Displays an SRC on the control panel that
corresponds to the system power control network (SPCN).
C rm
07 Allows you to perform SPCN service functions. This function is available only in the manual
operating mode and from power-on standby.
08 Causes a fast power off. This function is available only when the system is in manual
operating mode and the system power is on.
to fo
09 Reserved.
11 Displays a system reference code (SRC) on the control panel using up to 32 ASCII
characters, including non-hexadecimal characters. This function is available in both normal
and manual operating mode when an SRC is available.
ec ivo
Figure 22-7. Control panel function codes (1 of 4) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Some control panel functions might not be available on all system types.
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook

IBM i
12 Displays an SRC on the control panel using up to four extended SRC data words. This function is
available in both normal and manual operating mode when an SRC is available.
n
13 Displays an SRC on the control panel using up to eight extended SRC data words. This function is
available in both normal and manual operating mode when an SRC is available.
ó
14-19 Restarts an IPL of the system using the selected IPL parameters. This function is available only in
manual operating mode and when the system power is on.
.N ci
20 Displays the machine type and model, VPD card CCIN, and IPL types. This function is available in
both normal and manual operating mode.
22 Forces a partition dump. For more information on dumps, see Performing dumps. This function is
.R a
available only in the manual operating mode and when activated by the operating system.
C rm
21 Causes the DST display to appear on the system console. To exit the DST, select the Resume
operating system display option.
25-26 Use service switches 1 and 2 to enable or disable functions 50 through 99. These functions are
available only in the manual operating mode.
27-29 Reserved.
to fo
30 Displays the service processor IP address and port location. This function is available only in the
manual operating mode and in standby. Note: If IPv6 is displayed, then the service processor's
network ports are configured with IPv6 IP addresses. There are not enough characters on the control
panel to display the entire address.
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty

IBM i
31-33 Reserved.
n
34 Retries the partition dump. This function is available only in the manual operating mode and
when activated by the firmware.
ó
35-40 Reserved
41 Initiates a non-disruptive platform system dump. This function is available only in the
.N ci
manual operating mode and when activated by the system processor.
42 Performs a platform dump. This function is available only in the manual operating mode and
when activated by the system processor.
.R a
43 Performs a service processor dump. This function is available only in the manual operating
mode.
C rm
44-54 Reserved.
55 Displays or changes the platform system dump collection policy, platform system dump
hardware content, and platform system dump firmware content settings. This function is
available only in the manual operating mode.
to fo
56 Reserved on systems that are running on system firmware level Ax710
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook

IBM i
56 Displays the IPL diagnostic level for the next system boot on system firmware level Ax720,
or later.
n
63 Displays up to the last 25 system status SRCs. This function is available only in the manual
operating mode.
ó
64 Displays up to the last 25 diagnostic status SRCs. This function is available only in the
manual operating mode.
.N ci
65 Deactivates a remote service session. This function is available only in the manual
operating mode.
.R a
66 Activates a remote service session. This function is available only in the manual operating
mode.
C rm
67 Initiates an I/O processor dump and a disk unit I/O reset/reload. This function is available
only in the manual operating mode.
68 Powers off power domains to affect concurrent replacement of IOPs and IOAs. This
function is available only in the manual operating mode.
to fo
69 Powers on power domains to affect concurrent replacement of IOPs and IOAs. This function
is available only in the manual operating mode.
70 Initiates IOP dumps. This function is available only in the manual operating mode.
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Overview of unattended (normal) IPL steps

IBM i
System state Steps
ó n
Running 1. Set mode to Normal.
.N ci
2. ENDSYS or ENDSBS *ALL
3. PWRDWNSYS *IMMED RESTART(*YES)
.R a
C rm
Not 1. Set mode to Normal.
running 2. Turn on power for all devices.
3. Press Power (see note) push button to power on (only

to fo
when system not working under HMC console).
Note: Always set mode to Normal after IPL is finished.

ec ivo
Figure 22-11. Overview of unattended (normal) IPL steps AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
For system controlled by HMC console the power on or power down is initiated from HMC interface
(GUI or command line).
pr clu
The system value QIPLTYPE must be set to zero (unattended IPL).

The IPL that you perform most often is an unattended IPL.
An unattended IPL is easy; it consists of the steps shown in the visual. After the Power Systems
with IBM i performs the IPL, the sign-on display appears on all display stations you turned on. If you
Ex
did not turn on a device, it is active once you do turn it on.
Student Notebook
Power On and Off Tasks menu

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 22-12. Power On and Off Tasks menu AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Use the GO POWER command to display the menu in the visual.

Enter option 2 from the Power On and Off Tasks menu to display the Change Power On/Off
pr clu
Schedule display.
• You can have power your system on and off according to a schedule you set up on this display.
• You can use F10 on the Change Power On/Off Schedule display to facilitate setting up daily
defaults for on and off times.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Schedule power on/off

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 22-13. Schedule power on/off AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
This display allows you to change the time of starting or stopping the system for any dates in the
future. You can also add or change comments in the Description column.
pr clu
Do not schedule two power ons in a row without an automatic power off between them or the
second power on might not work.
Note
Ex
To make sure the system will power on completely after being powered off, check that the keylock
switch is in the Normal or Auto position.
Power On
This shows the time of day the system is scheduled to power on. You can change the power on
times for specific dates on this display, or you can choose F10 to change a day of the week's
default values. Specify the times using a 24-hour clock. You can also delete a scheduled time
(by typing blanks over it) to not have automatic power on occur on that date.
Student Notebook
Power Off
This shows the time of day the system is scheduled to power off. You can change the power off
times for specific dates on this display, or you can choose F10 to change a day of the week's
default values. Specify the times using a 24-hour clock. You can also delete a scheduled time
(by typing blanks over it) to not have automatic power off occur on that date.
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
When to perform an attended (manual) IPL

IBM i
You must perform an attended IPL when:
n
• Installing the operating system
• Using DST
ó
• Working with existing or setting up partitions
.N ci
• Recovering from a system failure
.R a
• Changing IPL options
• Upgrading to a new version of the IBM i
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 22-14. When to perform an attended (manual) IPL AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
An attended IPL brings up displays on the system console that require a response before the IPL
can continue. An attended IPL is required when you:
pr clu
• Change IPL options (such as date and time, whether the system will automatically configure
itself, and the environment (S/36 or none) in which the system runs)
• Install a new release of the operating system
• Must access DST to define or change your disk configuration (DSTs is used to service the
Ex
system when the operating Power is not running)

• Recover from a system failure
In other cases, you should perform an unattended IPL.
Student Notebook
Attended (manual) IPL steps

IBM i
System state Steps
n
Running 1. Power on devices.
2. Type ENDSYS or ENDSBS *ALL on any command
ó
line, and press Enter.
3. Set mode to Manual.
4. Type PWRDWNSYS *IMMED RESTART(*YES)
.N ci
on any command line, and press Enter.
Note: If you cannot enter commands, do the following:
a. Press the Power(see note) push button to turn off the
.R a
system.
b. Press the Power push button to start an IPL.
5. Follow the displays on the console to complete the IPL.
C rm
6. Set the mode to Normal.
Not 1. Power on devices.

Running
to fo
3. Press the Power(see note) push button to power on.

ec ivo
Figure 22-15. Attended (manual) IPL steps AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
For system controlled by HMC console the power on or power down is initiated from HMC interface
(GUI or command).
pr clu
System state - Running

1. Power on devices.
2. Type ENDSYS or ENDSBS *ALL on any command line, and press Enter.
Ex

4. Type PWRDWNSYS *IMMED RESTART(*YES) on any command line, and press Enter.
Note: If you cannot enter commands, do the following:
a. Press the Power (see note) push button to turn off the system.
b. Press the Power push button to start an IPL.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty System state - Not Running

1. Power on devices.
3. Press the Power (see note) push button to power on.
n
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Attended IPL: IPL or Install the System

IBM i
IPL or Install the System
n
System: i520BL2
ó
1. Perform an IPL
2. Install the operating system
.N ci
3. Use Dedicated Services Tools (DST)
4. Perform automatic installation of the operating system
5. Save Licensed Internal Code
.R a
C rm
Selection
1
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 22-16. Attended IPL: IPL or Install the System AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The first display that appears on the system console during an attended IPL is the IPL or Install the
System menu. It might take quite a while for this display to appear depending on the model and
pr clu
size of your system. When this menu appears, select option 1 (Perform an IPL), and press Enter.
Note
Ex
• If you select option 2 or 4, the system requires that you confirm your selection.
• If you select option 3, additional security clearance is required before you can proceed.
• If you select option 5, the Licensed Internal Code (LIC) is saved to tape. (This save does not
include QSYS.)
When you enter option 1, the IPL Steps in Progress display shows you the various IPL steps. This is
an informational display only; you do not have to do anything.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Attended IPL: Sign On display

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 22-17. Attended IPL: Sign On display AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
After you select option 1 (Perform an IPL) on the IPL or Install the System display, the next display
that you interact with is the Sign On display. You might have to wait a few minutes for this display to
pr clu
appear. Remember, the speed of the IPL process depends on the model and size of your
processor.
Sign on as the system operator. If you have another user ID that you use to perform system
operator functions, make sure that the system operator message queue, QSYSOPR, is allocated to
your job in break mode.
Ex
Note
This visual shows a screen capture of the HMC 5250 Console screen. If you do not use an HMC,
you will see a screen without the watermark ‘HMC 5250 Console’.
Student Notebook
Attended IPL: Select Products to Work with PTFs

display
IBM i
Select Products to Work with PTFs
n
System: i520BL2
I750BL10
ó
Position to . . . . . . . . . . ________Product
Type options, press Enter. Press F21 to select All.
.N ci
1=Select
.R a
Opt Product Option Release
__ 5770999 *BASE V7R1M0
C rm
__ 5770SS1 *BASE V7R1M0
__ 5770CM1 *BASE V7R1M0
__ 5770DG1 *BASE V7R1M0
__ 5770JV1 *BASE V7R1M0
__ 5770WD1 *BASE V7R1M0
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 22-18. Attended IPL: Select Products to Work with PTFs display AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Select Products to Work with PTFs display appears next. Select the product or products (one
or more) to which you want to apply PTFs, and press Enter to continue.
pr clu
If you do not want to apply any PTFs, press F3 to exit from this display and continue with the IPL.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Attended IPL: IPL Options display

IBM i
n
IPL Options
ó
Type choices, press the Enter key.
System date .................................XX / XX / XX MM / DD / YY
.N ci
System time .................................XX : XX : XX HH : MM : SS
Clear job queues.............................N Y=Yes, N=No
Clear output queues..........................N Y=Yes, N=No
.R a
Clear incomplete job logs....................N Y=Yes, N=No
Start print writers..........................Y Y=Yes, N=No
C rm
Start system to restricted state.............N Y=Yes, N=No
Set major system options.....................Y Y=Yes, N=No
Define or change system at IPL...............Y Y=Yes, N=No
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 22-19. Attended IPL: IPL Options display AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The IPL Options display appears next. Make any necessary changes to it, and press Enter.
F1 (help) is available for this display.
pr clu
While the date and time can be changed at IPL, there is a much easier way to do this which we
discuss later in this unit.
If you are working in the System/36 environment, the two blank lines following Start system to
restricted state contain Run #STRTUPn procedure prompts. The default for these two parameters is
Ex
Y (yes).
When you perform an attended IPL, you almost always change one or both of the two bottom
responses to Y because this is why you would normally perform an attended IPL. If you leave both
of the bottom parameters set to N (no) and press Enter, the menu, program, or procedure you
defined on the Sign On display or in your user profile appears.
Student Notebook
Attended IPL: Set Major System Options

IBM i
n
Set Major System Options
Type choices, press Enter.
ó
Enable automatic configuration........Y Y=Yes, N=No
.N ci
Device configuration naming...........*NORMAL *NORMAL, *S36, *DEVADR
.R a
Default special environment............*NONE *NONE, *S36
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 22-20. Attended IPL: Set Major System Options AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
If you enter a Y (yes) in the Set major system options field on the IPL Options display, the next
display that appears is Set Major System Options. On this display, you can select automatic
pr clu
configuration, the type of device configuration naming, and the special environment in which you
want to work.
Enabling automatic configuration instructs IBM i to automatically describe, and make available for
immediate use, new local workstation displays, printers, and tape drives as soon as they are cabled
and powered on. You can either specify Y (automatically configure local devices) or N (no automatic
Ex
configuration).
You can specify one of the following for the device configuration naming parameter:
• *NORMAL uses a naming convention unique to the Power Systems with IBM i, for example, DSP01
and PRT01 for displays and printers and TAP01 and DKT01 for tape and diskette devices.
• *S36 uses a naming convention similar to that for System/36, for example, W1 for workstations,
P1 for printers, and T1 and l1 for tape and diskette devices.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty • *DEVADR uses a naming convention which is obtained from the device resource name, for
example, DSP010203 for a display station, PRT010203 for a printer, and TAP01 and DKT01 for tape
and diskette devices.
All system users are placed in the default special environment when they sign on unless their user
profile specifies otherwise. You can specify one of the following for this parameter:
• *NONE indicates there is no special environment.
n
• *S36 sets up the System/36 environment that was used for migration from System/36
environment.
ó
You can change any of these options without performing an IPL. We discuss how to do this later in
this unit.
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Attended IPL: Define or Change the System at IPL

IBM i
n
Define or Change the System at IPL
System: i520BL2
ó
1. Configuration commands
.N ci
2. Change user profile
3. System value commands
4. Network attribute commands
.R a
5. General object commands
6. Work with shared pools
C rm
Selection
__
F3= Exit and continue IPL
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 22-21. Attended IPL: Define or Change the System at IPL AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
If you respond Y to the Define or change the system at IPL parameter on the IPL Options display,
the Define or Change the System at IPL menu appears.
pr clu
From this display, you can select options that allow you to change the system configuration, system
values, network attributes, user profiles, and objects or files. While you cannot run all commands at
IPL time, many can be run by selecting the option for the category of command you need.
When you finish using the options on this display, press F3 (not Enter) to continue the IPL.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
IPL types
IBM i
There are four IPL types:

• IPL type A:
n
– When IPL type B fails
ó
– Done when procedures direct you to perform this type
.N ci
– When you suspect problems with temporary LIC fixes
• IPL type B:
.R a
– Use for routine work, for normal operations
• IPL type C:
C rm
– Reserved for hardware service representatives
• IPL type D:
to fo
– When directed by an installation or restore procedure
– When IPL type A and B have failed, for system recovery
– When directed by service to perform an alternate IPL
ec ivo
Figure 22-22. IPL types AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
There are four types of IPL. These are listed on this visual in the order in which they are typically
used on your system.
pr clu
IPL type A
Use IPL type A when directed for special work, such as applying PTFs and doing diagnostic
work. For example, use IPL type A in the following circumstances:
- When IPL type B fails
Ex
- When the procedures direct you to use IPL type A

- When you suspect problems with temporary LIC fixes
IPL type A uses an A copy of LIC during and after the IPL. This copy of LIC is the permanent
copy. It resides in System Storage Area A. It contains no temporarily applied fixes.
IPL type B
Use IPL type B for routine work and when directed by a PTF procedure. This type of IPL runs
the newest copy of LIC and is necessary when you permanently apply certain fixes.
Student Notebook
IPL type B uses the B copy of LIC during and after the IPL. This copy resides in System Storage
Area B. This copy contains temporarily applied fixes. (See the section on keeping your software
current with PTFs for more information about fixes.)
IPL type C
Rochester development support reserves this type of IPL for hardware service representatives.
Attention: Do not use this function. Severe data loss can occur with improper use of this
n
function.
IPL type D
ó
Use IPL type D when directed for special work, such as installing and reloading programs.
.N ci
IPL type D loads the system programs from an alternate IPL load source, such as a tape drive,
CD-ROM, virtual resources, or Network.
.R a
Typically, an IPL uses programs stored on the primary IPL load source (typically a disk drive).
Sometimes it is necessary to perform an IPL from another source, such as programs stored on
tape. To do this, you must use IPL type D to load the system from the alternate IPL load source.
C rm
Use IPL type D only during the following situations:
- When installation or restore procedures direct you to use IPL type D
- When IPL type B and IPL type A fail (when the primary IPL load source cannot load the
to fo
system properly) and only when directed by your support personnel
- When service directs you to perform an alternate installation
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
What is a system value?

IBM i
• System values control or change overall system operation.

• A system value can be displayed and changed.
n
• System values are grouped by type for reference:
ó
– All
.N ci
– Allocation
– Date and time
Default library list
.R a
– Editing QSYSLIBL, QUSRLIBL
– Library list
C rm
Attended/unattended IPL
QIPLTYPE
– Message and logging
– Security Automatic configuration
QAUTOCFG
– Storage
to fo
– System Current date
control QDATE
ec ivo
Figure 22-23. What is a system value? AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
A system value is controlled information for the operation of certain parts of the system. There are
more than 130 system values provided as part of IBM i. System values are used to control a wide
pr clu
variety of system wide functions, as indicated by the categories shown on the visual.
While almost anyone who can enter a command can display most system values, very few users
have the authority required to change any of them. (To change system values, you must be signed
on as QPGMR, QSYSOPR, or QSRV or have *ALLOBJ authority.) As a system operator, you might have
this authority.
Ex
Student Notebook
System values and IPL

IBM i
System value Description Default
n
QIPLDATTIM IPL automatically on this day/time *NONE
ó
QIPLSTS Previous IPL (0)
.N ci
(0)
QIPLTYPE Unattended / attended
.R a
Maximum amount of time to allow for system
QPWRDWNLMT
to power down
(0)
C rm
QPWRRSTIPL Automatic IPL after power is restored (0)
QSCPFCONS Action to take when console problem occurs continue

to fo
QSYS/
QSTRUPPGM Name of program that is called when the
QSTRUP
controlling subsystem is started
ec ivo
Figure 22-24. System values and IPL AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
There are many system values that affect IPL. Some cannot be changed by anyone, for example,
QIPLSTS, which indicates which one of the five possible types of IPL was last performed. Most of
pr clu
the other system values can be changed to reflect your operating environment.
Changes to most system values take effect immediately. Others take effect after the next IPL.
Following is an explanation of some of the more important system values that relate to IPL:
QIPLDATTIM
Ex
Stands for date and time to automatically IPL. It specifies the date and time at which the system
should perform an automatic IPL. The default is *NONE, which means that an automatic IPL is
not performed. QIPLSTS stands for IPL status indicator. It displays the way the system
performed the last IPL. The default is zero, which means an IPL was performed from the control
panel of the system unit.
QIPLTYPE
Defines the type of IPL the system performs from the control panel: attended IPL, attended IPL
with DST, or attended IPL in debug mode. The default is zero, which means an unattended IPL
is done.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty QPWRDWNLMT
Defines the maximum time for immediate shutdown. It specifies the maximum amount of time
(in seconds) to wait for the system to power down normally after a user requested an immediate
power-down or when a user requested a controlled power-down and the time specified on the
delay parameter expired.
QPWRRSTIPL
n
Controls whether an automatic IPL is performed when utility power is restored after a power
failure. The default is zero, which means that the system does not automatically perform an IPL
ó
when utility power is restored after a power failure.
QSCPFCONS
.N ci
Specifies the action for your system to take when a console problem occurs during an attended
restart.
.R a
QSTRUPPGM
Specifies the name of the program called from an auto start job when the controlling subsystem
C rm
is started. This program performs setup functions, such as starting subsystems and printers.
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
System startup
IBM i
n
01 B N
Power-on QCTL
ó
QCTLSBSD
(system value)
.N ci
Normal IPL from "B" side
QSYS/QSTRUP
.R a
QSTRUPPGM
(system value)
C rm
CRTCLPGM
QSYS/QSTRUP *PGM
to fo
editor RTVCLSRC
*Library
9*File (QCLSRC)
•Source File Member
ec ivo
Figure 22-25. System startup AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The startup program (QSTRUPPGM) system value specifies the name of the program called from an
autostart job when the controlling subsystem is started. This program performs setup functions,
pr clu
such as starting subsystems and printers. The program must exist in the system ASP or in a basic
user ASP.
A change to this system value takes effect the next time the Power is IPLed. The shipped value is
QSYS/QSTRUP. The contents of this shipped CL program can be retrieved with the Retrieve CL
Source (RTVCLSRC) command.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Startup program
IBM i
• Program QSTRUP:
n
– Can be customized
– Starts subsystems:
ó
• Starts subsystem monitor
.N ci
• Allocates memory
• Allocates job structure space
.R a
– Starts spool writers
C rm
– Starts TCP/IP support:
• STRTCP (Starts TCP/IP support)
• STRTCPSVR (Starts TCP/IP application servers)
to fo
• STRHOSTSVR (Starts host server support)
ec ivo
Figure 22-26. Startup program AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
5770WDS V7R2M0 140418 SEU SOURCE LISTING 12/14/15 06:05:28 CTCIHA4A PAGE 1
SOURCE FILE . . . . . . . EDLIB/QCLSRC
pr clu
MEMBER . . . . . . . . . QSTRUP
SEQNBR*...+... 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8
...+... 9 ...+... 0
100 /********************************************************************/
200 /* */
Ex
300 /* 5770SS1 V7R2M0 140418 RTVCLSRC Output 12/14/15 06:05:01 */

400 /* */
500 /* Program name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : QSTRUP PN*/
600 /* Library name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : QSYS PL*/
700 /* Original source file . . . . . . . . . . : S000027809 SN*/
800 /* Library name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : $BLDSS1 SL*/
900 /* Original source member . . . . . . . . . : S000027809 SM*/
1000 /* Source file change */
1100 /* date/time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : 10/06/13 12:45:18 SC*/
Student Notebook
1200 /* Patch option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : *NOPATCH PO*/

1300 /* User profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : *USER UP*/
1400 /* Text . . . : TX*/
1500 /* Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : QSYS OW*/
1600 /* User mod flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . : *NO UM*/
1700 /* Retrieve included source . . . . . . . . : *NO RI*/
n
1800 /* ED*/
1900 /********************************************************************/
2000 PGM
ó
2100 DCL VAR(&STRWTRS) TYPE(*CHAR) LEN(1)
2200 DCL VAR(&CTLSBSD) TYPE(*CHAR) LEN(20)
.N ci
2300 DCL VAR(&CPYR) TYPE(*CHAR) LEN(90) VALUE('5770-SS1 (C) COPYRIGHT-
2400 IBM CORP 1980, 2013. LICENSED MATERIAL - PROGRAM PROPERTY OF IBM')
.R a
2500 QSYS/STRSBS SBSD(QSERVER)
2600 MONMSG MSGID(CPF0000)
C rm
2700 QSYS/STRSBS SBSD(QUSRWRK)
2900 QSYS/RLSJOBQ JOBQ(QGPL/QS36MRT)
3100 QSYS/RLSJOBQ JOBQ(QGPL/QS36EVOKE)
to fo
3300 QSYS/STRCLNUP
3500 QSYS/RTVSYSVAL SYSVAL(QCTLSBSD) RTNVAR(&CTLSBSD)
ec ivo
3600 IF COND((&CTLSBSD *NE 'QCTL QSYS ') *AND (&CTLSBSD *NE-

3700 'QCTL QGPL ')) THEN(GOTO CMDLBL(DONE))
3800 QSYS/STRSBS SBSD(QINTER)
oy s
4000 QSYS/STRSBS SBSD(QBATCH)

pr clu
4200 QSYS/STRSBS SBSD(QCMN)

4400 DONE:
4500 QSYS/STRSBS SBSD(QSPL)
Ex
4700 QSYS/RTVSYSVAL SYSVAL(QSTRPRTWTR) RTNVAR(&STRWTRS)

4800 IF COND(&STRWTRS = '0') THEN(GOTO CMDLBL(NOWTRS))
4900 CALL PGM(QSYS/QWCSWTRS)
5100 NOWTRS:
5200 RETURN
5300 CHGVAR VAR(&CPYR) VALUE(&CPYR)
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Automatic IPLs
IBM i
IPL after power failure:

• System automatically performs an IPL when utility power is restored
n
after a power failure.
ó
• Set QPWRRSTIPL to one.
.N ci
Remote IPL:
• Remote power-on and IPL
.R a
• Set QRMTIPL to one.
C rm
IPL by date and time:
• System automatically performs an IPL on a specified day and time.
• Set QIPLDATTIM to appropriate date and time.
to fo
Access to control panel
• Operators can remotely access the control panel to power on a system.
ec ivo
Figure 22-27. Automatic IPLs AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Remote IPL using QRMTIPL On partitioned systems, this system value must be changed from the
service processor's Advanced System Management Interface (ASMI)
pr clu
There are three types of automatic IPLs, each of which is controlled by a different system value.
The automatic IPLs and their associated system values are shown on the visual.
Even if an automatic IPL is allowed, an automatic IPL of the Power is not performed unless the
power is off and the mode is set to either Normal or Auto.
Ex
Starting a remote system

To start the remote system automatically with a telephone and a modem, you need to set the
system value QRMTIPL to one.
Before you start:
1. Set the mode on the control panel to Normal or Auto, and turn the system off.
2. After the Power is turned off and is made ready for remote IPL, do not turn the modem on or off.
Otherwise, the system might start unexpectedly, although it turns itself off in a few minutes.
Student Notebook
To start the remote system:

1. Dial the telephone number assigned to the electronic customer support modem and line of the
remote system.
If you hang up before the silence, the IPL might not complete.
2. Wait about 20 to 40 seconds while the telephone rings. You will hear a modem tone and then
silence. At this time, the communication is being established from the modem to the control
n
panel to start the IPL sequence.
3. Hang up the telephone. The system performs an IPL, and the Sign On display is shown.
ó
4. Sign on to the system.
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
System value using 5250 emulation

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 22-28. System value using 5250 emulation AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Using a 5250 emulation session, you can use the Work with System Values (WRKSYSVAL) command
to set the system values discussed in this unit.
pr clu
To display the screen captured in the upper left on this visual, we entered the WRKSYSVAL command,
and then used F4 to prompt both the command itself and the system value parameter. From the
resulting screen, you can choose one of the categories displayed or you can page down and locate
the specific system value of interest.
Ex
Another alternative is to enter the WRKSYSVAL command and press the Enter key. That displays the
screen captured in the lower right side of the display. From this screen, you page down to locate the
specific system value of interest.
Student Notebook
System values using IBM Navigator for i

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 22-29. System values using IBM Navigator for i AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
System values can be set using IBM Navigator for i.

On the left pane, click Configuration and Services and then the System Values link.
pr clu
Note: System values are grouped, so you do not see a list of system values like what is displayed
on a 5250 screen.
Choose the system value group you want to display then right-click name and click Properties.
Individual system values are displayed on separate tabs.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
ó n
.N ci
Topic 2: Stopping the system
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 22-30. Topic 2: Stopping the system AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Stopping the system: Overview

IBM i
The Power i can be stopped in different ways.
n
• The PWRDWNSYS command
ó
ZZzzzz
.N ci
• The Power On and Off Tasks menu
.R a
• The Power push button (see note)
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 22-31. Stopping the system: Overview AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
For systems controlled by an HMC, the recommendation is that the Power button should not be
used. Because this approach stops the whole server, including all logical partitions. This can cause
pr clu
interrupted jobs and damaged data. The Power ON or Power Down server should be performed
from the HMC interface (GUI or command).
Just as there are different ways to perform an IPL on a Power Systems with IBM i, there are
different ways to stop it. The method you use depends on what is happening on your system when
you want to stop it.
Ex
• The Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) command

You can use this command to power off the Power in a controlled manner or immediately. Using
this command is the recommended way to stop the system.
• The Power On and Off Tasks menu
The main purpose of the Power On and Off Tasks menu is to set up a power on and off tasks
schedule. However, it can also be used to power off the Power immediately and then load it.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty • The Power push button

If you are unable to stop the system by using either the PWRDWNSYS command or the Power On
and off Tasks menu, you can use the Power push button to stop it immediately.
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Steps prior to power down

IBM i
Allocate QSYSOPR to your job in *BREAK mode:

1
n
CHGMSGQ QSYSOPR *BREAK
ó
2 Make sure all users sign off of the system.
.N ci
.R a
3 Check the status of any batch jobs.
C rm 4 Hold any job queues that have jobs waiting to run.

to fo
5 Check for removable media and remove them.
ec ivo
Figure 22-32. Steps prior to power down AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
To ensure the system ends normally, you should perform the following steps before powering it
down:
pr clu
1. Allocate QSYSOPR to your job in break mode.

2. Make sure all users sign off. Send a message that interrupts all users who are signed on telling
them to sign off. Include both the current date and time and the time at which the power down
occurs.
Ex
a. Type go MANAGESYS and press Enter. Select option 12 (Work with signed-on users) on the
Manage Your System, Users, and Devices (MANAGESYS) menu.
If the Work with User Jobs display is shown, you need to switch to basic assistance level
using F21 (Select assistance level).
b. Press F10 (Send message to all) on the Work with Signed-On Users display; then, type the
message in the Message text field on the Send a Message display and press F10 (Send).
Wait for the users to sign off. Check to make sure all users have signed off by pressing F5
(Refresh) on the Work with Signed-On Users display. When everyone is signed of, the
display shows only your job. To sign someone off the system, use option 4 (Sign off).
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty If you have separate interactive subsystems other than the controlling subsystem, you might
want to stop the interactive subsystems once the users signed off. This prevents them from
signing on again before you stop the system.
To end your interactive subsystem, on the Work with subsystem Descriptions (WRKSBSD)
display, select your interactive subsystem and use option 10 (End subsystem) to end it. On
the End subsystem (ENDSBS) display, in the How to end field, type either *CNTRLD to end
jobs after a user-specified delay or *IMMED to end jobs immediately.
n
3. Check the status of any batch jobs that might be affected if the Power is powered down.
ó
a. Type go MANAGESYS on any command line and press Enter. Select option 11 (Work with
jobs) on the Manage Your System, Users, and Devices (MANAGESYS) menu.
.N ci
If the Work with User Jobs display is shown, use F21 to switch to basic assistance level
(Select assistance level).
.R a
b. Press F14 (Select other jobs) on the Work with Jobs display. Type *ALL in the User field
and an N in every field except the Message waiting, Running, and Running job held fields.
C rm
Press Enter. The Work with Jobs display is shown again with the batch jobs listed.
4. If any job queues have jobs waiting to run, press F22 (Work with job queues) to see the Work
with Job Queues (WRKJOBQ) display. Hold any job queues that have jobs waiting to run on the
Work with Job Queues display. Do not forget to release these job queues when you start the
system again. Press F12 (Cancel) to return to the Work with Jobs display, then press F5
to fo
(Refresh) every few minutes until all batch jobs completed processing.
5. Check for removable media, and remove them from the system.
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Using the Power Down System command

IBM i
• This command stops the system in an orderly manner. It does

not cause damage to data files.
n
• This is the recommended way to stop the system (partition).
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 22-33. Using the Power Down System command AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) command prepares the system to shut down and then starts
the power-down sequence. All active subsystems are notified that the Power is being powered
pr clu
down; no new jobs or routing steps can be started by any subsystem.

For example, jobs on a job queue as a result of a Transfer Job (TFRJOB) command are not allowed
to complete. During the subsequent IPL, they are removed from the job queue and their job logs are
produced.
Ex
When the Power system is powered down with the *CNTRLD option, a vary off of configuration
objects is initiated but might not complete before the power-down completes. When the Power is
powered down with the *IMMED option, no vary off of configuration objects is performed.
Restrictions
• To run this command, you must have job control (*JOBCTL) authority.
• You must have *USE authority to the image catalog specified by the IMGCLG parameter and
*EXECUTE authority to the QUSRSYS library containing that image catalog.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Note
Do not precede an entry with an asterisk (*) unless that entry is a special value that is shown (on the
display or in the help information) with an asterisk.
n
The following parameters are associated with the PWRDWNSYS command:
• OPTION (how to end): Specifies whether the system allows the active subsystem to end
ó
processing of active jobs in a controlled manner (which lets the application program perform
end processing) or whether the system ends the jobs immediately. In either case, the system
.N ci
does perform certain job cleanup functions.
• DELAY (delay time if *CNTRLD): Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, that the system allows
.R a
a controlled end to be performed by the active subsystems. If the end of job routines are not
finished in the specified delay time, any remaining jobs are ended immediately.
C rm
• RESTART (restart after power-down): Specifies whether the system ends and powers down or
whether the system ends and then starts again in unattended mode.
• IPLSRC (IPL source): Specifies whether an IPL is started from the A source, B source, or D
source of the system. This parameter allows you to control which LIC storage source of the
to fo
system to load. Also, the source of the system determines where LIC program temporary fixes
(PTFs) are applied. This parameter also allows the system to be upgraded to a new release
from an installation image on the direct access storage device (DASD).
• ENDSBSOPT (end subsystem option): Specifies the options to take when ending the active
ec ivo
subsystems. In general, specifying these options improves the performance of the PWRDWNSYS
command. Each option has certain side effects that you need to analyze before using that
option. This parameter has no effect on jobs already in the ending status.
• TIMOUTOPT (timeout option): Specifies the option to take when the system does not end within
the time limit specified by the QPWRDWNLMT system value. If this time limit is exceeded, the
oy s
subsequent IPL is abnormal regardless of the value specified for this parameter.
pr clu
• CONFIRM (confirm): Specifies whether the request should be confirmed before the Power is
powered down.
Ex
Student Notebook
Controlled power-down with time limit

IBM i
The PWRDWNSYS command with time delay
PWRDWNSYS
OPTION (*CNTRLD) can be issued from a CL job stream, from a CL
n
DELAY(120) program, or by the system operator.
If no jobs are active or if all are completed before
ó
No ANY the delay time expires, the power-down sequence
JOB STILL
ACTIVE? begins as soon as the last job of any still running
.N ci
has finished.
Yes
120 No The DELAY parameter allows you to enter how
.R a
SECOND
TIME-OUT? long, in seconds, you want processing to continue
before canceling active jobs.
C rm
Yes
SYSTEM CANCELS ALL
ACTIVE JOBS If jobs are canceled because the time has expired,
the job files might be partially updated.
SYSTEM INITIATES
to fo
POWER -DOWN SEQUENCE The system initiates the power-down sequence
after all jobs have completed or canceled.
END
ec ivo
Figure 22-34. Controlled power-down with time limit AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
If you follow the steps shown on the Steps prior to power down visual you saw a few moments ago,
using the PWRDWNSYS command is the preferred way to power down your system.
pr clu
When you run the PWRDWNSYS command, specify a controlled end and a delay of at least 30 seconds
(this gives you time to sign off).
After you enter the PWRDWNSYS command, you should immediately sign off from your workstation.
The power-down sequence begins.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Using the Power push button

IBM i
ó n
WARNING
.N ci
.R a
Use the Power push button only if you cannot use the PWRDWNSYS
C rm
command or the Power On and Off Tasks menu
or cannot use Power Off from HMC.
to fo
1 Make sure that there is no tape in any tape device.
2 Press and hold 5 seconds the Power push button.

ec ivo
Figure 22-35. Using the Power push button AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Warning
pr clu
After power down system using Power button Unpredictable results can occur in data files. Next,
IPL might take longer to complete.
Ex
If an operating system is running, proceed with steps to power off a managed system by using
HMC, complete the following steps:
Logon to HMC
• In the navigation area, expand Systems Management > Servers.
• Select the checkbox next to the name of the server you want to enable the tasks for that server.
• From the Tasks menu, click Operations > Power off. Follow all additional instructions in the
interface.
Student Notebook
After these steps, press the Power button (A white) and hold for 5 seconds (a countdown is shown
on the display panel D). The system power turns off.
The power-on light (F), as shown in the following figure, slowly flashing means the power cord is
plugged in. If you are planning hardware maintenance that requires you to unplug the power
system, then you must unplug all power cords. All lights will off.
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Exercises
IBM i

ó n
Exercise: System values with 5250 emulation
System values with IBM Navigator for i
.N ci
Basically, access system values using
.R a
a different interface.
C rm Inform instructor when you complete your exercises.

to fo
ec ivo
Figure 22-36. Exercises AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or false: You can use the Change IPL Attributes command to
control the time it takes for your system to perform an IPL.
ó n
2. Which type of IPL requires an operator to complete the power-on
process?
.N ci
a. Attended
b. Unattended
.R a
c. Automatic
d. Restart
C rm
3. Which type of IPL is used to reload your system from tape after a disk
failure?
to fo
a. A
b. B
c. C
d. D
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

n
– Perform unattended IPL
ó
– Perform attended IPL (change IPL options)
.N ci
– Enable automatic IPLs
– Identify and work with system values that affect IPL
.R a
– Use the Power Down System command
C rm
– Use the Power On and Off Tasks menu
– Use the Power push button
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 23. System security concepts

This unit discusses the concepts of IBM i security, including user security and
user profiles, security controlled using system values, the authorization of
n
objects, authorization lists, and group profiles.
ó
.N ci
• List the types of security you can set for your system
.R a
• Explain the purpose of a user profile
C rm
• Discuss the types of information stored in a user profile
• Explain the different types of users on the system
• List and discuss the different system privileges assigned to a user
to fo
• Explain the purpose of group profiles
• Explain the purpose of authorization lists
• Explain how authority is set for an object
ec ivo

Accountability:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 23. System security concepts 23-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
• List and discuss the different system privileges assigned to a
.R a
user
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Types of security
IBM i
ó n
Resource
security
User
.N ci
security
Physical
security
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 23-2. Types of security AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
There are three types of security on the system. Each type builds on the preceding one.
Physical security is about securing physical access to the system, devices (terminals), device
pr clu
output (printers), and media on which data is stored from accidental or deliberate loss or damage.
User security limits who can sign on to the system and what they can do once they have signed on
to the system. This is accomplished through user profiles and enhanced with the use of group
profiles.
Ex
Object security is also known as resource authority. This is an additional type of security that
provides protection for system objects (for example, files, programs, and libraries) and the data
within these objects.
In this class we discuss user and resource security concepts.
Student Notebook
Types of security control

IBM i
ó n
System
.N ci
control
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 23-3. Types of security control AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Security is always active on your system. There are several tools available with IBM i that allow you
to control security. These tools are:
pr clu
User control
User profiles and group profiles are used to identify who can sign on to the system and to
control what they can do once they are signed on. A user profile identifies an individual user. A
group profile is used to grant authority to a group of users.
Ex
System control
System values are provided as part of the system. They are used to control certain operations in
the operating system and to communicate the status of certain conditions. Changes to some
system values take effect immediately, some do not take effect until new jobs are started, and
others do not take effect until the next IPL.
Object control
Also known as resource security. Through the use of CL commands, menu options, and
Navigator, users can be granted or denied access to objects and the data they contain.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Setting up a new user

IBM i
n
User information:
ó
User profile • Password
.N ci
• Special authority
• User class
.R a
• Password expiration level
C rm
• Initial menu or program
Object
to fo
List of objects owned
authorizations
ec ivo
Figure 23-4. Setting up a new user AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
User profiles describe users to the system. A user profile contains general information about a user
including security information.
pr clu
For example, it contains:

• The user ID and password
• The privilege class for a user
Ex
• Any special authorities assigned to this user

• The limits and defaults set for a user
• A list of all the objects a profile owns
• A list of all the objects a profile is specifically authorized to use (or barred from using)
Student Notebook
Type of user: Privilege class

IBM i
• Privilege class: A user can be defined as one of the following:

– User
n
– Programmer
ó
– System operator
– Security administrator
.N ci
– Security officer
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 23-5. Type of user: Privilege class AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
When creating a user profile, you specify which class of user this person will be. Each privilege
class has a default set of system privileges (these are defined on the next page).
pr clu
The authorities specified under system privileges override the default privileges for this user or
group. When you are working with a group, the privileges specified apply to all users who are
members of the group.
The options for the privilege class parameter and their associated privileges are:
Ex
User On systems running at security level of 10 or 20, the user’s default

privileges are save/restore and all object access.
On a system running at a security level of 30, 40, or 50, the user has
no privileges.
Programmer On systems running at security level 10 or 20, the user’s default
privileges are save/restore, job control, and all object access.
On a system running at a security level of 30,40, or 50, the user has
no privileges.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty System operator On systems running at security level 10 or 20 the user’s default
privileges are save/restore, job control, and all object access.
On a system running at a security level of 30, 40, or 50, the user has
save/restore and job control.
Security administrator On systems running at security level 10 or 20, the user’s default
privileges are save/restore, job control, security administration, and
n
all object access.
On a system running at a security level of 30, 40, or 50 the user has
ó
security administration.
Security officer The user’s default is to include all of the privileges. These are all
.N ci
object access, save/restore, auditing control, security administration,
system configuration, system service access, job control, and spool
control.
.R a
The recommendation is to set privilege class to User if the user does not need to perform system
C rm
functions.
Privileges are described in more detail on the next page.
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
System privileges
IBM i
• Users can be assigned the following privileges:

– All object access
n
– Auditing control
ó
– Job control
– Save/restore
.N ci
– Security administration
.R a
– Spool control
– System configuration
C rm
– System services access
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 23-6. System privileges AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
When creating a user profile, the system privileges parameter is used to specify the system
privileges for this user or group.
pr clu
Privileges are required to perform certain functions on the system. When you are working with a
group, the privileges specified apply to all users who are members of the group.
The privileges that can be assigned to a user or group profile are:
All object access The user can access any system resource whether the user has
Ex
private authority or not.

Auditing control The user has authority to perform auditing functions.
This authority is granted to users who turn auditing on or off for the
system and control the level of auditing on an object or user.
Job control The user has authority to change, display, hold, release, cancel, and
clear all jobs running on the system, job queue, or output queue that
is operator-controlled. The user also has the authority to start writers
and to stop active subsystems.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty This authority is usually granted to a system operator.

Save/restore The user has the authority to save, restore, and free storage for all
objects on the system, whether the user has authority to use the
object.
This authority is usually granted to a system operator.
Security administration The user can create, change, or delete user profiles if authorized to
n
use those commands and the user profiles.
Spool control The user can perform all spool functions.
ó
System configuration The user has the authority to change Power I/O configurations.
.N ci
System service access The user can perform service functions.
If no system privileges are specified, the user has no default privileges.
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Group profile
IBM i
Group profile
n
NAME: DEPTA
GRPPRF: *none
ó
OBJOWN: OBJ1, OBJ3
OBJAUT: OBJ2, OBJ4
.N ci
.R a
User profile User profile User profile
C rm
NAME: ART NAME: DICK NAME: PAT
GRPPRF: DEPTA GRPPRF: DEPTA GRPPRF: DEPTA
OBJOWN: OBJOWN: OBJ5 OBJOWN:
OBJAUT: OBJAUT: OBJ6 OBJAUT: *EXC OBJ1
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 23-7. Group profile AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
A group profile is a special type of user profile.

• When using a group profile, you can define authority for a group of users rather than give
pr clu
authority to each user individually.

• A group profile can own objects on the system.
• A user can be a member of up to 16 group profiles.
Ex
• A group profile cannot be a member of another group.

This technique allows authority to be defined once at the group level rather than several times at
the individual profile level. Also, it gives all members of a group exactly the same authority to use a
single set of objects unless additional grants of authority are made at the member level.
Authorities specified at the individual user level, override for that user, those specified at the group
level.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Authorization list
IBM i
NAME: AUTL1
n
OWNER: PATRICIA
ó
List of authorized users:
.N ci
FRED *ALL NEW USER
WILMA *EXCLUDE *USE
.R a
BILL *USE
JOHN *CHANGE
C rm
*PUBLIC *EXCLUDE
to fo
FILE FILE PGM NEW
A B A OBJECT
ec ivo
Figure 23-8. Authorization list AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
An authorization list references both user profiles and objects.

An authorization list is populated with a list of users who are authorized to work with those objects
pr clu
secured using this list. Each user has a different authority assigned.
Next, search for individual objects and secure them using this authorization list. Each of the users
named in the list will have the specified authority to that object. An object can be secured by only
one authorization list.
Ex
When a new object is created, it can be secured using this authorization list. Each user named in
the list has the specified authority to that object.
A new user can be added to an authorization list. A specific authority is granted to this new user.
This new user now has the specified authority to all of the objects secured using this list.
Student Notebook
Public versus private authority

IBM i
LFILEB
n
OBJECT
ó
.N ci
OWNER - USER1
.R a
PUBLIC AUTHORITY
C rm
- *CHANGE
Example:
to fo
CRTLIB............. AUT(*USE)
CRTDTAARA.......... AUT(*ALL)
CRTPF.............. AUT(*EXCLUDE)
ec ivo
Figure 23-9. Public versus private authority AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
There are many ways to give an individual user specific authority to use a specific object. Once a
user is given any specific authority to use an object, that user has private authority to use that
pr clu
object.
The authority that the public has to an object is normally set when the object is created and is kept
only in the object.
Private authority is stored both in the object and in the user profiles of the users who were given
Ex
specific authority to use that object.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Object authority
IBM i
• User that creates an object is the object owner
n
• Owner or security officer can grant authority to another user
ó
• Authority can be granted to an object and to the data
• One of the private authorities that can be granted is
.N ci
*EXCLUDE
.R a
• Ownership of an object can be transferred
C rm
• All users are members of *PUBLIC
• Public authority to an object is set at create time
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 23-10. Object authority AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
• The user that creates an object is the object owner.

• The owner of an object or a security officer can grant another user authority to work with an
pr clu
object. This is known as private authority.

• Authority can be granted to an object including the data within the object. For example, you can
grant authority to a file, and you can grant authority to the data within that file.
• One of the private authorities that can be granted is *EXCLUDE.
Ex
• Ownership of an object can be granted to another user or a group profile.

• All users on a system are member of *PUBLIC.
• Public authority to an object is set at create time.
Student Notebook
System values
IBM i
• Are used to control or change overall operations to the system
n
• Can be set by users with sufficient authority
ó
• You can search alphabetically for a system value
• You can search for a system value by category
.N ci
• Some system value changes take effect immediately, while
.R a
others are changed at the next IPL
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 23-11. System values AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or false: Environment variables are used to control the

operations of the system.
ó n
2. Which of the following is information that is not stored in a
user’s profile?
.N ci
a. Password
b. User class
.R a
c. List of owned objects
d. System values
C rm 3. Which of the following user types is assigned all of the

system privileges?
a. Programmer
to fo
b. System operator
c. Security administrator
d. Security officer
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Unit summary
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
• List and discuss the different system privileges assigned to a
.R a
user
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 24. System security with 5250 emulation

This unit shows you how to navigate the system using the different
commands and screens to work with security on the system.
ó n
.N ci
• Change your password
.R a
• Use system commands to identify and display a user profile
• Enable a disabled user profile
C rm
• List all of the objects owned by a user
• Display the authority currently in place for an object
• Use the correct command to set new authority for an object
to fo
• Display and work with authorization lists on the system
• Work with and display system value

ec ivo
Accountability:
• Exercise
oy s
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 24. System security with 5250 emulation 24-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Change Password: CHGPWD

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 24-2. Change Password: CHGPWD AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Change Password (CHGPWD) display allows you to change your own password. The password
that you type is not displayed as you type it.
pr clu
The system administrator for your system sets a system value (password expiration interval
QPWDEXPTIV system value) that determines at what interval the users on this system must change
their passwords.
Ex
Student Notebook
Display User Profile

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 24-3. Display User Profile AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Display User Profile (DSPUSRPRF) display shows you the current values of user attributes for the
requested user. The alternative is to use the Work with User Profiles (WRKUSRPRF) command that
pr clu
displays a list of user profiles you are authorized to work with. This command shows the screen
capture in the middle of this visual.
These attributes in a user profile are used by the system to personalize the way the system
functions for each individual user.
Ex
If you see More... on the lower right side of your display, there is more information to view. Press
Page Down (or Roll Up) to move toward the end of the information. Press Page Up (or Roll Down)
to display and explore the values set and stored in a user profile. Remember to use the F1- Help
function for a description of any parameters that might be of interest.
If you see Bottom instead of More, you are at the end of the information.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Enable a disabled user profile

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 24-4. Enable a disabled user profile AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
One of the most common duties that a system operator is called on to perform is to enable a user’s
profile. Use the Change User Profile (CHGUSRPRF) command to make this change.
pr clu
The system disables a user profile when:

• The user profile reaches the maximum number of password verifications.
• The user profile expiration date is reached.
Ex
• The STATUS parameter is set to *DISABLED for the profile.

The status (STATUS) parameter specifies the status of the user profile. The values that you can
specify for this parameter are:
• *SAME: The value does not change.
• *ENABLED: The user profile is valid for sign-on.
• *DISABLED: The user profile is not valid for sign-on until an authorized user enables it again.
Batch jobs can be submitted under a disabled user profile.
Student Notebook
Work with Objects by Owner

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 24-5. Work with Objects by Owner AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
From the Work with User Profiles screen, you can use option 12 (Work with objects by owner) to
display the Work with Objects by Owner (WRKOBJOWN) display for the user profile selected.
pr clu
From this display, you can display or change authorizations, display the description, delete,
rename, or change the ownership for any object to which you are authorized.
The Work with Objects by Owner (WRKOBJOWN) display shows a list of all objects owned by a user
profile. It also lists the library in which the object resides, the type of the object, the attributes of the
Ex
object, and associated text.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Display Object Authority

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 24-6. Display Object Authority AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Display Object Authority (DSPOBJAUT) command displays:

• The list of authorized users of an object and their assigned authority.
pr clu
• If the object is secured by an authorization list, the name of the authorization list is also
displayed.
• The public authority and primary group authority are also shown.
Ex
Use the F11 key to scroll through three different versions of the object authority displays.
• The Non-display detail display shows system-defined authority subsets and USER DEF.
• The Object authority display.
• The Data authority display.
If the user entering the command does not have object management (*OBJMGT) authority to the
object, only that user's name and authorities are shown.
Student Notebook
Grant Object Authority

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 24-7. Grant Object Authority AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Grant Object Authority (GRTOBJAUT) command grants specific authority for the objects named in
the command to another user or group of users.
pr clu
Authority can be given to:

• Named users
• Users (*PUBLIC) who do not have specific authority to the object or the authorization list
Ex
• Authorization lists
This command can be used by an object's owner or by a user with object management authority for
the specified object. A user with object management authority can grant to other users any authority
that the user has except object management authority. Only the owner of the object or someone
with all object special authority (*ALLOBJ), can grant object management authority to a user.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Work with Authorization Lists

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 24-8. Work with Authorization Lists AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Work with Authorization Lists (WRKAUTL) command shows a list of authorization lists from which
you can display and change authorization lists.
pr clu
Restrictions
• Only the authorization lists to which you have some authority are shown on the display.
• To perform operations on the authorization lists, you must have use (*USE) authority to use the
command invoked by the operation, and the appropriate authority to the authorization list on
Ex
which the operation is to be performed.
Student Notebook
Display Authorization List

IBM i
n
F15
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 24-9. Display Authorization List AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Display Authorization List display shows a list of users that have authority to objects secured by
this authorization list and the users' authorities. The public authority is also shown.
pr clu
Note
If a user in the authorization list is also specifically authorized to use an object that this list secures,
the specific authority is used to determine the user's authorities.
Ex
You can use the F11 key to scroll through three different versions of the object authority displays.
• The Non display detail display, which shows system-defined authority subsets and USER DEF.
• The Object authority display.
• The Data authority display.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Security category system values

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 24-10. Security category system values AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Work with System Value (WRKSYSVAL) command allows you to work with a specified system
value or a category of system values. The system values are provided as part of the system. They
pr clu
are used by the system to control certain operations in the operating system and to communicate
the status of certain conditions.
Changes to some system values take effect immediately; however, some do not take effect until
new jobs are started, and others do not take effect until the next IPL.
Ex
In this example, we selected the Security category. Notice the system values that can be set that
affect properties related to security. More system values can be displayed when you page up or
page down to see all of the system values that fall into this category.
More information about system values is available in the Work Management section of the IBM i
Knowledge Center located at:
https://www-01.ibm.com/support/knowledgecenter/ssw_ibm_i/welcome
Student Notebook
Exercise
IBM i

ó n
Exercise: System security with 5250 emulation
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. Which of the following options do you need to take on the Work with
User Profiles display to enable a user’s profile?
n
a. Option 1: Create
b. Option 2: Change
ó
d. Option 12: Work with owned objects
.N ci
2. When working with user profiles, which option shows all of the objects
to which a user is authorized?
.R a
a. Option 1: Create
b. Option 2: Change
C rm
3. True or false: The user who creates an object is automatically

to fo
designated as the owner of an object.
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Unit summary
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 25. System security with IBM Navigator for i

This unit shows you how to navigate the system using IBM Navigator for i to
work with security on the system.
ó n
.N ci
.R a
• Identify and display a user profile
C rm
to fo
• Display and work with system values

ec ivo
Accountability:
• Exercise
oy s
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 25. System security with IBM Navigator for i 25-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Change Password
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 25-2. Change Password AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
To change you password when using IBM Navigator for i, perform the following:
1. Open a browser tab, and start a connection to your system.
pr clu
2. Expand IBM i Management.

3. Click the System task.
4. Click the Change Password link.
Ex
5. This presents the tab captured in the lower right corner of this visual. Complete the parameters
as needed, scroll down, and click OK.
Student Notebook
User profile > Properties (1 of 2)

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 25-3. User profile > Properties (1 of 2) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
To display the properties for a user’s profile when using Navigator for i, perform the following:
pr clu

3. Click the Users and Groups task.
4. Click the Users link. This presents the tab captured in the lower left on this visual.
Ex
5. Locate the user profile you want to display, right-click it.

6. Click Properties to see the screen capture on the next page.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
User profile > Properties (2 of 2)

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 25-4. User profile > Properties (2 of 2) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Click the Capabilities link on the Properties window for the selected user to open the Capabilities
tab for that user (screen capture seen on the next page).
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Capabilities: Privilege class

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 25-5. Capabilities: Privilege class AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Under the Privileges tab on the Capabilities window, one of the privilege classes can be selected
from a drop-down list.
pr clu
Each privilege class has a default set of system privileges. The authorities specified under System
privileges override the default privileges for this user or group. When you are working with a group,
the privileges specified apply to all users who are members of the group.
Options for the Privilege class field and their associated privileges are:
Ex
User The user has no privileges on systems at security level 30 and above.
Programmer The user has no privileges on systems at security level 30 and above.
System operator The user has save/restore and job control on systems at security
level 30 and above.
Security administrator The user has security administration on systems at security level 30
and above.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty Security officer The user’s default privileges are all object access, save/restore,
auditing control, security administration, system configuration, system
service access, job control, and spool control.
System privileges are described in more detail on the next page.
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Capabilities: System privileges

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 25-6. Capabilities: System privileges AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Privileges are required to perform certain functions on the system. The privileges are:
All object access The user can access any system resource whether the user has
pr clu
private authority or not.

Auditing control The user has authority to perform auditing functions. This authority is
granted to users who turn auditing on or off for the system and control
the level of auditing on an object or user.
Ex
Job control The user has authority to change, display, hold, release, cancel, and
clear all jobs running on the system, job queue, or output queue that
is operator-controlled. The user also has the authority to start writers
and to stop active subsystems. This authority is usually granted to
users who operate the system.
Save/restore The user has the authority to save, restore, and free storage for all
objects on the system, whether or not the user has authority to use
the object. This authority is usually granted to users who operate the
system.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty Security administration The user can create, change, or delete user profiles if authorized to
use those commands and the user profiles.
Spool control The user can perform all spool functions.
System configuration The user has the authority to change system I/O configurations.
System service access The user can perform service functions.
n
If no system privileges are specified, the user has no default privileges.
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Capabilities: Password
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 25-7. Capabilities: Password AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
On second tab for Capabilities shows Password Requiring users to change their passwords after
a specified length of time reduces the risk of an unauthorized person accessing the system. The
pr clu
Capabilities - Password dialog specifies the change interval used for the user's password.
Password expires - Specify the change interval used for the user's password.
Manage this password locally - When you select this option, the password can be managed on
the local system. This is the recommended setting.
Ex
Manage this password remotely - When you select this option, the password is not managed on
the local system.
Time limit for password changes - Specifies the value for blocking password changes once the
password is successfully changed.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
User profile: Owned Objects (1 of 2)

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 25-8. User profile: Owned Objects (1 of 2) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
To display the objects owned by a user, perform the following:

1. From left pane click Users and Groups.
pr clu
2. Right-click the user.

3. Select User Objects.
4. Select Owned Objects.
Ex
5. Choose which types of objects you want to display.
Student Notebook
User profile: Owned Objects (2 of 2)

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 25-9. User profile: Owned Objects (2 of 2) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Displays the objects owned by a user or group. You can view the properties of an object or delete
the object by right-clicking an object in the table.
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
System Values
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 25-10. System Values AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
To work with system values, perform the following:

1. Click the Configuration and Service task.
pr clu
2. Click the System Values link to display the System Values categories for example group
Password takes few password system values:
QPWDCHGBLK *SEC Block password change
QPWDEXPITV *SEC Password expiration interval
QPWDEXPWRN *SEC Password expiration warning
Ex
QPWDLMTAJC *SEC Limit adjacent digits in password

QPWDLMTCHR *SEC Limit characters in password
QPWDLMTREP *SEC Limit repeating characters in password
QPWDLVL *SEC Password level
QPWDMAXLEN *SEC Maximum password length
QPWDMINLEN *SEC Minimum password length
QPWDPOSDIF *SEC Limit password character positions
QPWDRQDDGT *SEC Require digit in password
QPWDRQDDIF *SEC Duplicate password control
QPWDRULES *SEC Password rules
QPWDVLDPGM *SEC Password validation program
3. Select Properties to see the tabs displayed on the next page.
Student Notebook
Password System Values

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 25-11. Password System Values AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
On the following tab, you can find the Password System Value. The tabs are:
• General
pr clu
• Validation 1
• Validation 2
• Expiration
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Authorizing objects: Permissions

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 25-12. Authorizing objects: Permissions AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Authorizing objects is a third way to control security. Since all IBM i data structures (system and
user) are objects, the security system is primarily concerned with protecting objects. All objects
pr clu
have some invisible common structures in their control blocks. This allows a unified approach to
security since all objects interface the same way to the security routines.
You can use IBM Navigator for i to manage authorization on objects.
To see the windows captured in the visual, perform the following:
Ex
1. Click the File Systems task.

2. Click Integrated File Systems.
3. Right-click QSYS.LIB, and then click Open.
4. Locate the library where your object is stored, right-click it, and select Open.
5. Locate the object of interest, and select Permissions.
Student Notebook
Permissions: Basic
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 25-13. Permissions: Basic AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The column visible under the Authorities view selection of Basic are:
Use: Allows access to the object attributes and use of the object. The public can view, but not
pr clu
change, the objects.

Change: Allows the contents of the object (with some exceptions) to be changed.
All: Allows all operations on the object except those limited to the owner. The user or group can
control the existence of the object, specify the security for the object, change the object, and
Ex
perform basic functions on the object. The user or group can also change ownership of the object.
Exclude: All operations on the object are prohibited. Users and groups with this permission setting
to an object are not allowed to access or perform any operation on it. The public is not allowed to
use the objects.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Permissions: Details
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 25-14. Permissions: Details AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Permissions include all types of access a user has to an object.

The system uses the following order to check for a user’s authorization to an object:
pr clu
• The authority of an individual profile to access the object.

• The authority of an individual profile to access an object’s authorization list.
• The authority of a group profile to access the object.
Ex
• Public authority to access either the object or the authorization list of the object.
The system stops checking once proper authority is found.
The users who make up the public depends on the object in question. For a given object, the public
consists of all users who have no private authority to that object.
Object permissions (as listed below) define what operations can be performed on the object as a
whole. Your choices of which object permissions to select vary, depending on whether you are
defining authority for QSYS.LIB, Qdls object, or a different type of object.
Student Notebook
Operational: Provides the permission to look at the description of an object and use the object as
determined by the data permission that the user or group has to use the object.
Management: Provides the permission to specify the security for an object to move or rename the
object, and add members to database files.
Existence: Provides the permission to control the existence of the object and ownership. The user
or group can delete the object, free storage of the object, perform save and restore operations for
n
the object, and transfer ownership of the object. If a user or group has special save system
permission, the user or group does not need object existence permission.
ó
Alter (used only for database files and SQL packages): Provides the permission needed to alter
the attributes of an object. With this permission on a database file, the user or group is allowed to
.N ci
add and remove triggers to add, and remove referential and unique constraints, and to change the
attributes of the database file. With this permission on an SQL package, the user or group is
allowed to change the attributes of that SQL package.
.R a
Reference (used only for database files): Provides the permission needed to reference an object
from another object such that operations on that object can be restricted by the other object. If the
C rm
user or group has this permission on a physical file, the user or group can add referential
constraints in which the physical file is the parent.
Read: Provides the authority needed to get the contents of an entry in an object and display the
contents of the object, such as viewing records in a file.
to fo
Add: Provides the permission to add entries to an object, such as adding messages to a message
queue or adding records to a file.
Update: Provides the permission to change the entries in an object, such as changing records in a
file.
ec ivo
Delete: Provides the permission to remove entries form an object, such as removing messages
from a message queue or deleting records from a file.
Execute: Allows the user or group to run a program or procedure or to search a library or directory.
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Permissions: Columns
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 25-15. Permissions: Columns AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Columns selection under the Authorities view drop-down list displays check boxes for
permission values on columns within an SQL table or view. Each permission value is checked
pr clu
based on the user's or group's permission. This option is only available for SQL table and view
objects that reside on a System i server.
Making changes to Columns permissions can cause related changes to appear in the Basic and
Details views. For example, granting a permission to a column for which the user does not have
permission at the object level causes the object level permission to be granted. The change is
Ex
immediately reflected in the Basic and Details views. Likewise, changes made in the Basic and
Details views can cause changes in the Columns permissions displayed.
Current permissions are indicated by a check mark in the check boxes. The Name column displays
a list of authorized users and groups.
Student Notebook
Permissions
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 25-16. Permissions AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Change Object Permissions can be reached from Security menu.

On the left pane, click Security then Change Object Permissions find library and object then click
pr clu
Change Object Permissions window appears.

Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
New Authorization List

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 25-17. New Authorization List AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
You can use IBM Navigator for i to work with existing or create a new authorization list.
To create a new authorization list, perform the following:
pr clu
1. Click the Security task.

2. Click the Authorization Lists link.
3. Click the down arrow for Actions, select New, and then select Authorization List.
Ex
4. You see the New Authorization List window in the lower right.
If you want to manage an existing list right-click the list name and click Permission look at the next
visual.
Student Notebook
Authorization List
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 25-18. Authorization List AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
After you create an authorization list you can change or see permissions and see secured objects
that are grouped by types (objects in libraries, objects in folders, objects in directories). Right-click
pr clu
the authorization list and click Permissions. Click the Secured Objects link to see the window with
secured objects.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
New Group profile (1 of 2)

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 25-19. New Group profile (1 of 2) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Notes:
A user can be a member of a group. A group gives the same authority to all its members. A group
pr clu
usually consists of people who work in the same department, have similar jobs, and who need to
use the same applications in the same way.
To create a new group profile, perform the following:
1. On the left pane click Users and Groups task.
Ex
2. Click the Groups link.

3. Click the down arrow for Actions, select New then Group (Based on).
You can specify the group’s name, description, and the users included in the group. From this
dialog, you can continue specifying information about the group’s security and network options.
Note: In this GUI, Groups is this same as working with group profiles on the 5250 emulation
interface.
Student Notebook
New Group profile (2 of 2)

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 25-20. New Group profile (2 of 2) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
On the user group list right-click the group name and then click Properties which shows the user
profiles that belong to the group. Click Capabilities to see the Privileges screen for the group.
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Exercise
IBM i

Use the listed information to perform the exercises.
ó n
Exercise: System security with Navigator for IBM i
.N ci
.R a
C rm Inform instructor when you complete
to fo
your exercise.
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or false: IBM Navigator for i allows you to display all of the
objects owned by a user.
ó n
2. Under which of the following tasks do you find the link to change your
password in IBM Navigator for i?
.N ci
a. System
b. Work Management
.R a
c. Security
d. Users and Groups
C rm
3. Which of the following is not one of the authorization views you can
display for an object?
to fo
a. Basic
b. Details
c. Columns
d. Location
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 26. System configuration overview

Many different devices can be attached to the Power Systems with IBM i, and
you, the system operator, must manage them. You need to be able to
n
determine when and if there is a problem and how to manage the devices
should a problem arise. In this unit, we discuss concepts of connecting
ó
different devices to the system.
.N ci
.R a
• Discuss what a typical configuration might look like
C rm
• Discuss how PCs can be connected
• Discuss the different types of consoles supported
• Discuss the TCP/IP applications that can run on your Power System
to fo
Accountability:
ec ivo
• Exercise
oy s
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 26. System configuration overview 26-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
• Discuss the TCP/IP applications that can run on your Power
System
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
• How does the system know when you attach another device?
• To what degree can the system sense problems with devices?
pr clu
To answer these questions, we look at device monitoring and discuss what you should do to
understand and print your hardware configuration.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
ó n
.N ci
Topic 1: Configuring devices
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 26-2. Topic 1: Configuring devices AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Sample configuration
IBM i
Power with IBM i

(Montreal) Remote
n
communication
Workstation Tape drive or
LAN adapter CD-ROM unit
ó
controller Tape library
Console Order entry Shipping and
.N ci
Ethernet Modem
receiving
Display
Display Controller
.R a
Display (Paris)
Display
C rm
Display
Accounting
Display Printer Printer

to fo
ec ivo
Printer Printer
Figure 26-3. Sample configuration AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
There are several ways to attach devices.

• Locally attached devices: CD-ROM, tape drives, workstation controllers
pr clu
• Local area network (LAN) attached devices: Ethernet adapters

• Remotely attached devices: Remote workstation controllers
A description of each local and remote workstation (a display or a printer) must be given to the
Ex
system.
Tape drives, CD-ROM drives, and controllers (local and remote) must also be described to the
system.
Local workstations are attached by a cable, while remote workstations are attached by a
communication-line.
Communication lines must also be described to the system.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Question
IBM i
• What types of devices are connected to your Power Systems

with IBM i?
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Locally attached:
IBM i
• Locally attached devices are usually auto-configured, but

manual configuration is possible. Examples include:
n
– CD-ROM
ó
– Tape drive
– Tape library
.N ci
– Controllers
.R a
• When the system takes care of the configuration, a default
naming convention is applied.
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 26-5. Locally attached: AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Power Systems with IBM i ships with automatic configuration enabled. This means that your
system recognizes and automatically creates the device descriptions for your CD-ROM and tape
pr clu
controllers or drives using default values.

The naming convention for these devices depends upon your system's default naming convention.
The IBM-shipped default naming convention for these devices would be OPT01, TAP01, and
TAPCTL01, respectively.
Ex
These devices can be manually configured (although this is not recommended).

To monitor and manage these devices:
1. From the main menu, select option 3 (General System Tasks).
2. Select option 8 (Device Operations).
3. Choose the type of device you want to work with: Tape (option 4) or Optical (option 7).
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
LAN attached
IBM i
Local workstations and printers
n
Power i Communication controller
ó
Ethernet adapter
.N ci
.R a
LAN
C rm OR Ethernet adapter
to fo
Printer
Personal computer
ec ivo
Figure 26-6. LAN attached AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Personal computers can be attached by an Ethernet LAN.

pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Remote attach: Remote workstation controller

IBM i
Remote workstations and printers

Power i
ó n
SDLC communication line
.N ci
RMTLIN01
.R a
Controller
C rm
RMTCTL01 0 1 2 3
Terminal
to fo
Display or printer
RMTDSP01
ec ivo
Figure 26-7. Remote attach: Remote workstation controller AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
A communications line connects the Power Systems with IBM i to the remote controller in another
location. From that controller, cables are used to attach the workstation displays and printers.
pr clu
The number of workstations that can be attached to a remote controller depends on the type of
controller used.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
PC attachment summary
IBM i
Remote Remote
ó n
Remote
controller
.N ci
.R a
C rm Ethernet
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 26-8. PC attachment summary AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Personal systems can connect locally using an Ethernet LAN with an appropriate LAN adapter card
installed.
pr clu
Personal systems can be connected remotely through a remote workstation controller. Single
systems can connect with a Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) adapter card and can coexist
on the same line with other devices that use the SDLC protocol. Personal systems can also
communicate with the Power Systems with IBM i by means of an asynchronous communication.
Ex
Student Notebook
Creating device description manually

IBM i
• To manually create device descriptions, the following

commands are the most important:
n
– CRTDEVDSP
ó
– CRTDEVPRT
.N ci
– CRTDEVTAP
.R a
C rm
– CRTDEVOPT
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 26-9. Creating device description manually AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Following are some of the more frequently used commands used to configure devices manually:
• Create Device Description (Display): CRTDEVDSP
pr clu
• Create Device Description (Printer): CRTDEVPRT

• Create Device Description (Tape): CRTDEVTAP
• Create Device Description (CD-ROM): CRTDEVOPT
Ex
There are other commands you can use to configure devices. These are not covered in this course.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Creating device description automatically

IBM i
• Enable auto configuration

– System value: QAUTOCFG
n
0=OFF
ó
1=ON
• Device name
.N ci
– System value: QDEVNAMING
.R a
*NORMAL
*S36
C rm
*DEVADR
• Auto configure virtual devices
– System value: QAUTOVRT
to fo
0 - 32500
*NOMAX
*REGFAC
ec ivo
Figure 26-10. Creating device description automatically AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Each device attached to the Power system is described to the system through a device description.
These descriptions contain a name that you can use to refer to each device and a description of the
pr clu
device for the system.

• Device descriptions for locally attached devices (displays, printers, workstation controllers,
tapes, and optical drives) can be created automatically by IBM i or manually by using IBM i
commands.
Ex
• Device descriptions for remote devices must be created manually by using IBM i commands. If
you have PC devices (display stations and printers) using the workstation function attached to
your system, some of the device descriptions are automatically created, and some must be
created manually. Therefore, IBM i commands are available.
There are several system values that affect the creation of device descriptions. Your Power
Systems with IBM i is shipped with the auto configure devices system value (QAUTOCFG) set to
one. The system automatically creates and names local controller and device descriptions based
on what is specified for the device naming system value (QDEVNAMING).
Student Notebook
You can display or change this system value with the WRKSYSVAL command or through the interface
of IBM Navigator for i. You can also make changes to this setting during an attended IPL. The Set
Major System Options display allows you to enable or disable automatic configuration.
When a local controller or device is automatically configured, IBM i determines the format of the
name based on the contents of the QDEVNAMING system value. The following is an explanation of the
possible values for this system value:
n
• *NORMAL (default)
Uses a naming convention unique to the Power Systems with IBM i, for example, DSP01 for a
ó
display, PRT01 for a printer, CTL01 for a controller, TAP01 for a tape drive, OPT1 for a CD-ROM,
and TAPCTL01 for a tape controller.
.N ci
• *S36
Uses a naming convention similar to that in System/36, for example, W1 for a display, P1 for a
.R a
printer, CTL01 for a controller, T1 for a tape drive, OPT01 for a CD-ROM, and TAPCTL01 for a tape
controller.
C rm
• *DEVADR
Uses a naming convention based on the device address. It uses the same name as the *NORMAL
setting but appends the device address to the name. The address reflects the controller the
device is attached to, the port on that controller, and the address of the device. For example,
to fo
DSP010203 is a display on CTL01, using port 02, with device address 03.
The Automatically configure virtual devices system value (QAUTOVRT) specifies the number of
virtual devices that the system can automatically configure.
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Power Systems with IBM i consoles

IBM i
• The different console connections are:
n
– LAN Operations console
ó
.N ci
– Hardware Management Console (HMC)
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 26-11. Power Systems with IBM i consoles AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Use either an LAN Operations console, or a Hardware Management Console (HMC) as system
consoles to access and administer your system.
pr clu
Operations console
An operations console allows you to use your PC to access and control the console and control
panel locally and remotely. To access the system, a PC or local console must be configured. A local
console configuration can be any of the following: a local console directly attached to the system, a
Ex
local console directly attached to the system with remote access allowed, a local console on a
network, or a local console through dial-up support. Once you configure a local console directly
attached to the system with remote access allowed, you can establish connections from remote
PCs or a remote console through the local console.
HMC
HMC supports configuration and management of Power Systems with IBM i. You can manage
logical partitions, manage capacity on demand, power systems on and off, delete and report
changes in hardware, and more. You can connect remote to the HMC to manage your system from
Student Notebook
unlimited distance. HMC offers 5250 Console interface for each partition on the server
simultaneously.
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
ó n
Topic 2: Introduction to TCP/IP
.N ci
applications
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 26-12. Topic 2: Introduction to TCP/IP applications AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
The application layer

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm Local Area Network
to fo
LAN
ec ivo
Figure 26-13. The application layer AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
This topic covers what runs in the application layer.

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Client and server relationship

IBM i
n
TCP/IP host TCP/IP host
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
• All logical connections are point-to-point.
– The TCP/IP host requesting the connection is the client.
– The TCP/IP host being connected to is the server.
to fo
– A TCP/IP host can be client and a server at the same time.
ec ivo
Figure 26-14. Client and server relationship AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
In TCP/IP, all logical connections are point to point.

In this arrangement, one party is the client and the other is the server.
pr clu
Whoever initiates a connection is the client, and the system being connected to is the server.
A TCP/IP host, your Power Systems with IBM i, can be a client and a server at the same time.
Ex
Student Notebook
TCP/IP applications: Ping

IBM i
Ping
ó n
Ping'
Are you there?
.N ci
.R a
C rm
• Packet InterNet Groper (Ping)
• A basic problem determination tool
• Allows you to verify that a target TCP/IP host is up and
to fo
communicating
ec ivo
Figure 26-15. TCP/IP applications: Ping AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Ping is the basic problem determination tool of TCP/IP.

You can Ping using either the IP address or the name of a target system. The response indicates
pr clu
whether or not the target is active in the TCP/IP network.

During problem determination, it is recommended that you use ping from Host A to Host B then
from Host B to Host A. This way you can verify that the connection is working in both directions.
Note for security reasons in some installation or part of segment network ping can be not allowed.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
TCP/IP applications: Telnet

IBM i
Telnet
n
Clients Telnet server
Clients
ó
Signon:
PSWRD:
.N ci
.R a
• Allows a TCP/IP host (client) to connect to another TCP/IP host (server)
C rm
and emulate a workstation on that server
• Typically emulates an ASCII device
– VT100
to fo
– VT220
• Telnet emulators available for
– 5250
– 3270
ec ivo
Figure 26-16. TCP/IP applications: Telnet AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
TELNET allows a TCP/IP host system to connect to another TCP/IP host system and appear as a
terminal workstation to the target system.
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
TCP/IP applications: FTP

IBM i
FTP
n
Clients
ó
Get File
.N ci
File
Client Server
.R a
C rm
• Allows files to be exchanged between TCP/IP hosts
• Client must have authorization to access server
-or-
to fo
• With Anonymous FTP, anyone can access the Server
ec ivo
Figure 26-17. TCP/IP applications: FTP AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
File Transfer Protocol (FTP) allows TCP/IP hosts to send and receive files to other TCP/IP hosts.
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
TCP/IP applications: Email

IBM i
Email
n
Clients Post Office Clients
ó
.N ci
Mail server
.R a
• Email is a composite of two TCP/IP applications
C rm
– Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
• Basic function
• Allows the exchange of ASCII text messages
to fo
– Post Office Protocol (POP)
• Extended function
• Allows the exchange of information other than 7-bit ASCII (uses MIME, or,
Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions)
ec ivo
Figure 26-18. TCP/IP applications: Email AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Email is the composite of two TCP/IP applications: Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) and Post
Office Protocol (POP3). These applications allow for the sending and receiving of messages
pr clu
between TCP/IP host systems.

Extensions allow on the transfer of files other than text messages, for example, executable files,
graphics, sound.
Ex
Student Notebook
TCP/IP applications: HTTP

IBM i
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP)
n
Clients Server
ó
Web
Signon:
.N ci
PSWRD:
page
.R a
• Serving
C rm
– Provides organizations or individuals with a presence on the World Wide Web
• Browsing
– Allows individuals to search and visit WWW server sites
to fo
– Fastest growing segment of the Internet
• Made Internet access desirable to the public
ec ivo
Figure 26-19. TCP/IP applications: HTTP AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) better known as web serving, is one of the most popular
applications on the Internet.
pr clu
It is ease of use and global reach allow anyone to find nearly anything almost anywhere.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
TCP/IP applications: DNS

IBM i
n
DNS
Domain Name System
ó
.N ci
.R a
• DNS allows access to a TCP/IP host by name rather than by IP
C rm
address.
• DNS contains a table that matches host names to IP
addresses.
to fo
• The actual request from the client is sent once the name is
resolved to an IP address.
ec ivo
Figure 26-20. TCP/IP applications: DNS AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
On the Internet, no traffic flows from one host system to another until the sending system knows the
IP address of the target system.
pr clu
When a client (requesting system) attempts to connect to a server (target system) by using the
target system's name for example, www.ibm.com, the name must be resolved to an IP address
before the initial request is sent to the target system.
The TCP/IP application known as DNS provides the mechanism that resolves host names to IP
Ex
addresses.
Student Notebook
Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i
1. True or false: The system ships with automatic configuration

turned off.
ó n
2. Which of the following is not considered to create CD/DVD
device?
.N ci
a. CRTDEVDSP
b. CRTDEVPRT
.R a
c. CRTDEVTAP
C rm
d. CRTDEVOPT
3. Which of the following is not a supported console type?

a. Twinax console
to fo
b. Operations console
c. HMC
d. Wireless console
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i
4. True or false: Ping is a basic problem determination tool of

TCP/IP.
ó n
5. Which TCP/IP application is used to transfer data between
TCP/IP hosts?
.N ci
a. Ping
.R a
b. Telnet
c. FTP
C rm
d. DNS
6. True or false: Your Power Systems with IBM i can be a client

to fo
and a server at the same time.
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Unit summary
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
• Discuss the TCP/IP applications that can run on your Power
System
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 27. Configuration with 5250 emulation

Many different devices can be attached to the Power Systems with IBM i, and
you, the system operator, must manage them. This unit we discuss the
n
commands and menus used to manage the devices connected to your
system.
ó
.N ci
.R a
• Use the appropriate command to work with system control system values
• Use the appropriate command to display the default system printer
C rm
• Discuss how devices are named on your system and which system value
controls this function
• Use the appropriate command to work with hardware resources
to fo
• Describe the options available to manage devices connected to your
system
• Discuss what service tools are and how these tools are accessed
ec ivo

Accountability:
oy s
• Exercise
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 27. Configuration with 5250 emulation 27-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

• Use the appropriate command to work with system control
n
system values
ó
• Use the appropriate command to display the default system
printer
.N ci
• Discuss how devices are named on your system and which
.R a
system value controls this function
• Use the appropriate command to work with hardware
C rm
resources
• Describe the options available to manage devices connected
to your system
to fo
• Discuss what service tools are and how these tools are
accessed
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
ó n
Topic 1: System values and
.N ci
commands
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 27-2. Topic 1: System values and commands AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
System control system values

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 27-3. System control system values AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Use the Work with System Values command, and specify the System control category to see the
screen displayed in the visual in the upper left. Specifically, the command to use is:
pr clu
WRKSYSVAL *SYSCTL
Entering this command shows the system control system values, which are shown in the screen
captured in the lower right of this visual.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Printer device system value

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 27-4. Printer device system value AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Use the Work with System Values command and specify the printer device system value to see the
screen captured in the lower right of this visual. Specifically, the command to enter is:
pr clu
WRKSYSVAL QPRTDEV
This system value specifies the default printer for the system. If the specified device description
exists, it must be a printer device description.
Ex
Note
You must have *ALLOBJ and *SECADM special authorities to change this system value.
A change to this system value takes effect for new jobs started in the system. The shipped value is
PRT01.
Student Notebook
Creating device descriptions

IBM i
Automatically using system values:

• Enable auto configuration (QAUTOCFG)
n
0=OFF
ó
1=ON
• Device name (QDEVNAMING)
.N ci
*NORMAL
*S36
*DEVADR
.R a
• Auto configure virtual devices (QAUTOVRT)
0 - 32500
C rm
*NOMAX
*REGFAC
Manually using commands:
• CRTDEVDSP
to fo
• CRTDEVPRT
• CRTDEVTAP
• CRTDEVOPT
ec ivo
Figure 27-5. Creating device descriptions AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Each device attached to the Power system is described to the system through a device description.
These descriptions contain a name that you can use to refer to each device and a description of the
pr clu
device for the system.

• Device descriptions for locally attached devices (displays, printers, workstation controllers,
tapes, and optical drives) are created automatically by IBM i or manually by using IBM i
commands.
Ex
• Device descriptions for remote devices must be created manually by using IBM i commands. If
you have PC devices (display stations and printers) using the workstation function attached to
your system, some of the device descriptions are automatically created, and some must be
created manually. Therefore, IBM i commands are available.
There are several system values that affect the creation of device descriptions. Your Power
Systems with IBM i is shipped with the auto configure devices system value (QAUTOCFG) set to one.
The system automatically creates and names local controller and device.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty The device naming system value (QDEVNAMING) sets how devices are named on your system then
they are automatically created. You can display or change this system value with the WRKSYSVAL
command or through the interface of System i Navigator. You can also make changes to this setting
during an attended IPL. The Set Major System Options display allows you to enable or disable
automatic configuration.
When a local controller or device is automatically configured, IBM i determines the format of the
name based on the contents of the QDEVNAMING system value. The following is an explanation of the
n
possible values for this system value:
ó
• *NORMAL (default)
Uses a naming convention unique to the Power Systems with IBM i, for example, DSP01 for a
.N ci
display, PRT01 for a printer, CTL01 for a controller, TAP01 for a tape drive, OPT1 for a CD-ROM,
and TAPCTL01 for a tape controller.
• *S36
.R a
Uses a naming convention similar to that in System/36, for example, W1 for a display, P1 for a
C rm
printer, CTL01 for a controller, T1 for a tape drive, OPT01 for a CD-ROM, and TAPCTL01 for a tape
controller.
• *DEVADR
Uses a naming convention based on the device address. It uses the same name as the *NORMAL
to fo
setting but appends the device address to the name. The address reflects the controller to
which the device is attached to, the port on that controller, and the address of the device. For
example, DSP010203 is a display on CTL01, using port 02, with device address 03.
The Automatically configure virtual devices system value (QAUTOVRT) specifies the number of
ec ivo
virtual devices that the system can automatically configure.

Following are some of the more frequently used commands used to configure devices manually:
• Create Device Description (Display): CRTDEVDSP
• Create Device Description (Printer): CRTDEVPRT
oy s
• Create Device Description (Tape): CRTDEVTAP

pr clu
• Create Device Description (CD-ROM): CRTDEVOPT

There are other commands you can use to configure devices. These are not covered in this course.
Ex
Student Notebook
ó n
.N ci
Topic 2: Managing devices
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 27-6. Topic 2: Managing devices AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Display system operator messages

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 27-7. Display system operator messages AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The system operator message queue QSYSOPR alerts you to situations that need your attention in
relation to devices. The command to display the screen in the visual is:
pr clu
DSPMSG QSYSOPR
When you receive a message in this message queue about a device, you can view the appropriate
status displays and take the appropriate action.
Ex
Student Notebook
Display Messages: Assistance level

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
Basic Assistance
Level
to fo
Intermediate Assistance
Level
ec ivo
Figure 27-8. Display Messages: Assistance level AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
When you are on the Display Messages screen, you can use the F21 function key to toggle
between the basic and the intermediate assistance levels.
pr clu
• *BASIC - The Operational Assistant user interface is used.

This user interface separates messages into two categories: (1) messages needing a reply, and
(2) messages not needing a reply. New messages are shown at the top of each list.
• *INTERMED - The system user interface is used.
Ex
The DSPMSG command online help information assumes the *INTERMED user interface is shown.
If the *BASIC user interface is shown, see the online help information for the Work with
Messages (WRKMSG) command.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Managing devices
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 27-9. Managing devices AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
You can manage the devices on your system either from menus or the command line. The easiest
method is using the option off the Device Operations menu.
pr clu
From the General system tasks menu, displayed in the upper left on this visual, choose option 8 to
display the Device Operations menu, shown on the lower left on this visual.
Another way to access the Device Operations menu is to enter Go device on a command line
and press Enter.
Ex
From the Device Operations menu, you can manage:

• Devices (option 1)
• Displays only (option 2)
• Printers only (option 3)
• Tape units only (option 4)
• Optical volumes, files, libraries, and devices only (option 7)
Student Notebook
The command used to manage devices

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 27-10. The command used to manage devices AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Selecting option 1 (Work with device status) on the Device Operations menu brings up the Work
with Configuration Status prompt display shown in the upper left on this visual. If you leave *DEV in
pr clu
the Type field and the defaults for the remaining parameters and press Enter, all system devices
are displayed.
The Work with Configuration Status display, shown in the lower left on this visual, shows the name
of each device, its status (ACTIVE, VARIED ON, VARIED OFF, and so forth) and the job (if there is
one) associated with the device.
Ex
There are a number of options available that work with devices from this display:
• Make a device available (or vary it on) (option 1)
• Make the device unavailable (or vary it off) (option 2)
• Display the Work with Job menu, which allows you to perform job control functions, such as
canceling a job (option 5)
• Work with the device description (option 8)
• Show the mode status for the APPC device or mode (option 9)
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty Pressing F23 (More options) allows you to do the following:

• Hold the communications device from transmitting or receiving data (option 3)
• End the automatic error recovery feature for the device (option 4)
• Release the communication device for transmitting and receiving data (option 6)
• Resume automatic error recovery for a device (option 7)
n
• Display the connection status of the network device (option 11)
• Work with the active adapters on Ethernet or distributed data interface (DDI) line (option 12)
ó
The Work with Configuration Status display can also be accessed with the Work with Configuration
.N ci
Status (WRKCFGSTS) command. When you use this command, you need to prompt for the type of
device you want to work with. The type of devices you can work with are:
*NWS Network server description
.R a
*NWI Network interface description
C rm
*LIN Line description
*CTL Controller description
*DEV Device description
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Menu to manage communications

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm - or -
to fo
GO CMNSTS
ec ivo
Figure 27-11. Menu to manage communications AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
If your system communicates with remote systems or workstations, you can use the
Communications Status menu to monitor and manage communication lines, remote controllers,
pr clu
and remote devices.

To display the Communications Status menu shown on this visual, you can enter either option 9
on the General System Tasks menu and then option 1 on the Communications menu, or enter Go
cmnsts on a command line.
Ex
From the Communications Status menu, you can monitor the following:
• Communication lines (option 1)
• Remote controllers (option 2)
• Remote devices (option 3)
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Command used to manage communications

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 27-12. Command used to manage communications AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Using option 1 on the Communications Status menu displays an interim Work with Configuration
Status (WRKCFGSTS) prompt display. This visual shows that the value specified for the Type
pr clu
parameter is *LIN which means the system will display the status of all communication lines.
By pressing Enter on this display, you can view the status of all communications lines on your
system including the network servers, network interfaces, controllers, and devices attached to
those lines.
Ex
In order for you to manually vary a line off using the Vary Configuration (VRYCFG) command, the
devices must be varied off in the following sequence:
1. Devices attached to each controller on the line must be varied off first
2. Each controller on the line is varied off next
3. Finally, the line is varied off
To manually vary a line on, the reverse sequence must be followed.
If you use options 1 and 2 on the above display, all of these steps are automatically carried out for
you.
Student Notebook
The options on this display allow you to perform the same functions as discussed previously with
local devices.
From the Communications Status menu, you can choose to work with controller or device status.
The management options on the Work with Configuration Status displays are the same as those on
the one on this visual.
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
ó n
.N ci
Topic 3: Managing TCP/IP
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 27-13. Topic 3: Managing TCP/IP AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
TCP/IP Administration and configure menu

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 27-14. TCP/IP Administration and configure menu AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
This visual is showing the TCP/IP Administration menu in the upper left. Use the GO TCPADM
command to display this menu. This menu provides easy access to common functions associated
pr clu
with administering TCP/IP.

Select option 1 to show the Configure TCP/IP menu shown on the lower right on this visual.
CL commands necessary to complete the TCP/IP configuration process are accessed using the
CFGTCP menu (option 1 from the TCPADM menu). You would commonly use the following menu
Ex
options:
• 1: Work with TCP/IP Interfaces
• 2: Work with TCP/IP routes
• 10: Work with TCP/IP host table entries
• 12: Change TCP/IP domain information
• 20: Configure TCP/IP applications
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Display TCP/IP host name and address

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 27-15. Display TCP/IP host name and address AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Select option 12 on the Configure TCP/IP menu or enter the CHGTCPADM command to see the
screen capture in the upper left on this visual. You can use this screen to see the name that was
pr clu
assigned by the administrator to your system. You can also see the name of the domain to which
this system belongs.
Select option 1 on the configure TCP/IP menu to see the screen capture on the lower right on this
visual. You can use this screen to see the TCP/IP address assigned by the administrator to system.
Ex
Student Notebook
Is TCP/IP up?
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 27-16. Is TCP/IP up? AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
From time to time, you can need to verify that TCP/IP and the connecting servers are up and
functioning.
pr clu
If you select option 20 (Work with TCP/IP jobs in QSYSWRK subsystem) from the TCPADM menu,
you get a 5250 screen similar to the visual presented on this page. It displays the TCP/IP jobs
active in the QSYSWRK subsystem.
Most TCP/IP jobs run in the QSYSWRK subsystem.
Ex
Another way to see the status of TCP/IP is to select option 7 on the Work with TCP/IP network
status menu and then use (depending on your network configuration) option 1 Work with IPv4
interface status. Now you can see status of all TCP/IP interface. Additionally you can use the
NETSTAT CL command.
Remember to display system operator messages to see any messages that might relate to your
TCP/IP connections.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
ó n
.N ci
Topic 4: Other configuration tools
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 27-17. Topic 4: Other configuration tools AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Work with Hardware Resources

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 27-18. Work with Hardware Resources AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Work with Hardware Resources (WRKHDWRSC) command allows you to specify the type of
hardware resource with which you want to work.
pr clu
The possible values for the required parameter are:

• *CMN: The Work with Communication Resources display is shown.
• *CRP: The Work with Cryptographic Resources display is shown.
Ex
• *CSA: The Work with Coupled Adapter Resources display is shown.

• *LAN: The Work with LAN Adapter Information display is shown.
• *LWS: The Work with Local Work Station display is shown.
• *STG: The Work with Storage Resources display is shown.
• *PRC: The Work with Processor Resources display is shown.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Work with Hardware Resources: Processors

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 27-19. Work with Hardware Resources: Processors AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Work with Hardware Resources (WRKHDWRSC) command allows you to add, change, remove, or
show information about resources on the system. Specifically, the command used to display the
pr clu
screen capture in the lower right is:

WRKHDWRSC *PRC
The Work with Processor Resources display shows all processor and main storage cards installed
in the system. Including an entry for the processing unit itself and the main card enclosure or
Ex
system unit housing these cards.
Student Notebook
Start System Service Tools

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 27-20. Start System Service Tools AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Service tools can be accessed from dedicated service tools (DST) or system service tools (SST).
Service tools user IDs are required. Service tools user IDs were referred to as DST user profiles,
pr clu
DST user IDs, service tools user profiles, or a variation of these names.
Warning
Service tools should be used only under the direction of a service representative. Incorrect use of
Ex
this service tool can damage both the configuration of your system and the user data in the system.
The Start System Service Tools (STRSST) command can be used to determine all of the hardware
that exists on the system. This command allows you to display the hardware located in the system
bus, in the processor, or in main storage.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Exercise
IBM i

ó n
Exercise: Managing your system configuration
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i
1. Which system value is used to turn on the auto configuration of local

hardware?
n
a. QSECURITY
b. QPRTDEV
ó
c. QAUTOCFG
d. *SYSCTL
.N ci
2. Which system value is used to display the name of the system printer?
a. QSECURITY
.R a
b. QPRTDEV
c. QAUTOCFG
C rm
d. *SYSCTL
3. Which command is used to display the status of your configuration?

a. WRKSYSSTS
to fo
b. WRKDSKSTS
c. WRKCFGSTS
d. WRKHDWSTS
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i
4. True or false: The system operator message queue is the

first place to check if an end user is not able to connect to
n
your system.
ó
.N ci
5. Which of the following status information is not shown when
using the work with configuration status command
(WRKCGFSTS)?
.R a
a. LINE
b. CONTROLLER
C rm
c. DEVICE
d. DISK
to fo
6. True or false: The work with hardware resources command
(WRKHDWRSC) shows status information for communication
resources.
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Unit summary
IBM i

• Use the appropriate command to work with system control
n
system values
ó
• Use the appropriate command to display the default system
printer
.N ci
• Discuss how devices are named on your system and which
.R a
system value controls this function
• Use the appropriate command to work with hardware
C rm
resources
• Describe the options available to manage devices connected
to your system
to fo
• Discuss what service tools are and how these tools are
accessed
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 28. Configuration with IBM Navigator for i

In this unit we discuss how to use this interface to manage and monitor the
system and attached devices.
ó n
.N ci
• Display system values when using this interface
.R a
• Display the system operator messages using this interface
• Discuss some of the capabilities available for disk configuration
C rm
Accountability:
to fo
• Exercise
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 28. Configuration with IBM Navigator for i 28-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
System Values: Power control

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 28-2. System Values: Power control AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
To work with system values perform the following:

pr clu

3. Click the Configuration and Service task.
4. Click the System Values link.
Ex
5. This presents the list of system value categories in the upper left window. This is not this same
list of system values you see on a 5250 emulation screen when using the WRKSYSVAL
command. This interface shows you categories of system values. For example, the Power
Control category contains all the system values for power control.
Student Notebook
System Values: Devices

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 28-3. System Values: Devices AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
From System Values tab, right-click Devices, then click Properties. This shows the Devices
system values page. On first tab you see Automatic Configuration values, where you can specify
pr clu
the following:
Local controllers and devices specifies whether devices and controllers added to the system are
configured automatically.
Device naming convention specifies the naming convention used when the system automatically
Ex
creates device descriptions.

Remote controllers and devices specifies whether remote controllers and devices connected to
the system are configured automatically.
Pass-through devices and TELNET specifies the number of virtual devices to automatically
configure.
Maximum number of devices. specifies the maximum number of devices that can be created.
On Recovery tab you can change parameters for action to taken when error occurs on the
workstations.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
System Values: Printing

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 28-4. System Values: Printing AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Printing System Values category allows you to set which printer device is used as the default
printer.
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
System operator message queue (1 of 2)

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 28-5. System operator message queue (1 of 2) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
To see system operator messages, perform the following:

1. Click the Basic Operations task.
pr clu
2. Click the Messages link.

3. Click the down arrow for Actions and choose Include from the drop-down menu.
4. This displays the Messages - Include window pictured in the lower right of the visual.
Ex
5. To define who’s messages are to be viewed; click the Users button and click the down arrow
and choose System operator, then click OK to see the visual on the next page.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
System operator message queue (2 of 2)

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 28-6. System operator message queue (2 of 2) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Performing the action on the previous page displays the System Operator messages window.
• To view the details for a specific message, right-click the message and select Properties.
pr clu
• This displays the message details.

• On this page, you see the information on the General tab.
• The next page will display the Details tab.
Ex
Student Notebook
Using SST functions (1 of 2)

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 28-7. Using SST functions (1 of 2) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
IBM Navigator for i does not have a link to manage hardware resources, but some System Service
Tools (SST) functions can be performed with this GUI.
pr clu
1. Click the Configuration and Services task.

2. Click the Disk Units link.
Note that this displays options equivalent to performing the SST disk function from a 5250
emulation session. This option allows you to configure your disk units.
Ex
For this option to be active, the same user ID and password used to sigh on to SST must be used to
sign on to IBM Navigator for i.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Using SST functions (2 of 2)

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 28-8. Using SST functions (2 of 2) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
If you are using internal disks the IBM Navigator for i offers you graphical view of the disk with
physical location of the disks.
pr clu
1. From the disks list select disk and click Actions from option choose Graphical view.
2. On the Graphical view you can select Show all frames/units and Show device position you
can find these check boxes under disks list.
For internal disks this is useful because you can easy locate disks unit but when disks system
Ex
based on external storage is not able to allocate disks.
Student Notebook
TCP/IP Configuration Properties

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 28-9. TCP/IP Configuration Properties AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The window shown on this visual is the GUI display for TCP/IP properties.
pr clu

3. Click the Network task to open the Network tab.
4. Expand the All tasks under Network, then expand TCP/IP Configuration. Click TCP/IP
Ex
Configuration Properties.
5. This presents the TCP/IP properties shown in the lower right of the visual.
The Host Domain Information tab shows the TCP/IP Host and Domain name. Click Cancel to
close this tab.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Display interface properties

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 28-10. Display interface properties AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
To display the interface properties, perform the following:

pr clu

3. Click the Network task to open the Network tab.
4. Expand the All tasks under Network, then expand TCP/IP Configuration. Expand IPv4 and
Ex
click Interfaces.
5. This displays the Interfaces tab shown in the middle of this visual. Right-click your interface,
and choose Properties on the drop-down menu. In this example 10.6.252.190 is selected.
6. Clicking the Advanced tab allows you to specify whether this interface is automatically started
when TCP/IP is started. Click Cancel to close this pane.
Student Notebook
TCP/IP utilities
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 28-11. TCP/IP utilities AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
This visual illustrates the TCP/IP utilities that you can access using this interface. To access these
options, expand All Tasks and expand TCP/IP Configuration. You can then click:
pr clu
• Work with Look Up Host

• Work with Ping
• Work with Trace Route
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or false: The Local controller and devices system value

is used to specify whether devices and controllers are
n
ó
2. Which of the following can be configured with IBM Navigator
.N ci
for i?
a. Processor
.R a
b. Memory
c. Disks units
C rm
d. LPAR
3. True or false: With IBM Navigator for i, you can manage all
hardware resources in one place.
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Unit summary
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 29. Save concepts

Offline storage of data is extremely important as a means of recovery after a
failure. There are several methods and commands you can use to save the
n
data so that you can restore it to your Power if the need arises.
ó
Tape is the primary medium used on the Power Systems with IBM i to store
your company's information offline. For your backup process to be effective,
you need to understand how to prepare and use this medium.
.N ci
In IBM i terminology, to save something means to make a copy of it
somewhere else, usually on tape. The original remains unchanged, except
.R a
that it now holds information that was saved. The copy of the object is in a
format that is unique to the Power Systems with IBM i and cannot be directly
C rm
restored to any other type of system.

to fo
• Identify the different options available for save operations
• List reasons for saving to tape
ec ivo
• Explain the difference between labeled and unlabeled tape and their uses
• Explain the purpose of a save file
• Explain the purpose of virtual tape
• List some of the advantages for using virtual tape
oy s

pr clu
Accountability:
• Exercise
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 29. Save concepts 29-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

n
ó
• Explain the difference between labeled and unlabeled tape and
.N ci
their uses
.R a
C rm
• List some of the advantages for using virtual tape
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
ó n
.N ci
Topic 1: Save concepts
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 29-2. Topic 1: Save concepts AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
The save/restore facility

IBM i
• This facility offers three major functions:

Save
n
– Saving data
ó
– Restoring data
.N ci
.R a
– Keeping data history
Restore
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 29-3. The save/restore facility AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The functions of saving information to, and restoring it from, offline media are an integral part of IBM
i.
pr clu
All save/restore commands and facilities are available on each Power Systems with IBM i.
When an object is saved, save information is updated in the object itself and saved with the offline
copy.
When an object is restored, restore information is updated in the object on the Power Systems with
Ex
IBM i.
Note
IBM i offers save/restore to different kind of media.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Data that can be saved and restored

IBM i
The following data can be saved and restored:

• A single object in a library
n
• A group of objects identified by a generic name
ó
• A group of objects identified by a generic name and an object type
• One or more entire libraries
.N ci
• Office data (document library objects, documents, folders, mail, and
calendars)
.R a
• Objects in directories
C rm
• Changed objects
• System information (QSYS, configuration objects, security data, and
LIC)
to fo
• All libraries other than the system library
• All user data
• Security data
ec ivo
Figure 29-4. Data that can be saved and restored AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Everything on a Power Systems with IBM i can be saved. This visual shows how data is
categorized so that it can be saved.
pr clu
IBM i provides a number of save commands that can be used to save the data. Many of these
commands are discussed in this unit.
Ex
Student Notebook
What you cannot save

IBM i
• The following data cannot be saved:

– The contents of queues (messages, jobs, and so forth)
n
– Damaged objects
ó
– Objects in use for updates unless the SAVACT function is used
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 29-5. What you cannot save AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
There are some objects that are considered temporary objects. They do not live or stay on your
system permanently, so these are objects that cannot be saved.
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
What happens when an object is saved?

IBM i
n
ƒOwner name
ƒAny public authority
ó
Object name Date and time of save
ƒThe object itself
.N ci
A24LAB *LIB Sys Opr lib
.R a
C rm
Object type Storage required Text Description
in the system
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 29-6. What happens when an object is saved? AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
When an object is saved, its entire description is saved:

• The object name and type
pr clu
• The save date and time

• The owner name
• The storage required in the system
Ex
• The security information

• The description of the object
Student Notebook
Save considerations
IBM i
• A couple of issues need to be considered when saving.

– The save information is maintained by the system:
n
• This helps in locating the backup media that were used.
ó
• The system warns when restoring an older version.
.N ci
This lock is appropriate when you
*EXCLRD want to prevent any other job from
.R a
doing any operation other than read.
C rm
This parameter allows an object to
SAVACT be changed while it is being saved.
to fo
– There is no limit on the number of tapes that are used for a
save/restore operation.
ec ivo
Figure 29-7. Save considerations AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The description on the system for each object is updated with:

• The date and time of the save operation
pr clu
• The tape volume identifier and file name

• The date and time of the save; which is also saved in the copy of the object on the offline media
An attempt to restore anything other than the most recently saved copy of an object results in the
Ex
sending of an informational message.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Free storage function

IBM i
ó n
SAVOBJ STG(*FREE)
.N ci
Before After
.R a
Object header Object header
C rm
Contents
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 29-8. Free storage function AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Normally, saving an object does not remove it from the system; however, you can use the storage
(STG) parameter on some save commands to free some of the storage used by saved objects.
pr clu
If you specify STG(*FREE), the object description and search values remain on the system. The
contents of the object are deleted.
You can perform operations, such as moving and renaming an object whose storage was freed;
however, the object must be restored before it is available for you to perform an action on it.
Ex
Student Notebook
ó n
.N ci
Topic 2: Save to tape media
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 29-9. Topic 2: Save to tape media AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Option 1: Save to tape media

IBM i
n
SAV... command
ó
disk
+ = SAVE
.N ci
Tape Library or device Tape
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 29-10. Option 1: Save to tape media AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
IBM i supports saving to tape.

pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Purposes of tape on Power with IBM i

IBM i
ó n
The reasons to use tape media are:
.N ci
• To copy objects
.R a
• To migrate data between systems
C rm
• To distribute software
• To save / restore objects
to fo
• To provide input / output to programs
ec ivo
Figure 29-11. Purposes of tape on Power with IBM i AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Tape media can be used for various reasons on the Power Systems with IBM i. Its primary use is to
provide a means to save your company's data offline.
pr clu
If the saved objects on tape are ever needed, they can be restored to the Power Systems with IBM
i.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Using tape labels

IBM i
External tape label:
n
Gummed label that appears
on the outside of a tape box
ó
or container.
.N ci
.R a
C rm
Internal tape label:
• Standard label Identification recorded on tape. The
internal tape label is used by
• Unlabeled
to fo
Power with IBM i to get information
about data on the tape.
ec ivo
Figure 29-12. Using tape labels AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The following are the characteristics of an unlabeled tape:

• Two tape marks to indicate the beginning and end of the tape
pr clu
• Tape marks to indicate the beginning and end of each data file
• No volume label information and no data file label information
When you display an unlabeled tape, no information about it appears. Unlabeled tape is used to
Ex
exchange information with another system that does not support standard-label tapes; unless you
need them for this purpose, you should never use unlabeled tapes.
The following are the characteristics of a standard-label tape:
• Tape labels provide information that identifies both the tape volume and the files written on it. It
is a Power Systems with IBM i requirement that tapes used for save or restore operations must
have standard labels.
• Standard labels are recommended when you are using tape for program input or output and for
the other uses of tape (copy, migration, and journaling). Standard-label tapes are always used
to distribute software on tape.
Student Notebook
Question
IBM i
Which type of tape (standard/unlabeled) should you use to:
n
Standard Tape Unlabeled Tape
ó
.N ci
Migrate data between different
systems (Sys i to Sys z)
.R a
Distribute software
C rm
Save / restore objects
to fo
Provide input / output to
programs
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
ó n
.N ci
Topic 3: Save to save file
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 29-14. Topic 3: Save to save file AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Option 2: Save to save file

IBM i
n
SAV... command
ó
Disk
.N ci
.R a
DEV(*SAVF)
SAVF(name)
C rm Disk
SAVLIB SAVFDTA(*YES)
SAVSAVFDTA
to fo
SNDNETF
Tape
ec ivo
Figure 29-15. Option 2: Save to save file AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
A save file is a special type of file that can be created on a disk which IBM i treats essentially, as a
tape.
pr clu
• Almost anything that can be saved to tape media can be saved to a save file.
• Objects and libraries saved to a save file can be restored to disk just as they can from offline
media.
• The whole idea of saving system data offline is to make sure you have a copy of the data offline
Ex
in case of machine failure. For this reason, for a save to a save file to be complete, the data in
the save file must be saved offline later.
The Save and restore from a save file exercise is an optional exercise for anyone who is interested
in using save files.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
ó n
.N ci
Topic 4: Save to virtual tape
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 29-16. Topic 4: Save to virtual tape AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Option 3: Save to virtual tape

IBM i
SAV... command
n
Disk
ó
.N ci
DEV(Virtual Tape Drive)
.R a
C rm
DUPTAP
Disk FROMDEV(VirTape)
TODEV(Tape)
to fo
Tape
ec ivo
Figure 29-17. Option 3: Save to virtual tape AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Virtual tape is included in Base i operating system. Virtual tape is configured as a Random Access
Cartridge Loader (RACL) tape device:
pr clu
• I/O to disk instead of tape media

• Virtual tape behaves as tape library mounting specified volumes
• You can specify up to 35 virtual tape devices
Ex
• Virtual tape volumes support multiple optimum block sizes to be compatible with tape devices
Virtual volumes are stored as IFS stream files:
• These can be copied to other systems or partitions using FTP
• Some considerations of FTP are:
- Bandwidth
- Management of transmitted files
- Disaster recovery
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Overview and implementation

IBM i
Up to 256
n
virtual tape
1
2 volumes
3
ó
CRTIMGCLG 4
5
ADDIMGCLGE
(2) 6 (3)
7
8
.N ci
9
10
LODIMGCLG
.R a
Any ASP or iASP
(4)
Virtual
C rm
Save
CRTDEVTAP tape
(1) device Disk
Restore Disk
to fo
Duplicate to media, switch or
FTP to another system
ec ivo
Figure 29-18. Overview and implementation AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The steps to implement virtual tape are:

1. Create virtual tape device description then vary on the device.
pr clu
2. Create virtual tape image catalog.

3. Create virtual volumes.
4. Load image catalog.
Ex
5. Save to a virtual volume.

6. Duplicate virtual volume to physical tape.
These steps are detailed in the following unit.
Student Notebook
Virtual tape support advantages

IBM i
• Supported on all save/restore commands

• Can be faster than saving directly to tape
n
• Eliminates save file limitations
ó
• Eliminates media error limitations
.N ci
• Duplicate saves to physical media:
– Duplicate tape (DUPTAP) command
.R a
– If you have BRMS, use Duplicate Media (DUPMEDBRM) command
C rm
• Onsite and offsite storage
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 29-19. Virtual tape support advantages AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Some of the advantages of working with virtual tape devices are:

• Supported on all save/restore commands
pr clu
• Can be faster than saving directly to tape:

- Similar performance as save files
- Best performance in separate ASP
Ex
• Eliminates save file limitations:

- One library per save file
- Parallel saves not supported on save file
- 1 TB size limitation on save file
• Eliminates media error limitations:
- Saves ending due to tape device or media errors
- Save-while-active checkpoint restriction
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty - Once checkpoint reached, saves cannot be restarted

• Duplicate virtual saves to physical media:
- Perform the duplication when a physical tape device is available
- At your convenience
- Use the Duplicate Tape (DUPTAP) command or, if Backup, Recover, and Media Services
n
(BRMS) is installed, use the Duplicate Media (DUPMEDBRM) command
• Onsite and offsite storage:
ó
- Keep virtual volumes on systems as needed
.N ci
- Keep duplicated volumes offsite
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Virtual tape support considerations

IBM i
• Additional DASD requirements

• Might not be faster
n
• Data compaction not supported
ó
• Data compression support
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 29-20. Virtual tape support considerations AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Some considerations when working with virtual tape are:

• Additional DASD might be required since you are saving to disk.
pr clu
• Saving to a virtual tape might not necessarily be faster:

- Speed and time of save depends on the tape technology currently installed.
- Speed depends on the system configuration in place.
Ex
• Data compaction is not supported when saving to a virtual tape. Data compaction is supported
by hardware.
• Data compression is supported. Compression is supported by software:
- To implement, specify DTACPR(*YES) parameter on Save Commands
• Default is *NO
- Significant performance impact
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
ó n
.N ci
Topic 5: The tools
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 29-21. Topic 5: The tools AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Tools used to save

IBM i
• Save menu
• Save commands
n
• Operational Assistant menu interface
ó
• Backup, Recovery, and Media Services (BRMS):
.N ci
– 5250 menu and command support
– IBM Navigator for i tasks
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 29-22. Tools used to save AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The tools available on the system to save user and system data are:
• Save menu: Use the options on this menu to save the data on your system.
pr clu
• Save commands: Use the appropriate command to save the specific data.
• Operational Assistant menu interface: Use this easy-to-use interface to save your data.
• IBM Navigator for i: Supports using the standard default or using BRMS if this licensed
Ex
program product is installed on your system.

• BRMS: This is an IBM licensed program product used to automate the backup and recovery of
your system. It manages your backup media and provides support for archive and retrieval of
your data. It is supported on:
- 5250 emulation
- IBM Navigator for i
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Question
IBM i
Which of the save facilities are used in your company or organization?
n
Physical Virtual Save file BRMS Other tape
ó
tape tape mgmt
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
If you are looking for more information about backup / restore topics, you should consider attending
the following course:
pr clu
AS28G: Backup and Recovery Media Services (BRMS) for IBM i

This course covers the features and functions supported by the Backup and Recovery Media
Services (BRMS). BRMS is an integrated and comprehensive tool for managing backup and
recovery operations on the Power Systems with IBM i.
Ex
Student Notebook
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or false: Objects that are considered temporary do not

get saved on the system.
ó n
2. When you save an object, which of the following is not
saved?
.N ci
a. Object name
b. Object type
c. Name of the object owner
.R a
d. Address of this data on disk
C rm
3. Which of the following is supported media for a save
operation?
a. Physical tape
to fo
b. Save file
c. Virtual tape
d. All above
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

n
ó
• Explain the difference between labeled and unlabeled tape and
.N ci
their uses
.R a
C rm
to fo • List some of the advantages for using virtual tape
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 30. Save with 5250 emulation

In this unit, we review the menu options and commands used to perform
save operations on your Power Systems with IBM i. We review the steps and
n
commands used to save to tape and to save to a save file.
ó
We then review the steps to set up virtual tape support followed by the steps
to save to a virtual tape. We review the menus available to perform save
operations. Lastly, We review what each of the individual commands saves.
.N ci
.R a
C rm
• Use the menus and commands available to work with tape media
• Use the menus and commands available to work with save files
• Perform the steps required to set up virtual tape support
to fo
• List what data is saved with menu options 21, 22, and 23
• Explain what is saved by each of the save commands
ec ivo

Accountability:
oy s
• Exercise
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 30. Save with 5250 emulation 30-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

• Use the menus and commands available to work with tape
n
media
ó
• Use the menus and commands available to work with save
files
.N ci
.R a
C rm
• Explain what is saved by each of the save commands
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
ó n
.N ci
Topic 1: Tape operations
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 30-2. Topic 1: Tape operations AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Tape menu
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 30-3. Tape menu AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The go tape command displays the Tape menu. This menu can also be displayed by selecting:
• Option 3 (General system tasks) from the IBM i Main menu
pr clu
• Option 8 (Device operations) from the General System Tasks menu

• Option 4 (Tape) from the Device Operations menu
From the Tape menu, you can run all tape functions. The following explains the options on the Tape
Ex
menu and, where appropriate, the individual commands that the options prompt for or run:
1. Display tape information
This option displays the information on a tape. It prompts for the Display Tape (DSPTAP)
command.
2. Initialize a tape
Each tape must be initialized before data can be recorded on it. This option initializes (or
prepares) a tape so that data can be recorded on it and prompts for the Initialize Tape (INZTAP)
command.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty 3. Print contents of a tape

This option prints the contents of a tape. It prompts for the Dump Tape (DMPTAP) command.
4. Save
This option displays the Save menu, from which you can save data to tape, optical drive, save
file, or tape media library device.
n
5. Restore
This option displays the Restore menu, from which you can restore data from tape, optical
ó
drive, save file, or tape media library device.
6. Work with tape device status
.N ci
This option displays the Work with Configuration Status display, which shows the status
information for tape devices. This option runs the Work with Configuration Status for Tape
.R a
(WRKCFGSTS) command.
7. Verify tape
C rm
This option allows the tape unit operations for all tape units to be verified. It prompts for the
Verify Tape (VFYTAP) command.
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Display Tape: DSPTAP

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 30-4. Display Tape: DSPTAP AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
To find out what data is stored on a tape, you can either select option 1 on the Tape menu or prompt
for the Display Tape (DSPTAP) command.
pr clu
Note the possible values for the Data type parameter - either *LABELS or *SAVRST.
• If you specify *LABELS, the volume label and data file labels for the tape are displayed.
• If the information on the tape was written by an IBM i save operation, the operator might want to
see the names of the system objects in each tape file. To see this information, *SAVRST must be
Ex
specified for the data type parameter.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Contents of a tape: *LABELS format

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 30-5. Contents of a tape: *LABELS format AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
To display only the names of the files on a tape, use the default value of *LABELS for the data type
parameter on the DSPTAP command.
pr clu
• Information about the tape volume appears at the top of the display.
• Information about the first file on the tape appears in the body of the display.
• Additional information about this file can be seen by using the Page Down/Up (Roll Up/Down)
keys.
Ex
If several files exist on the tape, the system waits for the operator to press Enter before it searches
for and displays information about the next file.
Student Notebook
Contents of a tape: *SAVRST format

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 30-6. Contents of a tape: *SAVRST format AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
If the information stored on a tape was written during an IBM i save operation, you might want to
see the names of the actual system objects stored in each tape file. To see this type of information,
pr clu
specify *SAVRST for the Data type parameter on the Display Tape (DSPTAP) command.
In this format, information is displayed not only about the tape volume and tape file label, but also
about the system objects contained in the file.
To see it use F16 function key Display header. Display header shows common information about
Ex
the save operation and about the media on which the objects were saved. Common information
might include the command used to save the objects, the time period for which changed objects
were saved, and the expiration date of the tape on which the objects were saved. Information
shown differs according to the save operation used and the media used.
To display all information use the Page Down/Up (Roll Up/Down) keys to display them.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Initialize Tape: INZTAP

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 30-7. Initialize Tape: INZTAP AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Either use option 2 on the Tape menu or prompt for the Initialize Tape (INZTAP) command to
prepare a tape for the offline storage of information. Each tape must be initialized before data can
pr clu
be recorded on it. When a tape is initialized, any information on it is overwritten.

The three most frequently used parameters on this display are:
New volume identifier: If you accept the default of *NONE for this parameter, the tape you initialize
is an unlabeled tape. If you specify a volume for the new volume identifier parameter, the tape is
Ex
initialized as a standard-label tape, which is required for most operations.

Volume identifier specifies the existing volume identifier of the tape being initialized for use or
indicates that the tape currently on the magnetic tape unit should be initialized for use. You can
specify the name or you can use value *MOUNTED.
Any labeled or unlabeled volume that is placed in the specified tape device is initialized for use. To
initialize a new or empty volume for use, *MOUNTED. Must be specified, and *NO must be specified
on the Check for active files prompt (CHECK parameter).
• Check for active files: You can check for active files (*YES), choose not to check for active files
(*NO), or check for the first active file on the tape (*FIRST).
Student Notebook
- If you specify *YES or *FIRST and an active file is found, the tape is not initialized.
- If you specify *NO, the tape is initialized immediately, even if there are active files on it.
Tape density: The tape density parameter determines the amount of data recorded per inch of
tape.
Clear: Specifies whether all previous labels and data are deleted from the tape when it is initialized.
If the volume must be cleared of all data, it is spaced from the location of the initializing volume label
n
or tape markers to the end of the tape marker. Clearing process can take a long time for big tape
volumes.
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
ó n
.N ci
Topic 2: Save file operations
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 30-8. Topic 2: Save file operations AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Save File Commands menu

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 30-9. Save File Commands menu AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Save File Commands menu (go CMDSAVF) allows you to select commands to work with save
files.
pr clu
A save file is a file allocated in auxiliary storage that can be used to store saved data on disk without
requiring tape or optical media.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Create Save File

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 30-10. Create Save File AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Create Save File (CRTSAVF) command creates a save file.

A save file can be used with save and restore commands to contain data that would otherwise be
pr clu
written to tape or optical media. A save file can also be used like a database file to read or write
records that contain save or restore information. A save file can also be used to send objects to
another user on the network.
You must have object operational (*OBJOPR) authority to the CRTSAVF command in order to create a
Ex
duplicate save file object or to restore a save file object.

You must have add (*ADD) and read (*READ) authority to the library in which the save file will be
created.
Student Notebook
Save library to a save file

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 30-11. Save library to a save file AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Device (DEV) parameter specifies the name of the device used for the save operation. The
device name must already be known on the system by a device description. When you specify
pr clu
*SAVF, the save operation is done using the save file specified for the Save File (SAVF) parameter.
The SAVF parameter specifies the save file that is used to contain the saved data. The save file
must be empty unless *ALL is specified for the Clear (CLEAR) parameter.
Note
Ex
A value must be specified for this parameter if *SAVF is specified for the DEV parameter.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Other save file commands

IBM i
• DSPSAVF (Display a Save File)
n
• SAVSAVFDTA (Save a Save File)
ó
.N ci
• CLRSAVF (Clear a Save File)
.R a
• WRKSAVFBRM (Work with Save Files)
C rm • DLTF (Delete a Save File)

to fo
ec ivo
Figure 30-12. Other save file commands AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Display Save File (DSPSAVF) command displays the save information in a save file. This
includes summary information about the save operation and a description of each object saved to
pr clu
the save file.

The Save File Data (SAVSAVFDTA) command saves the contents of a save file to tape or optical
media. This command saves the save data in the save file to the device in a way that allows you to
restore objects directly from the device.
Ex
The Clear Save File (CLRSAVF) command clears the contents of a save file. This command clears
all existing records from the save file and reduces the amount of storage used by this file. A save
file must be cleared before it can be used again.
The Work with Save Files using BRM (WRKSAVFBRM) command displays or prints a report of all
save files on the BRMS media content information. To use this command, you must have the BRMS
licensed program installed.
The Delete File (DLTF) command deletes one or more files from the system.
Student Notebook
ó n
.N ci
Topic 3: Virtual tape operations
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 30-13. Topic 3: Virtual tape operations AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty

IBM i
Up to 256
virtual tape
n
1
2 volumes
3
CRTIMGCLG 4 ADDIMGCLGE
ó
5
(2) 6 (3)
7
8
.N ci
9
10
LODIMGCLG Any ASP or iASP
.R a
(4)
Virtual Save
C rm
CRTDEVTAP tape
(1) device Disk
Restore Disk
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu

Ex

These steps are detailed on the following pages. Refer to this visual to keep track of where you are
in the set up process.
Student Notebook
Image Commands menu

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 30-15. Image Commands menu AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Image Commands (go CMDIMG) menu includes several of the commands that are used when
setting up support for virtual tape operations. It also includes commands that are used in day-to-day
pr clu
operations when working with virtual tape.

The system shows the commands called when you choose a menu option. this is a good tool for
you to become familiar with a specific command especially if you have to repeat an operation
multiple times. Remember you can also recall a command with the F9 function key.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Create Device Desc and vary on

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 30-16. Create Device Desc and vary on AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Create Device Description (Tape) (CRTDEVTAP) command creates a device description for a
tape device.
pr clu
Resource name (RSRCNAME) parameter - *VRT

The operating system will generate a virtual hardware resource name to use for the newly created
device description. Once the maximum number of virtual hardware resource names are generated,
any additional device descriptions created are assigned the virtual hardware resource name that
Ex
was last generated.
Note
The resource name will not be removed if a device description is deleted. You can create a new
device description for existing resources by specifying the resource by name.
Once the device description is created, use the work with configuration status (WRKCFGSTS)
command to vary on your device description.
Student Notebook
Create virtual tape image catalog

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 30-17. Create virtual tape image catalog AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Create Image Catalog (CRTIMGCLG) command is used to create an image catalog object
(*IMGCLG) in library QUSRSYS and associate the image catalog with a target directory. An image
pr clu
catalog can be associated with a virtual optical or virtual tape device.

An image catalog contains information about images that were added to the image catalog using
the Add Image Catalog Entry (ADDIMGCLGE) command. This command is described on the next
page in the guide.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Create virtual volumes

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 30-18. Create virtual volumes AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Add Image Catalog Entry (ADDIMGCLGE) command is used to create a virtual image in the
image catalog directory (as specified by the Directory (DIR) parameter on the CRTIMGCLG
pr clu
command). If the image is added successfully, the image is loaded and the image catalog (*IMGCLG)
in library QUSRSYS is updated. Images can be added from the following sources:
• CD or DVD media (by specifying an optical device containing the CD or DVD image to be
added). This source is only allowed for optical type image catalogs.
Ex
• An image file located in a directory. The image file can exist in any directory that is accessible
through the Copy Object (CPY) command.
• A new image file by specifying the FROMFILE(*NEW) parameter.
Student Notebook
Load Image Catalog

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 30-19. Load Image Catalog AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Load or Unload Image Catalog (LODIMGCLG) command is used to associate an image catalog
and its images to a virtual device. The status of the image catalog is changed based on the value
pr clu
specified for the Option (OPTION) parameter as follows:

*LOAD This causes the status of the image catalog to change to Ready. All
image catalog entries in mounted or loaded status are loaded in the
specified virtual device. The allow save attribute is set to not allow
save for all image catalog files.
Ex
*UNLOAD This causes the status of the image catalog to change to Not ready.
All image catalog entries are removed from the specified virtual
device. The allow save attribute is set to allow save for all image
catalog entries.
Only one image catalog can be associated with a virtual device.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Work with Image Catalog

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 30-20. Work with Image Catalog AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Some restrictions to be aware of are:

• This command is shipped with public *EXCLUDE authority.
pr clu
• The following authorities are required to view entries for the image catalog specified:
- *EXECUTE authority to access library QUSRSYS.
- *USE authority to access the image catalog.
Ex
1=Create Creates a new image catalog object in library QUSRSYS.

2=Change Changes attributes of an image catalog.
4=Delete Deletes the image catalog and image files from the system.
8=Load Makes the image files associated with the image catalog entries
available to the virtual device.
9=Unload Makes the image files associated with the image catalog entries
unavailable to the virtual device.
Student Notebook
10=Verify Prompts for the Verify Image Catalog (VFYIMGCLG) command. This
command allows you to verify that the required images exist in the
optical image catalog. Can verify Program Temporary Fix(s) (PTF) or
image before upgrade/install new version of the operating system.
12=Work with entries Brings up the Work with Image Catalog Entries display. From this
panel, you can work with the image catalog entries for the selected
image catalog.
n
As you see there is also optical virtual catalog which often is used to install Program Temporary Fix
ó
(PTF) upgrade or install the IBM i operating system.
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Saving to a virtual volume

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 30-21. Saving to a virtual volume AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
For the Device parameter, specify the names of one or more tape devices used for the save
operation.
pr clu
If a virtual tape device is used, it must be the only device specified. If multiple tape devices are
used, they must have compatible media formats, and their names must be specified in the order in
which they are used.
Using more than one tape device permits one tape volume to be rewound and unloaded while
Ex
another tape device processes the next tape volume. To use more than one device in parallel, a
media definition must be specified.
Student Notebook
Duplicating virtual volume to physical tape

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 30-22. Duplicating virtual volume to physical tape AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Duplicate Tape (DUPTAP) command can be used to copy from a virtual tape to a physical tape.
Once the duplicate is complete, you store the physical tape offsite. You can leave the virtual tape on
pr clu
the system to use for recovery purposes as needed.

Initialize your virtual tape before it is reused for another save operation.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
ó n
.N ci
Topic 4: Save menus and commands
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 30-23. Topic 4: Save menus and commands AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Save menu
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
+ Restricted state
++ Restricted state recommended
ec ivo
Figure 30-24. Save menu AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
To find and use save commands, enter Go save on the command line. You can also enter option 3
(General system tasks) on the Main menu and then option 6 (Save) on the General System Tasks
pr clu
menu.
The Save menu, which consists of three displays, provides options that allow you to save anything
on the system.
Some save operation required Power in a restricted state. A Power is in a restricted state when no
Ex
subsystems, except the controlling subsystem, are active on the system.

Option 20 from the Save menu allows you to define your save system and user data defaults. We
review this display next.
The previous version of the operating system provided support for option 9 Save Storage. The Save
Storage (SAVSTG) command is no longer available.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Define Save System and User Data Defaults

IBM i
Save Menu - Option 20
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 30-25. Define Save System and User Data Defaults AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Define Save System and User Data Defaults display allows you to specify values to be used
during the selected backup or restore option.
pr clu
Remember that you can use the F1- Help option to help you understand what defaults are set for
each of the parameters on this display.
Ex
Student Notebook
Operational Assistant backup

IBM i
GO ASSIST or
=> 11. Customize your system, users, and devices GO BACKUP
n
=> 5. Backup tasks
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 30-26. Operational Assistant backup AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Operational Assistant (GO ASSIST) provides options to assist in managing and customizing the
system. One of those options is to set up and run a scheduled backup.
pr clu
The Backup Tasks menu allows predefined options for daily, weekly, and monthly backups to be
set. Default options are provided, which you can change to meet your needs.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Automatic default backups

IBM i
Daily Weekly Monthly
n
Back up changes to Back up all user Back up all user libraries.
ó
user libraries selected Libraries.
on backup list.
.N ci
Back up folders Back up all folders. Back up all folders
selected on backup list. Back up security data
.R a
Back up configuration
data.
C rm
Back up all user Back up all user Back up all user
directories. directories. directories.
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 30-27. Automatic default backups AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
This visual shows the Operational Assistant backup schedule defaults:

• Note that the monthly and weekly backups save all user libraries, all folders, and all directories.
pr clu
• The daily option backs up only those changes to the libraries and folders specified on a list.
• All three of the options back up all user directories.
These settings can be modified to suit your requirements using the Change Backup (CHGBCKUP)
Ex
command or options from the Set Up Backup menu.

You can also consider using Job Scheduler or Advanced Jobs Scheduler and / or BRMS (Backup
Recovery and Media Services).
Student Notebook
Save commands
IBM i
What is saved?
ó n
SAVOBJ
.N ci
SAVLIB
SAVDLO
.R a
SAV
SAVCHGOBJ
C rm
SAVSYS
SAVSAVFDTA
SAVSECDTA
to fo
SAVCFG
ec ivo
Figure 30-28. Save commands AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
When you select an option on the Save menu, you are prompted for various save commands, all of
which exist on the system. Why are there so many commands? So that you can save only what you
pr clu
need, when you need it. As you become more comfortable working with IBM i, you might prefer to
use these commands rather than the Save menu.
Following is a brief explanation of what is saved with each command:
• SAVOBJ: Saves one or more objects or a group of objects by generic name and type from one
Ex
or more libraries. When *ALL is specified on the Objects prompt, objects can be saved from up
to 300 libraries. When saving to a save file, only one file can be specified.
• SAVLIB: Saves one or more libraries (up to 300 named libraries) and all the objects associated
with them. When saving to a save file or an optical volume, only one library can be specified.
This command can also be used to save, in one operation, one of the following:
- All libraries on the system other than QSYS
- All libraries that normally contain user data
- All IBM-supplied libraries other than QSYS (and six others that cannot be saved except by
SAVSTG - see online help)
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty The SAVLIB command saves the entire library, which includes the library description, the object
descriptions, and the contents of the objects in the library. For job queues, message queues,
output queues, data queues, and logical files, only the object definitions are saved, not the
contents.
• SAVDLO: Saves documents, folders, and distribution objects (mail).
• SAV: Saves one or more directories or objects within directories. This command must be used
n
to save the IFS.
• SAVCHGOBJ: Saves only those named objects (specific or generic, combinable with object
ó
types) that changed since the last complete save of a library.
• SAVSYS: Saves the system library (QSYS), all security information, all system configuration
.N ci
objects, and the LIC. This saved data can be used during an installation process. Individual
objects cannot be restored from these tapes.
.R a
• SAVSAVFDTA: Saves objects that were saved to a save file to offline media.
• SAVSECDTA: Saves one or more named user profiles or all security information, including
C rm
profiles, authorization lists, and authority holders.
• SAVCFG: Saves all configuration and system resource management information without
requiring that the system be in a restricted system.
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
What data is saved

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 30-29. What data is saved AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
On the visual you can compare scope of saved data on each save option.
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Save menu option 21: Entire system

IBM i
Option 21 runs the following commands:
n
ENDTCPSVR
ENDHOSTSVR
ó
DLYJOB
ENDTCP
.N ci
DLYJOB
ENDSBS SBS(*ALL) OPTION(*IMMED)
.R a
CHGMSGQ MSGQ(QSYSOPR) DLVRY(*BREAK or *NOTIFY)
C rm
SAVSYS
SAVLIB LIB(*NONSYS) ACCPTH(*YES)
SAVDLO DLO(*ALL) FLR(*ANY)
SAV DEV('/QSYS.LIB/media-device-name.DEVD') +
to fo
OBJ(('/*') ('/QSYS.LIB' *OMIT) +
('/QDLS' *OMIT))1 UPDHST(*YES)
STRSBS SBSD(controlling-subsystem)
ec ivo
Figure 30-30. Save menu option 21: Entire system AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Save menu option 22: System data

IBM i
n
ENDTCPSVR
ENDHOSTSVR
ó
DLYJOB
.N ci
ENDTCP
DLYJOB
.R a
C rm
SAVSYS
SAVLIB LIB(*IBM) ACCPTH(*YES)
OBJ(('/QIBM/ProdData') +
to fo
('/QOpenSys/QIBM/ProdData')) +
UPDHST(*YES)
ec ivo
Figure 30-31. Save menu option 22: System data AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Save menu option 23: All user data

IBM i
n
ENDTCPSVR
ENDHOSTSVR
ó
DLYJOB
ENDTCP
.N ci
DLYJOB
.R a
SAVSECDTA
SAVCFG
C rm
SAVLIB LIB(*ALLUSR) ACCPTH(*YES)
SAVDLO DLO(*ALL) FLR(*ANY)
OBJ(('/*') ('/QSYS.LIB' *OMIT) +
('/QDLS' *OMIT) +
to fo
('/QIBM/ProdData' *OMIT) +
('/QOpenSys/QIBM/ProdData' *OMIT))1 +
UPDHST(*YES)
ec ivo
Figure 30-32. Save menu option 23: All user data AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Exercise
IBM i

n
Exercise: Save with 5250 emulation
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i
1. True or false: Running the display tape command, with the *LABELS
format, shows a listing by name of all of the objects that are saved on
n
this tape.
ó
.N ci
2. Which of the following is not supported by the Duplicate Tape
(DUPTAP) command?
a. Duplicate virtual tape to physical tape
.R a
b. Duplicate physical tape to virtual tape
c. Duplicate virtual tape to save file
C rm
d. Duplicate only specific sequence items
3. On the Save menu, which option is used to save the entire system?
to fo
a. Option 20
b. Option 21
c. Option 22
d. Option 23
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i
4. True or false: The save changed objects command is used to

save only those objects that changed since the last save
n
operation.
ó
5. Which command is used to clear the contents of a save file?
.N ci
a. DSPSAVF
b. INZSAVF
.R a
c. WRKSAVF
d. CLRSAVF
C rm
6. True or false: Save menu option 21: Full system save, can be
performed to a virtual tape?
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

• Use the menus and commands available to work with tape
n
media
ó
• Use the menus and commands available to work with save
files
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo • Explain what is saved by each of the save commands
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 31. Save with IBM Navigator for i

In this unit we review the graphical steps used to set up virtual tape support.
We discuss the options available to perform a save using this interface. Last,
n
we look at the steps to display an object’s properties and determine when the
last save and restore were performed.
ó
.N ci
.R a
• Perform the steps necessary to set up virtual tape support with IBM
Navigator for i
C rm
• Describe backup functions with BRMS
• Describe the steps to perform backup of specific objects with IBM
Navigator for i
to fo
Accountability:
ec ivo
• Exercise
oy s
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 31. Save with IBM Navigator for i 31-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

• Perform the steps necessary to set up virtual tape support with
n
IBM Navigator for i
ó
.N ci
• Describe the steps to perform backup of specific objects with
IBM Navigator for i
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
ó n
Topic 1: Setting up virtual tape
.N ci
support
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 31-2. Topic 1: Setting up virtual tape support AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook

IBM i
Up to 256
virtual tape
n
1
2 volumes
3
CRTIMGCLG 4 ADDIMGCLGE
ó
5
(2) 6
7 (3)
8
.N ci
9
10
Any ASP or iASP

LODIMGCLG
.R a
(4)
Virtual Save
C rm
CRTDEVTAP tape
(1) device Disk
Restore Disk
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu

Ex

These steps are detailed on the following pages. Refer to this visual to keep track of where you are
in the set up process.
Note: You can create up to 256 virtual tape volumes.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Configuration tab
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 31-4. Configuration tab AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The first step is to create a virtual device description.

To perform this step:
pr clu
• Expand Configuration and Service.

• Expand All Tasks.
• Expand Tape Devices.
Ex
• Click Create Virtual Device to see the visual on the next page.
Student Notebook
Create virtual tape device description

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 31-5. Create virtual tape device description AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
On the Create virtual tape description window:

• Type the name of the tape device.
pr clu
• Add a Text description.

• Change default values.
• Clear the check box.
Ex
• Change Authority.
• If you specify a Message queue also specify the Library where message queue exists.
Click OK after you set all values.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Device: Make available

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 31-6. Device: Make available AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Clicking OK in the previous page creates the device description.

Expand Tape devices and choose Stand-Alone Devices to see tape devices.
pr clu
• Notice your device is now listed with a status of Unavailable. Type of 63B0 indicates a virtual
tape device.
• Right-click your device, and select Make Available to vary on this device and continue the
setup steps.
Ex
Student Notebook
Create Tape Image Catalog

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 31-7. Create Tape Image Catalog AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The next step is to create the tape image catalog.

To start this process, perform the following:
pr clu
• Expand Tape devices.

• Click Tape Image Catalogs to see a list of currently defined catalogs.
• Click the down arrow on the Actions menu and choose Create Image Catalog to get to the
Ex
next visual.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Create tape image catalog parameters

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 31-8. Create tape image catalog parameters AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
On the Create Catalog page, specify the following:

• Catalog name: Specify a unique descriptive name.
pr clu
• Catalog description: Specify a meaningful description.

• Directory path: This is the path where the virtual tapes are stored in the IFS. Note: This
parameter is case sensitive.
Ex
Authority level: Default is Exclude but for basic usage by users, Use will enough. You can also
specify the name of an authorization list.
Import image catalog: Select Yes to import the image catalog and its volumes from the image
catalog directory. Select No if you do not want to import the image catalog information.
Catalog ASP threshold: Specify the auxiliary storage pool (ASP) threshold for this image catalog
directory. Possible values include:
• Current (default) - Does not change the ASP threshold.
• Calculate - Lets the system calculate the percentage of space for the image catalog.
Student Notebook
• Maximum - Specifies the maximum storage space available in the ASP where the image
catalog directory is located that are used by virtual volumes in the image catalog.
• 1 to 99 - Specifies the percentage of ASP space to be used by virtual volumes in the image
catalog.
Add virtual volumes to this image catalog.
Check to automatically add virtual volumes to this image catalog.
n
• Click OK.
ó
• This creates the image catalog. Notice it shows a status of Unloaded.
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Add volumes (create virtual images)

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 31-9. Add volumes (create virtual images) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Right-click your tape image catalog, then click Add Volume to see the notebook on the next page.
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Add volume parameters

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 31-10. Add volume parameters AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
On the Add volume details notebook, fill in the following parameters:

On the General tab, complete the parameters as follows:
pr clu
• From tape image file - Select New image.

• To tape image file - Specify the name of the file to contain your virtual volume.
• Volume description - Specify a meaningful descriptive name.
Ex
• Volume size in MB - Specify the size for your virtual volume.

The Options tab has some very important parameters when adding a new volume. Enter the
following values:
• Volume name - Specify the volume ID for your virtual tape.
Note: This field is only available when New image is selected from the From tape image file
field on the Add Volume to Catalog General page.
• Allocate storage - Select Volume size.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty This parameter specifies, for tape image files, whether to allocate the entire amount of storage
specified on the image size parameter. This parameter is only allowed for tape image catalogs;
it is not allowed for reference or dependent image catalogs.
• Tape density - Select *VRT256K.
Note: The tape density parameter should correspond to the block size of the physical tape
drive’s capability where you eventually copy the virtual volumes to physical tapes.
n
Click OK.
Repeat the steps on this page to create additional virtual volumes.
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
List virtual volumes

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 31-11. List virtual volumes AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
To view the volumes in your image catalog, perform the following:

• Right-click your image catalog.
pr clu
• Select List Volumes to see list of virtual volumes.

Note in the status column you can see which volume is Mounted. See the list below to see the list of
status for a volume:
Ex
• Unloaded: The virtual volume associated with the catalog entry is unavailable to the virtual
device.
• Loaded: The virtual volume associated with the catalog entry is available to the virtual device.
• Next: The image catalog entry is loaded. No entry in the image catalog is mounted. If
VOL(*MOUNTED) is specified the next time that the catalog is used, this entry is used.
• Mounted: The virtual volume associated with the catalog entry is active in the virtual device.
• Error: Indicates that an error occurred during the last action performed against the virtual
volume associated with the image catalog entry.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Load the image catalog

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 31-12. Load the image catalog AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The status of your catalog shows Unloaded.

To load the catalog, perform the following:
pr clu
• From a command line or Navigator for i run a command, like in the example below:
LODIMGCLG IMGCLG(AS24VTR01) DEV(AS24VTR01)
This command allows you to load (or unload) the image catalog to a specific device.
Ex
• Click Refresh (upper left of the tab) to see that the image catalog is now loaded.
At this point, you are ready to perform a save operation.
Student Notebook
ó n
.N ci
Topic 2: BRMS function
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 31-13. Topic 2: BRMS function AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
It is not the intention of this course is not teach BRMS (Backup Recovery and Media Services)
usage. But because this unit talks about backup functions that can be done with GUI, it is important
pr clu
to point that GUI allows you to perform backup operations using BRMS.
For more information about the features and functions of BRMS, you might consider attending
course AS28G, BRMS for IBM i.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Backup, Recovery, and Media Services

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 31-14. Backup, Recovery, and Media Services AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
If you have Backup, Recovery, and Media Services (BRMS) (5770-BR1) licensed program product
installed on your system, you will see the BRMS link on IBM Navigator for i.
pr clu
You can use the main buttons on the welcome screen or use the Advanced button to begin the
process of configuring BRMS to perform a backup.
Click the Advanced button to see the web page (shown in the following visual).
Ex
Student Notebook
BRMS tasks
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 31-15. BRMS tasks AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
This screen allows you to perform the following:

• Backup, Recovery, and Media Services for IBM i - Select actions such as displaying the
pr clu
global policy properties, restoring data, printing reports, and managing devices.
• Enterprise Services Manage BRMS systems through a BRMS Enterprise network
• Archive Control Groups - Create, run, display, and maintain archive control groups
Ex
• Backup Control Groups - Create, run, display, and maintain backup control groups
• Media Policies - Display media policies information
• Move Policies - Display move policy information
• Volumes - Display volume information
• Media Pools - Display media pool information
• Tasks - Tasks which are scheduled, executing, or were completed
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
ó n
.N ci
Topic 3: Saving an object
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 31-16. Topic 3: Saving an object AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
BRMS: Backup specific items

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 31-17. BRMS: Backup specific items AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The BRMS GUI provides capability to save specific objects on your system.
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
System: Run a command

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 31-18. System: Run a command AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
IBM Navigator for i does not have a direct function to do a backup but it allows you to run a
command.
pr clu
To run a command, perform the following:

• Click the System task
• Click the Run a command link to see the visuals on the next two pages.
Ex
Student Notebook
Prompting the save object command

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 31-19. Prompting the save object command AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
To save an object, you fill in the parameters for the Save Object (SAVOBJ) command.
If you know the format of the command, you can type it into the window in the upper left. It is
pr clu
recommended that you type in the command, then press the Prompt button to see the window
captured in the lower right. This way the system assists you with filling in the correct values to the
correct parameters.
Click OK to run the command.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Prompting the save library command

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 31-20. Prompting the save library command AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
To save a library, you fill in the parameters for the Save Library (SAVLIB) command.
If you know the format for the command, you can type it into the window in the upper left. It is
pr clu
recommended that you type in the command, then press the Prompt button to see the window
captured in the lower right. This way the system assists you with filling in the correct values to the
correct parameters.
Click OK to run the command.
Ex
Student Notebook
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or false: Setting up all of the support that is required for

virtual tape can be performed using IBM Navigator for i.
ó n
2. True or false: Installing the BRMS allows you to back up
objects using IBM Navigator for i.
.N ci
3. How many virtual tape volumes can you create for virtual
.R a
tape?
a. 64
C rm
b. 126
c. 256
d. *nomax
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

• Perform the steps necessary to set up virtual tape support with
n
IBM Navigator for i
ó
.N ci
• Describe the steps to perform backup of specific objects with
IBM Navigator for i
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 32. Restore concepts and overview

In this unit, we overview the process involved in restoring data onto your
system. We review the menu and commands available on the system to
n
perform restore operations. We also discuss what is restored when selecting
specific options on the Restore menu. We also overview the steps involved
ó
when performing a full system restore.
.N ci
.R a
• Explain the options available to restore data
C rm
• Explain the function of each of the restore commands
• List what is restored with menu options 21, 22, and 23
• List and explain the steps when doing a full system restore
to fo
Accountability:
ec ivo
• Exercise
oy s
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 32. Restore concepts and overview 32-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Restoring objects to disk

IBM i
n
Disk
Restore
ó
command
Tape
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
Save file or virtual tape
ec ivo
Figure 32-2. Restoring objects to disk AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Objects are saved to be able to recover them in case of a problem or emergency.

The Restore menu and commands provide the tools used to restore objects back onto the system.
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Restore menu
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 32-3. Restore menu AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Restore menu provides easy access to all restore commands.

This menu can be accessed by:
pr clu
• Using the GO RESTORE command

• Selecting option 3 (General system tasks) on the Main menu and then option 7 (Restore) from
the General System Tasks menu.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Restore commands
IBM i
What is restored?
ó n
RSTLIB
.N ci
RSTDLO
.R a
RSTOBJ
C rm
RST
RSTUSRPRF
to fo
RSTAUT
RSTCFG
ec ivo
Figure 32-4. Restore commands AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
There is a corresponding restore command for each save command.

What do each of these commands restore?
pr clu
• RSTLIB: Restores one library or all libraries saved with a SAVLIB command.
• RSTDLO: Restores one or more documents, folders, and distribution objects (mail).
• RSTOBJ: Restores one or more objects. Objects saved with a SAVLIB command can be
Ex
individually restored with this command.

• RST: Restores a copy of one or more objects that can be used in the IFS.
• RSTUSRPRF: Restores one or more named user profiles or restores all saved security
information, including all user profiles, authorization lists, and authority holders.
• RSTAUT: Restores all object authority to all user profiles after the profiles and objects are
restored to the system.
• RSTCFG: Restores one or more system configuration objects.
Student Notebook
What is restored?
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 32-5. What is restored? AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Where option 21 on the Save menu is used to save the entire system, notice that option 21 on the
Restore menu does not restore the entire system.
pr clu
The steps to restore an entire system are covered later in this unit.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Restore menu option 21: System and user data

IBM i
n
ENDTCPSVR
ENDHOSTSVR
ó
DLYJOB
ENDTCP
.N ci
DLYJOB
RSTUSRPRF USRPRF(*ALL)
.R a
RSTCFG OBJ(*ALL)
C rm
RSTLIB SAVLIB(*NONSYS)
RSTDLO DLO(*ALL) SAVFLR(*ANY)
RST DEV(’/QSYS.LIB/media-device-name.DEVD’)
OBJ((’/*’) (’/QSYS.LIB’ *OMIT)
to fo
(’/QDLS’ *OMIT))
RSTAUT
STRSBS SBSD(controlling subsystem)
ec ivo
Figure 32-6. Restore menu option 21: System and user data AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Select this option to restore a system other than the i licensed program.
This option performs the following operations:
pr clu
• Changes the system operator (QSYSOPR) message queue to *BREAK or *NOTIFY delivery mode
• Ends all subsystems
• Restores:
• User profiles
Ex
• Configuration objects
• All IBM-supplied libraries, including those containing user data
• All user libraries
• Folders, documents, and mail
• All objects in directories
• Private authorities
• Starts controlling subsystem
Student Notebook
Restore menu option 22: System data

IBM i
n
ENDTCPSVR
ENDHOSTSVR
ó
DLYJOB
.N ci
ENDTCP
DLYJOB
.R a
RSTCFG OBJ(*ALL)
C rm
RSTLIB SAVLIB(*IBM)
OBJ((’/QIBM/ProdData’)
to fo
(’/QOpenSys/QIBM/ProdData’))
ec ivo
Figure 32-7. Restore menu option 22: System data AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Select this option to restore system data.

This option performs the following operations:
pr clu
• Restores:
Ex
- Security objects, including user profiles

- Device configuration objects
- All IBM-supplied libraries that do not contain user data
- All IBM-supplied objects in directories that do not contain user data
• Starts the controlling subsystem
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Restore menu option 23: All user data

IBM i
n
ENDTCPSVR
ENDHOSTSVR
ó
DLYJOB
ENDTCP
.N ci
DLYJOB
.R a
RSTCFG OBJ(*ALL)
RSTLIB SAVLIB(*ALLUSR)
C rm
RSTDLO DLO(*ALL) SAVFLR(*ANY)
OBJ((’/*’) (’/QSYS.LIB’ *OMIT)
(’/QDLS’ *OMIT)
to fo
(’/QIBM/ProdData’ *OMIT)
(’/QOpenSys/QIBM/ProdData’ *OMIT))
RSTAUT USRPRF(*ALL)
ec ivo
Figure 32-8. Restore menu option 23: All user data AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Select this option to restore all user data, which includes IBM-supplied libraries and directories that
contain user data. This option performs the following operations:
pr clu
• Starts the save immediately or at a specified time

Ex
• Restores:
- Security objects, including user profiles
- Device configuration objects
- All user libraries
- All IBM-supplied libraries and directories that contain user data
- All mail
- All folders
- All documents
- Authorities
• Starts the controlling subsystem
Student Notebook
Complete system restore (1 of 2)

IBM i
Steps necessary to restore a complete system:
n
1. D mode IPL
ó
2. Load last set of save tapes
.N ci
3. WRKCFGSTS
4. If performing an attended restore, skip to 8.
.R a
If performing an unattended restore, proceed to the next step.
C rm
5. WRKRPYLE
6. ADDRPYLE SEQNBR(xxxx) MSGID(CPA3709) RPY('G')

to fo
7. CHGJOB INQMSGRPY (*SYSRPYL)
ec ivo
Figure 32-9. Complete system restore (1 of 2) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
To restore your entire system, including LIC and QSYS, the illustrated steps must be executed in
the order listed.
pr clu
D mode IPL is an IPL from tape instead of disk. Detailed instructions on performing a D mode IPL
can be found in the Backup and Recovery manual. If the LIC on your Power Systems with IBM i is
intact, you might be able to perform a manual IPL and select option 2 on the IPL or Install the
System display instead of performing an alternate IPL.
Ex
The installation of the operating system and of LIC must use the first volume of the IBM distribution
CD-ROM or the first volume of the most recent SAVSYS tape. Therefore, it is very important that your
SAVSYS be on a tape that is compatible with your alternate IPL tape drive.
After you restored the operating system and LIC, load the correct volume of your last set of save
tapes and make the tape device ready.
Use the following command to ensure that any devices not used in the restore operation are varied
off and that any devices you are using for the restore operation (workstations, tape devices, and
tape controllers) are varied on:
WRKCFGSTS
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty If you are doing an attended restore, skip to Step 8.

If you are doing an unattended restore, continue with the next step.
This and the next two steps prevent your save operation from stopping because of unanswered
messages.
Use the following command to display the reply list sequence numbers to find what numbers are
available for use:
n
WRKRPYLE
ó
If MSGID (CPA3709) is not already in your reply list, add it. For xxxx, substitute an unused sequence
number from one through 9999.
.N ci
ADDRPYLE SEQNBR(xxxx) MSGID(CPA3709) RPY('G')
Use the following command to change your job to use the reply list:
.R a
CHGJOB INQMSGRPY(*SYSRPYL)
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Complete system restore (2 of 2)

IBM i
Steps necessary to restore a complete system:
n
8. GO RESTORE, Option 21
9. Reply to prompts on Specify Command Defaults display and
ó
other system displays
.N ci
10. Following commands are run
• (load next volume when prompted):
• ENDSBS SBS(*ALL) OPTION(*IMMED)
.R a
• RSTUSRPRF USRPRF(*ALL)
• RSTCFG OBJ(*ALL)
C rm
• RSTLIB SAVLIB(*NONSYS)
• RSTDLO DLO(*ALL) SAVFLR(*ANY)
• RST DEV('/QSYS.LIB/TAPxx.DEVD')
• OBJ(('/*')('/QSYS.LIB' *OMIT)
• ('/QDLS' *OMIT))
to fo
• RSTAUT
• STRSBS SBSD(controlling subsystem)
11. DSPJOBLOG * *PRINT

ec ivo
Figure 32-10. Complete system restore (2 of 2) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Select option 21 from the Restore menu.

The Specify Command Defaults display is shown. Respond to the prompts on the display. For
pr clu
example, you are prompted for the tape device you are restoring from, whether you want to perform
an unattended restore or change the defaults on the RSTxxx commands, and whether you want to
restore messages sent in *BREAK or *NOTIFY mode.
Note
Ex
Depending on your response to the prompts, you might be shown another prompt display to which
you have to respond.
The system runs the commands shown on the display to restore the entire system. As the system
performs each major step in the save operation, you are shown the prompt display for that step.
Each step can take a long time, so be patient.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty As the system restore occurs, messages are displayed asking you to load the next volume (or
tape). Load the tape and respond to the message.
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. Which command is used to restore configuration information?

a. RSTCFG
n
b. RSTDLO
c. RSTLIB
ó
d. RSTOBJ
.N ci
2. Which of the following is a supported restore device?
a. Physical tape
.R a
b. Virtual tape
c. Save file
d. All above
C rm
3. What type of IPL is required to restore the entire system?
a. A
to fo
b. B
c. C
d. D
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 33. Problem determination with 5250
emulation
n
The system keeps track of all problems that occur and notifies you through
message queues and logs. You might need to analyze a problem before
ó
calling IBM for service. IBM i provides many tools (commands, menus,
displays, message queues, and logs) to aid you in identifying, analyzing, and
.N ci
reporting problems.
.R a
C rm
• Identify a problem
• Analyze a problem
• Report a problem
to fo
Accountability:
ec ivo
• Exercise
oy s
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 33. Problem determination with 5250 emulation 33-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
This unit presents the system tools available to help you to determine whether a problem exists with
your system and, if there is a problem, to gather information about it.
pr clu
Job logs and history logs are discussed, including how you can report a problem to IBM through the
electronic customer support (ECS) communications line.
After successfully completing this unit, you should be able to use the tools provided as part of IBM i
to identify, analyze, and report a problem to IBM or another service provider.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Problem solving tools

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
IBM i toolbox
ec ivo
Figure 33-2. Problem solving tools AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The system cannot solve all problems for you, so i helps you by providing the description of a given
problem and the tools to help solve it. The tools provided to help you manage problems on your
pr clu
system are:
• Messages
• Error messages
• System reference codes
Ex
• Logs
• Alerts
• Problem-handling menus
• ECS
• Error codes
The problem analysis functions that your system provides allow you to manage both
system-detected and user-defined problems. Your system provides functions for:
Student Notebook
• Problem analysis
• Problem logging and tracking
• Problem reporting
• Problem correction
The structured problem management system helps you and your service provider quickly and
n
accurately manage problems as they occur on the system.
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
ó n
Topic 1: Work with your job and
.N ci
job log
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 33-3. Topic 1: Work with your job and job log AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Work with Active Jobs (WRKACTJOB)

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 33-4. Work with Active Jobs (WRKACTJOB) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Work with Active Jobs display gives information about active jobs in the system. If, after an
elapsed time of more than 1 minute and with more than just a few jobs running on your system, the
pr clu
CPU% column for any one job is significantly higher than for other jobs on the system, it might
mean that the job is in a loop or is logging many errors. However, keep in mind that on a lightly
loaded system, this might not be abnormal. Also, some jobs normally use a great deal of processor
time.
If you suspect that a job is having problems, hold that job using option 3 on this display while you
Ex
investigate the problem further. Depending on the results of your investigation, you can then either
release or end the job with options 6 or 4 on this display, respectively.
To access the Work with Active Jobs display, you can enter option 3 (General system tasks) on the
IBM i Main menu, option 1 (Jobs) on the General System Tasks menu, and then option 2 (Work
with all active job statistics) on the Job menu. You can also enter WRKACTJOB on a command line.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Using the Work with Job command

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 33-5. Using the Work with Job command AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The WRKJOB command offers problem determination information. It consists of two displays that
contain extensive information about a job to help you in determining what the job is doing or has
pr clu
done.
The full job name appears across the top of the display (Job name, User name, and Number).
From this menu, you can access everything that the system knows about this job. You can select
one option at a time, or you can select all of the options that appear on the two displays with option
30, which appears on the second display but is available from either display.
Ex
You access the Work with Job menu by entering the WRKJOB command on a command line. It can
also be accessed by doing one of the following:
• From IBM i Main menu, select option 1 (User tasks) => option 1 (Display or change your job).
• Enter go job and select option 1 (Work with jobs) or option 2 (Work with all active job statistics).
• On either the Work with User Jobs or Work with Active Jobs display, select option 5 (Work with).
• On the Work with Job you can use option 10 (Display job log if active).
Student Notebook
Option 10: Job Log or DSPJOBLOG

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
F10 + PGUP
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 33-6. Option 10: Job Log or DSPJOBLOG AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The job log can be viewed by selecting option 10 off the WRKJOB display. IBM i keeps a separate,
detailed record of the activity of each job that runs on the Power Systems with IBM i. This low-level
pr clu
trace of the commands run by a job and of the system messages the job receives is called a job log.
You can use it to aid in problem determination.
You can view the job log for your own interactive job by entering the Display Job Log command
(DSPJOBLOG) on a command line. You can also use this command to display the job log of another
active job, but to do so you must know the full name of that job. Perhaps the simplest way to view
Ex
your job log while your job is active is to go to the command entry screen (F10 from most menus or
call qcmd).
While a job is active in the system or on a job queue, you can view its log by selecting option 10
(Display job log) from the Work with Job menu. Regardless of how you do it, if insufficient detail is
shown to enable you to determine precisely what the job has done, F10 causes all available details
to be displayed.
The bottom display in the visual appears after F10 is pressed from the top display in the visual. You
need to use the Page Up and Page Down keys to view the complete job log. Now you have enough
information to determine what happened in the job.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty Here is an explanation of each of the special symbols the job log contains.
>> The running command or the next command to be run. For example,
if a CL or high-level language program was called, the call to the
program is shown.
> The processing of the command is complete.
.. The command has not yet been processed.
n
? Reply message. This symbol marks both those messages needing a
reply and those that were answered.
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Job log printing

IBM i
Interactive job
n
Job log
DSPJOBLOG
ó
OUTPUT(*PRINT)
.N ci
Batch job
SIGNOFF SIGNOFF (*LIST)
.R a
Job log
Job log Job log DSPJOBLOG
OUTPUT(*PRINT)
X
C rm RUNS
SUCCESSFULLY
RUNS
UNSUCCESSFULLY
to fo
Job log Output
queue
X Job log
PRINT
ec ivo
Figure 33-7. Job log printing AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
While a job is active on the system, its job log is accessible so that it can help with problem
determination. However, when a job ends, the system uses several controls to determine whether
pr clu
the job log should be spooled to an output queue or simply deleted from the system. If a job is
completed and you later determine that something went wrong while it was active, the job log might
be the only available means of performing problem determination.
The system starts logging information in the job log for an interactive job as soon as you sign on to
a workstation and continues to log activity for that job in the same job log until you sign off. There is
Ex
a parameter on the SIGNOFF command that overrides all other controls regarding what happens to
the job log of an interactive job when the job ends. The system default value for the LOG parameter
on the SIGNOFF command is *NOLIST, which instructs i to delete the job log for the interactive job.
There is nothing that you, as system operator, can do to change this default action or to force all
users to sign off using the value *LIST for the LOG parameter, but your Power implementer can do
both.
If you know the full name of a job, and can execute the DSPJOBLOG command while it is active, you
can print its job log by specifying OUTPUT (*PRINT) on the DSPJOBLOG command.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty It is recommended that you use the Operational Assistant, presented later in this unit to help
manage the job logs and automate their cleanup. Using the Operational Assistant, all job logs are
placed in a special output queue called QEZJOBLOG.
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
ó n
.N ci
Topic 2: Work with problems
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 33-8. Topic 2: Work with problems AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Problem determination steps

IBM i
1. Server detects hardware error
n
2. Error notification sent
ó
3. Problem record is created
.N ci
4. System error log
.R a
5. System operator message
C rm
6. Problem analysis starts
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 33-9. Problem determination steps AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The following is an example of the flow when you are managing a problem:
1. The system detects a hardware error.
pr clu
2. An error notification is sent to the system.

3. A problem record is created with configuration information, a system reference code, the name
of the reporting device, and other information.
Ex
4. The system error log records the error.

5. A message is sent to the system operator’s message queue.
6. Problem analysis starts with the message.
The results of problem analysis are automatically stored, along with the collected problem
information. At this point, you can report the problem to your service provider.
Student Notebook
Problem Summary Form

IBM i
Problem Summary Form
n
Date Time
ó
.N ci
PMR or service request no.
Describe problem
Message
.R a
C rm
1 Record the mode.
2 Set the mode to Manual.
3 Place a check on the line below to indicate
which lights on the control panel are on.
to fo
•Power on
•Processor/Active/Activity
•System Attention
ec ivo
Figure 33-10. Problem Summary Form AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
These forms are located in the back of the Handling and Reporting System Problems chapter in the
Basic System Operation, Administration, and Problem Handling manual.
pr clu
Use this form to record problems when problem analysis cannot be run. This form is called the
Problem Summary Form. The information you record on this form can then be sent to your service
provider. There are different forms for different system models.
Follow all of the instructions carefully. It is better to record too much information than not enough.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
USERHELP menu
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 33-11. USERHELP menu AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The options on this menu provide additional information about the system and are useful in
attempting to resolve problems. Use this information when you want to work with a technical
pr clu
support person to resolve a problem.

Option 1. How to use help: This option explains how to display help for:
• Displays and for each field in them
• IBM i commands
Ex
Option 2. Information Assistant options: This option displays a menu where you look at the
following types of information:
• The various sources of information available
• How to comment on information
• The highlights of what is new in this release
You can also start online education, start using the question and answer (Q and A) database, or
work with problems.
Student Notebook
Option 3. Display workstation user: Select this option to display information about who is using
this workstation.
Option 10. Save information to help resolve a problem: Select this option to save sign-on
session information that technical support persons will need later on in order to perform a problem
analysis.
Option 11. Technical support tasks: This menu provides information that can help resolve
n
problems or maintain the system. This information is normally used by a technical support person.
Options are available to:
ó
• Display system operator messages
• Work with problems with the system
.N ci
• Work with program temporary fixes (PTFs)
• Duplicate your screen on another workstation
.R a
• Connect to technical support
C rm
Option 11 is not shown if you do not have the correct authority.
Option 80. Temporary sign-off: Select this option to temporarily sign off from your workstation.
When you sign back on to the same workstation, you should be returned to the display you were
viewing when you signed off.
to fo
You cannot temporarily sign off from a pass-through device. See your system operator to find out
how your Power is set up.
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
TECHHELP menu
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 33-12. TECHHELP menu AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Technical Support Tasks menu provides options to help resolve problems on the system.
Option 1. Display messages for the system operator: Displays all messages in the system
pr clu
operator message queue (QSYSOPR) and allows you to work with them. The system operator
message queue can contain messages for system problems, such as those affecting the printing
out of forms.
Option 10. Work with problems with the system: Allows you to analyze or report problems that
Ex
were not detected by the system.

Option 11. Work with PTFs: Allows you to select commands from the Program Temporary Fix
Commands menu to bypass a defect in a current release of a licensed program.
Option 12. Copy your screen on another display station: Allows you to copy your display station
screens onto another display station so that a technical support person can observe what is
happening and diagnose problems.
Option 13. Stop copying your screen: Stops copying your display station screens onto another
display station.
Student Notebook
Option 20. Connect to technical support: Allows a support organization to access your system
from a remote workstation. It also creates and makes available (varies on) all the devices needed
for that remote support. You must provide a telephone number, a user ID, and a password before
the support person can sign on to your system.
Option 21. Disconnect from technical support: Ends remote support and makes unavailable
(varies off) and deletes all the devices that were created when remote support was started.
n
Option 80. Temporary sign-off: Select this option to temporarily sign off from your workstation.
When you sign back on to the same workstation, you should be returned to the display you were
ó
viewing when you signed off.
• You cannot temporarily sign off from a pass-through device. See your system operator to find
.N ci
out how your Power is set up.
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Option 1 or DSPMSG QSYSOPR

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
F10= Display all F14= Work with Problem F21= Select assistance level
F22= Display list details F24= More keys
ec ivo
Figure 33-13. Option 1 or DSPMSG QSYSOPR AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
To see system operator messages using a 5250 emulation session, use the command to display
the system operator messages. The command is DSPMSG QSYSOPR.
pr clu
Often the only thing wrong on your Power is that there is an unanswered message in one of the
system message queues. Always check for messages when users are experiencing problems.
An asterisk (*) to the left of a message on the QSYSOPR message queue means that problem
analysis can be run for that message. To run problem analysis, position the cursor on the message
Ex
and press F14 (Work with Problem).

The ability to run problem analysis from the Display Messages display is an added value that
comes when using a 5250 emulation session.
Student Notebook
Problem Handling menu

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 33-14. Problem Handling menu AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
You can also use the Problem Handling menu to analyze problems. You can access this menu by
entering go problem on a command line.
pr clu
Option 2. Work with problems: on this menu allows you to view problems that were detected on
your system and to select one for analysis. These problems were either: detected by your system,
by you (the user), or by an application.
Option 4. Display system operator message: allows you to view messages in QSYSOPR.
Ex
Option 5. Display the history log: allows you to view the history log, which offers a high-level
overview of all system activity.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Option 2 or WRKPRB
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
F14=Analyze new problem F15=Sort by Date F18=Work with alerts F24=More keys
ec ivo
Figure 33-15. Option 2 or WRKPRB AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Selecting option 2 from the Problem Handling menu, or entering the WRKPRB command, brings up
the Work with Problems display. This display shows a list of problems called the problem log.
pr clu
As each problem is identified, the system assigns it a unique problem ID, a 10-character identifier
you can use to name a problem and its corresponding record of detailed information.
• The first five characters indicate the date on which the problem was recorded.
• The next five characters indicate the sequence number of the problem record.
Ex
• These characters, combined with the network ID and the control point name are used by the
system to ensure that each problem can be uniquely identified.
Normally, you would select an OPENED problem on the Work with Problems display. Once problem
analysis is run, the status changes to READY. If the problem needs to be sent to IBM for assistance
in solving, you must attach your name and address to it. The status is then changed to PREPARED.
Once problems are prepared, they can be sent to IBM, at which point the status changes to SENT.
Delete old problems on a regular basis by using option 4 (Delete) on the Work with Problems
display or the Delete Problem (DLTPRB) command. Only problems older than the number of days set
in the QPRBHLDITV system value can be deleted in this way.
Student Notebook
Operational Assistant takes care of this cleanup task in addition to cleaning up job logs, as
mentioned earlier.
Option 5 (Display details) on the Work with Problems display allows you to display details about a
problem, while option 6 (Print details) allows you to print them.
Pressing F24 (More keys) displays F14 (Analyze new problem). You can use F14 or the Analyze
Problem (ANZPRB) command to open a new problem of your own.
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Status for a problem

IBM i
• Opened
• Ready
n
• Prepared
ó
• Sent
.N ci
• Answered
• Verified
.R a
• Closed
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 33-16. Status for a problem AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The status of each problem is also shown. The possible status values are:
• OPENED: The problem was identified and a problem record was created.
pr clu
• READY: Problem analysis information was added to the problem record.

• PREPARED: The problem was prepared for reporting.
• SENT: The problem record was sent to a service provider, but the information needed to correct
Ex
the problem has not returned. The information needed is returned at a later time, or a service
representative contacts you.
• ANSWERED: An answer to the service request issued with the problem record, including the
information needed to correct the problem, was returned by the service provider, or answer
information was added by an operator on this system. The answer information might include
PTFs or a list of the possible causes of the problem. If the answer involves PTFs, the list of
PTFs that correct the problem is available for viewing.
• VERIFIED: The problem was resolved by PTFs or equipment repairs, and an operator verified
that the problem was corrected.
Student Notebook
• CLOSED: All work on the problem record is complete. Information about the problem can be
viewed, but no update operations can be performed on this problem record.
A short message or a description of the type of problem the system detected is also shown.
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Analyzing problems with a system reference code

IBM i
n
HMC
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
IBM i Access Client Solutions
Virtual Control Panel
ec ivo
Figure 33-17. Analyzing problems with a system reference code AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
If you have a system failure, a message code might be displayed a message code on the control
panel on the system unit or on the HMC interface, and the Attention light should also be on. Record
pr clu
the code.
A system reference code (SRC) is a set of 8 characters that identifies the system component that
detected the error code and that describes the condition. The first four characters of the SRC
indicate the type of error, while the last four give additional information, which can be any set of
characters.
Ex
You should record the entirety of any SRC. The information gained from the SRC can help the
service representative understand the problem fully and how to fix it.
The error code indicates that a hardware or software error condition occurred in the system.
A System Attention light is turned on when the system detects a hardware error that it cannot
correct. An error can result in the loss or corruption of data.
The error code recorded in the problem log is used to report errors and to perform problem analysis
and resolution. Some error codes have the system automatically collect associated data that is
used to diagnose the problem.
Student Notebook
Some error codes require that you restart the system for recovery, while others might indicate
intermittent errors.
To find SRC code on the HMC you have to:
1. Log on to HMC.
2. Expand System Management and select your system or partition.
n
3. From the tasks (bottom of the screen) expand Serviceability and click Reference Code
History.
ó
4. On the list of SRC find interest code select it by clicking the radio button next to code.
To work with SRC in Virtual Control Panel from IBM i Access Client Solutions:
.N ci
1. Launch IBM i Access Client Solutions.
2. On the System select your system.
.R a
3. On the Console section click Virtual Control Panel.
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
History log
IBM i
• System history
n
– Automatically logs system activity:
ó
• Job information (start/stop times)
• Component failures
.N ci
• Critical system information (such as storage thresholds)
.R a
• Information written to a system log
C rm
– QHST
• Multiple physical files QHST<yyddda>
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 33-18. History log AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Problem analysis: History log

IBM i
QHST *MSGQ DSPLOG
ó n
.N ci
.R a
QHSTLOGSIZ
Collection of messages
summarizing system activity: QHSTyydddn
C rm
• Subsystem information
• Job information
• Device status changes
to fo
• System operator messages
• PTF activity 'A LOG VERSION'
ec ivo
Figure 33-19. Problem analysis: History log AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The system keeps a history log of high-level system activity. The information in this log has to do
with job start and end, device actions, all messages received on the QSYSOPR message queue, and
pr clu
all PTF activity.

The history information is recorded in a message queue called QHST.
• You can display or print this information with the Display Log (DSPLOG) command.
• When the DSPLOG command is run, the message queue contents are placed in a file named
Ex
QHSTyydddn.
• The name of the history log version is made up of QHST, the Julian date on which the log version
was created (yyddd), and a sequence number or letter (x).
• The size of this file is determined by the system value QHSTLOGSIZ (maximum history log
records).
The DSPLOG command has parameters to allow you to view only a portion of the history (starting and
ending date and time).
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Saving and deleting history logs

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 33-20. Saving and deleting history logs AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
History files remain on the system until they are deleted, which can be done by executing the Work
with Files (WRKF) command.
pr clu
When a log version (another name for a history file) reaches the maximum size you specified, the
system simply creates another one, leaves the old one in QSYS, and sends a message to QSYSOPR to
the effect that log version QHSTyydddn is full and should be saved.
What the message does not say is that after the old log version was saved, it should be deleted.
Ex
Leaving old log versions on disk affects disk space use and causes your system saves to take
longer and longer as time goes by.
If you use the Work with Files (WRKF) command for this task, you can both save and delete old
history log versions using this display.
This is yet another task that Operational Assistant can simplify.
Student Notebook
ó n
Topic 3: Other problem determination
.N ci
tools and aids
.R a
C rm
to fo
Powertm with IBM i
ec ivo

Figure 33-21. Topic 3: Other problem determination tools and aids AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Copy screen
IBM i
I need some
assistance.
ó n
.N ci
.R a
STRCPYSCN
C rm
Let me see
what is happening
on yourworkstation.
Remote assistance
or problem determination
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 33-22. Copy screen AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
There is a system function that allows you, while you are at your workstation to monitor what
someone else is doing at another workstation in order to determine the cause of a problem on that
pr clu
workstation.
You can start this function, called Copy Screen, by running the Start Copy Screen (STRCPYSCN)
command and specifying the name of the display device you want to copy and the name of your
own workstation. The user at the device you are copying needs to respond to a message to allow
you to view the job in question. Once they have done that, you are able to follow along while the job
Ex
proceeds. IBM i locks your keyboard, and you are not allowed to enter anything. You remain one
screen behind the copied device.
To end the copy screen function, either person can run the End Copy Screen (ENDCPYSCN)
command. If the user being copied is unable to enter commands, then, at the requesting
workstation, press System Request and enter the ENDCPYSCN command on the line at the bottom of
your display.
Student Notebook
Work with System Status (WRKSYSSTS)

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 33-23. Work with System Status (WRKSYSSTS) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Work with System Status display is another tool that helps you to check for system
performance problems.
pr clu
Unless you always have batch jobs running, advise management whenever CPU utilization is
continually greater than 80%. (Your interactive users have probably already started complaining
about response time.) Note that this percentage is meaningful only if the elapsed time is at least five
minutes.
Ex
To view information gathered over five minute or more, enter the Work with System Status
(WRKSYSSTS) command on a command line, and, as soon as the display appears, press Enter.
After at least five minutes have elapsed, enter the command again. IBM i remembers when you
entered it the first time and calculates CPU utilization over the elapsed time.
Failure to manage spooled files (typically job logs) can cause the number of jobs in the system to
range into the thousands. The more jobs the system has to manage, the less productive work it can
do.
The percentage of permanent and temporary addresses used should never exceed 90. You might
not be able to do anything about this other than notify management.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty For optimum performance, the auxiliary storage percentage used should be kept below 70% or
80%. Again, you might be able to do little except keep management informed.
There is a lot of online help available with this display. If you are responsible for keeping the system
running smoothly (and what system operator is not?). You should take the time to read all of it.
To access the Work with System Status display, you can enter the WRKSYSSTS command on a
command line. You can also enter:
n
1. Option 3 (General system tasks) on the IBM i Main menu
2. Option 2 (Status) on the General System Tasks menu
ó
3. Option 6 (Work with system status) on the Status menu
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Work with Disk Status (WRKDSKSTS)

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 33-24. Work with Disk Status (WRKDSKSTS) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Work with Disk Status (WRKDSKSTS) display shows performance and status information
about the disk units on the system. It displays:
pr clu
• Number of units currently on the system

• Type of each disk unit
• Size of disk space
• Whether the disk is currently on the system
• Percentage of disk space used
Ex
• I/O requests per second

• Average size of the I/O requests
• Average number of read and write requests
• Average amount of data read and written
• Percentage of time the disk is being used
When F11 (Display storage) is pressed, additional information is displayed, such as the ASP status
and protected and unprotected storage information.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Operational Assistant clean up

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 33-25. Operational Assistant clean up AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
You can have Operational Assistant (OA) perform many of the cleanup chores required on your
system. Enter go assist and select option 11 to get started.
pr clu
One caution: OA cleans up by throwing away; it does not save anything. If you have set up
everything correctly, this should not be a problem.
Use option 1 (Change cleanup tasks) from the Cleanup menu to set up or change what you want
OA to clean up. Determine how long you want to keep the various types of objects that OA cleans
Ex
up. The values shown here are reasonable for most systems, but only you can decide what is right
on your system.
Pick a time for OA to run cleanup each day when there is the least amount of activity on your
system. If you implemented a power on and off schedule (or plan to do so), right before power off is
a good time to clean up.
After entering this information with Allow automatic cleanup set to Y, you must still use option 2
(Start cleanup at scheduled time) on the Cleanup Tasks menu before OA starts cleaning up
according your schedule. Another alternative is to choose option 3 (Start cleanup immediately) and
then option 2 to start the schedule for the next cleanup.
Student Notebook
One thing does happen automatically as soon as you specify that you want to allow cleanup on this
display is that OA creates an output queue named QEZJOBLOG and changes the QPJOBLOG
printer file to point to that output queue. This occurs regardless of how many days you want to keep
job logs and other system output on this display.
Chapter 8 in the System Operation Manual contains information on how to implement OA automatic
cleanup. Before you consider letting OA do its cleanup, you should read that chapter very carefully.
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Functions that are automatically cleaned up

IBM i
Messages: Other user objects:

• User messages queues • Calendar entries
n
• Workstation messages queues • Folders (reorganized)
• System operator messages queue • Database files (reorganized)
ó
Printer output: Other system objects:
.N ci
• Output queue QEZJOBLOG (job logs) • History log
• Output queue QEZDEBUG (service and • Problem log and files
.R a
program dumps) • Alerts database
Journals: • PTF save files
C rm
• APD journal • Reclaim temporary storage used by
temporarily decompressed objects
• DSNX journal
• Job accounting data journal
•
to fo
Performance adjustment data journal
• Problem databases journal
• QSNADS journal
• OSI Message Services/400 journal
ec ivo
Figure 33-26. Functions that are automatically cleaned up AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
There are many objects that need to be cleaned up on your system. (Some of these objects, such
as the history log and problem log, were discussed in this unit.)
pr clu
This visual shows those objects that the system can automatically clean up with OA. Little help is
needed from the system operator for OA to perform this cleanup.
Ex
Student Notebook
Automated problem management: DSPSRVA

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm Page down
(Roll up)
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 33-27. Automated problem management: DSPSRVA AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Automated problem management provides automated problem analysis, including automated

problem reporting to the service provider for system-detected problems. All of the analysis and
pr clu
reporting is done without user intervention. Automated problem management is implemented

through service attributes.
The Display Service Attributes (DSPSRVA) command brings up service attributes; the Change
Service Attributes (CHGSRVA) command allows you to change them.
Ex
Automated problem analysis applies mostly to hardware problems but also to some software
problems in LIC. To determine which problems are analyzed automatically and that are not, use the
Work with Problems (WRKPRB) command.
When *YES is specified in the Report problem automatically field, software problems are reported
automatically to the service provider. Your service provider is specified in the Control point name
field. For hardware problem reporting, contact your service provider.
To run the CHGSRVA command, you must be signed on with a user profile that includes *ALLOBJ
special authority.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
PROBLEM2 menu
IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 33-28. PROBLEM2 menu AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Problem Handling (PROBLEM2) menu allows you to select problem-handling tasks
associated with programming problems and system performance.
pr clu
Option 1. Program temporary fix (PTF): Select this option to use PTFs to update IBM-licensed
programs and programs developed by other companies.
Option 2. Work with alerts (WRKALR): Select this option to use alerts to identify problems at local
or remote locations.
Ex
Option 3. Performance tools (STRPFRT): Select this option to work with the performance of your
system.
Option 4. Programming language debug (CMDDBG): Select this option to use commands
associated with solving your programming language errors.
Option 5. Work with support contact information (WRKCNTINF): Select this option to update
your contact information for marketing and technical support.
Option 6. Copy screen image (CMDCPYSCN): Select this option to show the information on your
display station to a specified user at another display station, in order to find and solve a system
problem. You can also send the information on your display station to a database file.
Student Notebook
Option 7. Work with alert descriptions (WRKALRD): Select this option to define alerts. You can
use this function to create, change, and delete your own alert descriptions.
Option 70. Related commands (CMDPRBMGT): Select this option to see commands related to
analyzing and solving problems.
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Network Management menu

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 33-29. Network Management menu AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Network Management (NETWORK) menu allows you to manage and use network
communications:
pr clu
Option 1. Display network attributes (DSPNETA): Select this option to display how a network
was set up to operate.
Option 2. Change network attributes (CHGNETA): Select this option to change network
attributes.
Ex
Option 3. Display sphere of control status (DSPSOCSTS): Select this option to display or print
the current status of the primary and default systems in the sphere of control.
Option 4. Work with sphere of control (WRKSOC): Select this option to use sphere of control to
delete systems, add systems, and display the current status of the systems already defined.
Option 5. Network problem handling (NETPRB): Select this option to identify and solve problems
related to networks.
Option 6. Display APPN information (DSPAPPNINF): Select this option to identify and solve
problems related to Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN).
Student Notebook
Option 7. Work with distribution queues (WRKDSTQ): Select this option to manage and control
jobs on distribution queues.
Option 8. Display distribution services (DSPDSTSRV): Select this option to display or print the
distribution queue descriptions, routing table, or secondary system name table defined for your
local system.
Option 9. Display distribution services log (DSPDSTLOG): Select this option to use the SNADS
n
log to determine when a network problem occurred.
Option 10. TCP/IP administration (TCPADM): Select this option to manage and control jobs using
ó
the TCP/IP to communicate between systems.
Option 14. Configure SNMP agent (CFGTCPSNMP): Select this option to define or change the
.N ci
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) configuration.
Option 70. Related commands (CMDNET): Select this option to see commands related to
.R a
managing and using a communication network.
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Network Problem Handling menu

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 33-30. Network Problem Handling menu AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Network Problem Handling (NETPRB) menu allows you to handle problems dealing with
communication:
pr clu
Option 1. Work with problems (WRKPRB): Select this option to solve network problems.
Option 2. Work with alerts (WRKALR): Select this option to use alerts to identify problems at local
or remote locations. An alert is automatically sent from any Power system in the network to the
system designated to manage problems.
Ex
Option 3. Verify communications (VFYCMN): Select this option to determine whether the
communication links can be established.
Option 4. Network management (NETWORK): Select this option to perform communication tasks
related to managing a network problem handling - help network.
Option 5. Send or receive files (FILETFR): Select this option to perform tasks related to sending
or receiving files from systems with communications.
Option 6. Access a remote system (REMOTE): Select this option to manage and control jobs on
a remote system.
Student Notebook
Option 7. Work with alert descriptions (WRKALRD): Select this option to define alerts. Using
this function, you can create, change, and delete your own alert descriptions.
Option 8. Verify APPC connection (VFYAPPCCNN): Select this option to exchange data packets
between the local location and the specified remote location using Advanced Program-to-Program
Communication (APPC).
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Exercise
IBM i

Use the information listed to perform the exercises.
ó n
Exercise: Problem determination
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
Inform instructor when you complete your exercise.
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or false: The system can be configured to perform automatic

problem determination and reporting to your service provider.
n
2. Which of the following commands display system status information?
ó
a. WRKSYSSTS
.N ci
b. WRKACTJOB
c. WRKDSKSTS
d. WRKUSRJOB
.R a
C rm
3. Which of the following commands display information about
your job?
a. WRKSYSSTS
b. WRKACTJOB
to fo
c. WRKDSKSTS
d. WRKUSRJOB
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 34. Overview of the PTF process

Even though every IBM-licensed program product (LPP) undergoes
extensive testing before being made available for general customer use,
n
problems are still occasionally found once these LPPs are put into
widespread use.
ó
In an ongoing effort to ensure that IBM-licensed program products are as
error-free as possible, IBM creates a program temporary fix (PTF) to correct
.N ci
a problem or potential problem in one of these programs as soon as the
problem is detected and reported.
.R a
Each PTF is designed to fully replace one or more objects in the LPP. PTFs
can be distributed electronically or by CD-ROM. After a PTF is received, it
C rm
must be installed on the system to make it active.

to fo
• Explain what a program temporary fix (PTF) is
• Describe the PTF process
ec ivo
• List and explain the PTF types that are available

• List the commands used to order PTFs
• Explain the different PTF strategies for PTFs
oy s

pr clu
Accountability:
• Exercise
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 34. Overview of the PTF process 34-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
After successfully completing this unit, you should be able to explain what a PTF is and use
information available from IBM to help you know when to order a PTF. You should also be able to
pr clu
order a PTF, receive and install a PTF, display the status of a PTF, and verify that a PTF was
successfully installed.
There are two important things to consider when working with PTFs. First, some functions related to
the installation of PTFs can only be performed while signed on to the system as the security officer
(QSECOFR). No attempt was made in the following discussion to identify those functions. Before
Ex
attempting to perform any function related to PTFs, you should review the appropriate
documentation.
Second, it is highly recommended that you have a current backup of your system. If there is any
doubt at all about the availability of a valid backup, you should take the time to perform a full system
backup before you begin any PTF activity.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
What is a fix or PTF?

IBM i
A fix is a temporary solution to fix or bypass a defect
n
diagnosed by IBM in a current, unaltered release of a
licensed program product (LPP).
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm New Function PTF
to fo
PTF Problem
ec ivo
Figure 34-2. What is a fix or PTF? AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Periodically, bugs are discovered in IBM Licensed Program Products (LPPs) that are installed on
the Power Systems with IBM i. IBM issues a Program Temporary Fix (PTF) once corrections are
pr clu
made to the affected IBM software.

Multiple fixes are bundled together to form a cumulative fix pack, which contains recommended
fixes. The recommendation is that cumulative fix packs should be installed on a quarterly basis for
dynamic environments and less frequently in stable ones. Cumulative fix packs should also be
considered prior to making major hardware or software changes to your environment.
Ex
Fixes play an important part in your system’s maintenance strategy. They give you a chance to
fine-tune your system’s operation, add additional functionality, or improve performance.
Student Notebook
PTF process overview

IBM i
1 Fix needed or due for

cumulative fix pack? 2 Order fix
n
ECS ISO
or
ó
Internet:
.N ci
https://www.ibm.com/support/fixcentral/
3 Load then Apply the fix 4 Verify installation
.R a
ISO • Go LICPGM, option 50,
C rm
or Display log for messages
• DSPPTF
FIX • System i Navigator: Fixes inventory
to fo
5 Test product
ec ivo
Figure 34-3. PTF process overview AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Installed and permanently installed fixes: When a fix is installed to a system, both the original
and new objects are kept on the system. Logically, two copies of the code reside on the machine.
pr clu
This allows you to restart the system using either the original objects or the new objects. Installing a
fix to your system gives you a secure backup while you test the new code. If the system functions
incorrectly using the new code, you simply restart your system using the original code and remove
the defective code.
When a fix is permanently installed on your system, only the new objects exist on the system. A fix
Ex
can be permanently installed when it was used for a period of time and you feel confident that the
chances of it being defective are small.
Available and delayed fixes: Once a fix is loaded on your system, you can choose to apply it right
away or wait for a period of time before applying it. A fix can be made available if the system cannot
run the old and new code at the same time. Alternatively, you can choose to delay applying a fix.
The fix is then applied the next time the Power is restarted.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Types of fixes
IBM i
• Single or HIPER PTF (or fix)
n
• Group PTF (or Group fixes)
ó
• Cumulative PTF packages
.N ci
• Service packs see details next
.R a
• Technology Refresh
C rm
• Technology Refresh Group
• Resave
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 34-4. Types of fixes AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Single PTFs are applied to correct specific reported problems. A high-impact pervasive (HIPER)
PTF is an example of a single PTF which resolves a problem that might have a high impact on the
pr clu
operations of your system or a low-impact pervasive problem that affects most Power Systems with
IBM i.
A PTF group or fix group is a name used to order and manage a group of logically related PTFs.
The advantage of a group fix is that you can use the same PTF number every time to order the
latest and greatest fixes for a specific function.
Ex
Cumulative PTF packages contain fixes for a given release of the IBM i operating system and
associated licensed programs. You should install the entire cumulative PTF package after you first
load or reload the operating system.
Following the General Announcement of IBM i 7.2, IBM i point / modification releases were
replaced by a new release delivery mechanism called a Technology Refresh. A Technology Refresh
is a collection of operating system software that is developed together, packaged together, tested
together, and delivered together as a PTF Group for a base release.
Student Notebook
The Technology Refresh PTF Group contains a Technology Refresh PTF plus related PTFs,
including the most recent pre-GA fixes. The Technology Refresh PTF is Machine Code / Licensed
Internal Code (57xx-999) and is part of the code stream of the base release, for example, IBM i 7.2,
rather than being a separate code stream, as is the case with a point release.
A Resave associated with the Technology Refresh is also available. IBM periodically releases new
Resave media. Resaves are often Machine Code (57xx-999) but occasionally a Resave is made
available for IBM i (formerly known as i5/OS) (57xx-SS1). Resaves of the currently supported
n
releases are valuable to you for several reasons.
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
How to determine available PTFs

IBM i
Cross-referenced summary list
n
Fixes from
ó
PSP information
earlier release
.N ci
in current
release Information
to be reviewed
.R a
Fix summary list
prior to installing
C rm
licensed program,
cumulative fix
package, or Fixes that
hardware affect most
to fo
users
ec ivo
Figure 34-5. How to determine available PTFs AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The first step in the PTF process is determining whether you need a PTF. IBM provides a lot of
information to help you determine what PTFs are available. The information you choose to use
pr clu
depends on what PTF information you need to know and what is going on with your system (for
example, if you just loaded a new release of IBM i operating system).
The cross-referenced summary list shows PTFs from an earlier release that are included in the
current release. This list should be used to make sure you order any PTFs for the new release that
you had at the previous release but are not included in the list.
Ex
Preventive service pack (PSP) is information you should order and review prior to installing a PTF.
PSP information is available for:
• Licensed programs installation
• LIC
• System equipment
• Cumulative PTF packages
• PTFs in error
• HIPER problems
Student Notebook
The fix summary list contains a list of HIPER PTFs that affect most system users. You should use
this list to identify PTFs you might want to order. The fix summary list also identifies the current
cumulative fix pack and what pack each PTF was included in.
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Ordering fixes (1 of 3)
IBM i
Cover letters and individual fixes
n
SNDPTFORD nnnnnnn
ó
• Where nnnnnnn is the fix number
• Cover letter only: Add parameter PTFPART(CVRLTR)
.N ci
Cumulative fix packs
.R a
SNDPTFORD SF99vrm
C rm
• Where vrm is the version, release, and modification level
Cross-reference summary lists
• Refer to documentation for version and release you are moving from
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 34-6. Ordering fixes (1 of 3) AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
As a system administrator, one of your responsibilities is maintaining your Power Systems with IBM
i. Part of the maintenance procedure involves getting, installing, and managing fixes. The topics
pr clu
described below assist you with these tasks.

Before you begin ordering fixes, you should order and apply the latest cumulative PTF package.
When you apply cumulative PTF packages, you reduce the number of fixes that you need to order
and distribute later.
Ex
Plan to regularly visit IBM’s fix page in order to find the fixes available to you, those which affect
most users, those which you need before installing new hardware or licensed programs, and those
that come bundled together; then get the status of the fixes you have ordered. To order fixes
electronically, configure electronic customer support.
The SNDPTFORD command is covered later in this unit.
Student Notebook
IBM i
Preventive service packs (PSPs)
n
For licensed programs: SNDPTFORD SF98vrm
ó
For LIC: SNDPTFORD MF98vrm
.N ci
Fix summary lists
SNDPTFORD SF97vrm
.R a
Status of fix orders
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
IBM i
Visit Fix Central site order and download required PTF’s
n
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
On the Fix Central site you can order and download required PTF’s.
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
PTF group background

IBM i
• What is a PTF group?

– List of PTFs
n
• PTF Groups are created for several reasons:
ó
– Convenient PTF ordering mechanism for fixes for specific
products/functions
.N ci
• Print group
– Method of delivering combinations of fixes and new function:
.R a
• Database
C rm
• Backup Recovery Solutions
• WebSphere Application Server
• PTF groups allow you to manage and release specific PTF
to fo
combinations
– Simplifies development testing and customer support
• Installed with GO PTF, option eight
ec ivo
Figure 34-9. PTF group background AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Groups contain major function that is not included with the Cumulative PTF Package.
• DB2 Web Query for IBM i
pr clu
• WebSphere App Server

• WebSphere MQ for i5/OS
Other PTF Groups
Ex
• Group Hiper
• Group Security
• Technology Refresh
• High Availability
• DB2 for IBM i
• Electronic Services
• Java
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty • TCP/IP Group PTF

• Print Group
• Backup Recovery Solutions
• Performance Tools
• IBM HTTP Server for i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
When to apply group PTFs

IBM i
• Should set frequency that is based on dynamics of the runtime

environment:
n
– Refer to group PTF website for specific recommendations
ó
• http://www-01.ibm.com/support/knowledgecenter/ssw_ibm_i_72/rzam8/rzam8fixgroup.htm
– Intended to be groups for a particular function that should work
.N ci
together in a consistent environment
• http://www-912.ibm.com/s_dir/sline003.nsf/ALLPSPBYREL
.R a
– HIPER Group is a collection of High Impact / Pervasive fixes. Should
C rm
look at this more frequently (At least twice per month)
• Read PSP information to make best determination for HIPERs and
Defectives
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 34-10. When to apply group PTFs AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Fix groups
A PTF group or fix group is a name used to order and manage a group of logically related PTFs.
pr clu
• A PTF group or fix group consists of a list of PTFs that are defined for the purpose of managing
those PTFs as one entity.
• A PTF group can identify other PTF groups called related PTF groups.
Ex
• A related fix group is a fix group that is listed in another fix group. The fixes in the fix group as
well as the fixes in all related fix groups are used to determine the overall status of the fix group.
• The level of the related PTF groups used to resolve the status of the PTF group is the highest
level of the related PTF group that has a status of Installed or Apply at next IPL.
• If no levels of the related PTF group have a status of Installed or Apply at next IPL, the latest
level of the related PTF group that exists on the system are used.
Fix group levels
• Multiple levels are allowed for each PTF group on the system.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty • The number of levels kept for each PTF group is controlled by the PTF group levels service
attribute. Use the Display Service Attributes (DSPSRVA) command to display the current PTF
group levels value.
• The default for the PTF group levels service attribute is 2, which indicates that the system keeps
the previous level of a group when a new PTF group is downloaded or installed.
• Specify the PTF group levels (PTFGRPLVL) parameter on the Change Service Attributes
n
(CHGSRVA) command to set the maximum number of levels of a PTF group to keep on the
system.
ó
• When the number of levels of the PTF group on the system exceeds this value, the lowest
levels of the PTF group are deleted, leaving only the specified number of levels of the PTF
.N ci
group on the system.
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
PTF maintenance strategy: Preventive service

IBM i
• Cumulative fix pack:

– Most PTFs available since start of last release
n
– Order using ECS, or Internet
ó
– Always shipped on DVD or ISO files
– Install every quarter
.N ci
– Should never be more than one cumme package behind current
.R a
• This is the recommended maintenance strategy.
C rm
• Preventive service packs (PSPs):
– PTFs available between releases of cumulative PTF packages
– Order using ECS, or Internet
to fo
– Shipped electronically or by DVD
ec ivo
Figure 34-11. PTF maintenance strategy: Preventive service AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The IBM i operating system program maintenance strategy consists of both preventive and
corrective service.
pr clu
Preventive service helps you avoid problems that were fixed since the start of the current release. It
is implemented through cumulative PTF packages and PSP information.
A cumulative fix pack holds PTFs that contain key changes and improvements which affect most
system users. In the case of PTFs, you should stay current by installing cumulative PTFs frequently.
Ex
Take the time now to prevent problems in the future.

PSP information is available between releases of cumulative PTF packages. It contains a list of
PTFs that are important to your system since the last cumulative PTF package was generated
(refer to the following website):
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
PTF maintenance strategy: Corrective service

IBM i
• Corrections to problems reported to IBM service support
n
• Reported using ECS, or Internet
ó
.N ci
• Received electronically or by CD-ROM
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 34-12. PTF maintenance strategy: Corrective service AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Even if you stay current with the installation of cumulative tapes, you might still have a problem that
requires immediate correction. In this situation, you can use the corrective service program to report
pr clu
the problem to IBM service.

Ex
Student Notebook
OS and LPP PTF installation

IBM i
n
1 LOAD (LODPTF) FIX
ó
BUG
.N ci
2 APPLY TEMPORARILY
.R a
(APYPTF *TEMP)
FIX
BUG
C rm
to fo
3 APPLY PERMANENTLY
(APYPTF *PERM)
FIX
ec ivo
Figure 34-13. OS and LPP PTF installation AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
After a PTF is received, it must be loaded to the appropriate licensed program library. Now both the
old version of the objects, the ones in error, and the new, corrected versions exist in the library.
pr clu
When the PTF is applied temporarily, the new object (corrected) is flagged so that it is used instead
of the old one. At some point in time, when you apply the PTF permanently, the old object (in error)
is deleted.
Temporarily applied PTFs can be removed, but permanently applied PTFs cannot be removed.
Ex
Therefore, you want to apply a PTF temporarily first to make sure it fixes the problem before you
apply it permanently.
Using automatic installation of PTFs, you do not have to worry about loading and applying PTFs; it
is done for you as part of the installation process. Manual installation of PTFs from either the
Program Temporary Fix menu or by using the Load Program Temporary Fix (LODPTF) or Apply
Program Temporary Fix (APYPTF) commands causes PTFs to be applied temporarily. At some point,
you need to apply the PTFs permanently.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
LIC PTFs
IBM i
1 Storage area B active FIX
n
2
LODPTF
BUG
ó
BUG
LICPGM(5770-999) AB
.N ci
3 APYPTF *TEMP
.R a
4 PWRDWNSYS *IMMED
C rm
RESTART(*YES) BUG
BUG FIX
IPLSRC(B) AB
to fo
5 APYPTF *PERM
FIX FIX
ec ivo
AB
Figure 34-14. LIC PTFs AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
LIC fixes are PTFs for the Licensed Internal Code (LIC). There are two types of LIC fixes: delayed
and immediate.
pr clu
Delayed LIC fixes can be applied immediately while running on the A side, or they can be applied
while running on the B side.
Immediate LIC fixes can be applied immediately while running on the A or B storage area. No IPL is
required for applying immediate PTFs.
The system maintains two copies of all LIC on the system. One copy is considered the permanent
Ex
copy and is stored on the Power in storage area A. The other copy is considered the temporary
copy and is stored on system storage B. When the Power is running, it uses the copy that was
selected before the last IPL. Like all other PTFs, LIC fixes must be loaded and applied.
The B storage area is what you normally use. Select the A storage area only if the IPL to the B
storage area fails because of a temporarily applied LIC fix.
You should always LODPTF from the B side. The B side contains both the permanent and
temporary PTFs. When you run LODPTF from the B side, any superseded PTFs are permanently
applied to the A (permanent) side.
The automatic installation of a cumulative PTF package takes care of these A and B IPLs for you.
Student Notebook
When to apply Technology Refresh

IBM i
• Provide support for new hardware and firmware (for example, new I/O
devices or newly announced models)
n
• Support for new virtualization functions
• Take advantage of performance improvements
ó
• New function enablement
.N ci
– http://www-947.ibm.com/systems/support/i/planning/techrefresh/index.html
.R a
C rm
to fo
• Visit the IBM Prerequisite site at:
– https://www-912.ibm.com/e_dir/eserverv7prereq.nsf
ec ivo
Figure 34-15. When to apply Technology Refresh AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Technology Refresh PTF Group, Resave, or PTF can be downloaded, requested on media,
and installed using standard procedures and tools. It is recommended that customers either install
pr clu
the Technology Refresh PTF Group plus the most recent Cumulative PTF package, or the
Technology Refresh Resave plus the most recent Cumulative PTF package plus the Technology
Refresh PTF Group. When a Technology Refresh is installed, the system release level, for
example, 7.2, does not change.
It is a best practice to keep the system up to date with the latest Technology Refresh installed, to
Ex
avoid unnecessary down time. To determine the Technology Refresh level needed for a specific
hardware feature code, refer to the IBM Prerequisite tool. The PTF Cover Letter, or Preventive
Server Planning (PSP) information, will identify whether a Technology Refresh is a requisite for that
PTF. If a PTF has a Technology Refresh requisite, the Technology Refresh PTF must be
permanently applied before the PTF that requires it can be loaded.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
When to install a Resave

IBM i
• What Resaves provide:

– New Hardware Support (from CECs all the way to disk drives)
n
– Fixes for critical problems involving install of systems
ó
• When to obtain a Resave for DR purposes
.N ci
– When the IBM prerequisite site defines a particular resave as the
correct prerequisite for the listed features of an MES upgrade
.R a
– When a HIPER PTF indicates installation will fail for your system
without the PTF permanently applied to the installation media
C rm
• Obtain the resave containing the PTF when available
• See http://www-947.ibm.com/systems/support/i/planning/resave/
• When to install a Resave
to fo
– When the IBM prerequisite site defines a particular resave as the
correct prerequisite for the listed features of an MES upgrade
– Installation of a new partition having particular feature prerequisites
ec ivo
Figure 34-16. When to install a Resave AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
IBM periodically releases new Resave media. Resaves are often Machine Code (57xx-999) but
occasionally a Resave is made available for IBM i (57xx-SS1).
pr clu
Resaves of the currently supported releases are valuable to you for several reasons. Resaves
provide:
• Support for new hardware (for example, new I/O devices or newly announced models)
• Critical fixes in the system installation media (for example, install or IPL path fixes)
Ex
• A reduced “total installation time” by reducing the time to install cumulative PTF packages
Resaves are created by PTFs being permanently applied and new installation media is created.
Each Resave goes through significant installation and regression testing to ensure optimal system
quality.
Situations where a customer should use the Resave media include when:
• A new partition containing newly purchased hardware is to be installed
• Preparing to upgrade to new processor models or features
Student Notebook
• Using an alternative IPL device for recovery for new processor models or feature
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or false: A PTF or a fix is a temporary solution or bypass

of a defect in an IBM licensed program.
ó n
2. Which of the following is not one of the fix types available
.N ci
from IBM?
a. Single fix
.R a
b. Cumulative package
c. Temporary correctional fix
C rm
d. Service pack
3. True or false: The recommendation is that cumulative fix

to fo
packs should only be installed before you upgrade the
software on your system.
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Unit summary
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 35. PTFs with 5250 emulation

In this unit, we review the commands used to order, receive, and install a
PTF. We discuss the information contained in a PTF cover letter. We also
n
look at how you display the status of a PTF. Lastly We look at how you verify
a PTF installation.
ó
.N ci
.R a
• Display the PTF menu
• Explain the command used for ordering PTFs
C rm
• Explain the contents of a PTF cover letter
• Display PTF status
• Verify PTF installation
to fo
Accountability:
ec ivo
• Exercise
oy s
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 35. PTFs with 5250 emulation 35-1
Student Notebook
Unit objectives
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Working with PTFs

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 35-2. Working with PTFs AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Program Temporary Fix menu provides easy access to all PTF functions. You can access this
menu by entering Go ptf on a command line or by selecting option 7 from the IBM i Main menu
pr clu
and then option 6 from the Define or Change the System menu.
The following explains the options on the Program Temporary Fix menu and the commands that
options 1 - 6 prompt for. Options 7 and 8 do not have commands associated with them.
1. Load a program temporary fix
Ex
This option allows you to select the PTFs to load. It prompts for the Load a Program Temporary
Fix (LODPTF) command.
2. Apply a program temporary fix
This option allows you to select the PTFs to apply to a licensed program. It prompts for the
Apply Program Temporary Fix (APYPTF) command.
Student Notebook
3. Copy a program temporary fix

This option allows you to select PTFs to copy from a tape, optical device or save file to another
tape, optical device or save file. It prompts for the Copy Program Temporary Fix (CPYPTF)
command.
4. Remove a program temporary fix
This option allows you to select PTFs to remove. It prompts for the Remove Program Temporary
n
Fix (RMVPTF) command.
5. Display a program temporary fix
ó
This option allows you to select PTFs that are installed on your IBM i to display. It prompts for
.N ci
the Display Program Temporary Fix (DSPPTF) command.
6. Order a program temporary fix
.R a
This option allows you to select PTFs to order. It prompts for the Send PTF Order (SNDPTFORD)
command.
C rm
7. Install a program temporary fix from a list
This option displays a list of PTFs. You can select PTFs from this list to install to selected
IBM-supplied LPPs.
8. Install a program temporary fix package (INSPTF)
to fo
This option allows you to install a PTF package.
9. Copy PTF Cover Letter (CPYPFTCVR)
10. Display PTF cover Letter (DSPPTFCVR)
ec ivo
11. Delete a program temporary fix (DLTPTF)

Select this option to select the PTFs to delete.
12. Work with PTF groups (WRKPTFGRP)
oy s
Select this option to select the PTF groups to display.

13. Copy PTF group (CPYPTFGRP)
pr clu
Select this option to select the PTF groups to copy.

14. Related commands (CMDPRBMGT)
Select this option to manage system-related problems.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Ordering a fix using ECS

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 35-3. Ordering a fix using ECS AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
If the ECS line is configured, use option 6 on the Program Temporary Fix menu or prompt for the
Send PTF Order (SNDPTFORD) command to display the Send PTF Order (SNDPTFORD) display. If the
pr clu
ECS line is not configured, you can order PTFs from an IBM service representative by the Internet.
• Delivery method (DELIVERY): If this parameter is set to the default *LINKONLY and you try to
order a PTF that is too large to be delivered through ECS, the command fails. You should
change this parameter to *ANY. This allows the command to complete and force an order for the
file on your selected media type.
Ex
• Order (ORDER): If this parameter is set to the default *REQUIRED, the PTF and its requisite
PTFs are ordered. If you want to order the PTF without its requisite PTFs, you should change
this parameter to *PTFID.
• Reorder (REORDER): This parameter specifies whether a PTF that is currently loaded,
applied, or on order should be ordered again.
• Check PTF (CHKPTF): This parameter specifies whether checking is performed on the service
requester system to determine whether PTFs are ordered based on whether the PTF product is
installed or supported.
Student Notebook
Ordering a fix using the Internet

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 35-4. Ordering a fix using the Internet AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
You can also order PTFs using the Internet. On the website you can order also firmware to Power
server or HMC.
pr clu
https://www-933.ibm.com/support/fixcentral/
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Receiving a fix
IBM i
QGPL
n
ECS/Internet
QSFnnnnn
ó
.N ci
.R a
IMGCLG
OR
C rm
ISO File
DVD
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 35-5. Receiving a fix AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Fixes can either be received through the ECS line, from the Internet, or by DVD. You specify the
medium you want the PTF shipped on. If a PTF is too large to be sent through the ECS line can be
pr clu
sent through Internet, or are sent on DVD (additional cost).

When a PTF is received by way of the ECS line or the Internet, can be stored as a save file in the
QGPL library or to image catalog.
Additionally you can order PTF by Internet and download to your PC then upload to Power server
Ex
using FTP locally (this is more security option). After you can load all files to image catalog and
install it.
Student Notebook
Sample PTF cover letter

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 35-6. Sample PTF cover letter AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
A cover letter exists for each PTF. A cover letter contains descriptive information about the PTF (for
example, the system and models for which the PTF is valid, the version, release, and modification
pr clu
number for which the PTF is valid, the library the PTF is intended for, and any prerequisite and
requisite PTFs) and any special installation instructions. When you order a PTF using the
SNDPTFORD command, you can use the PTFPART parameter to specify that you want both the PTF
and the cover letter or just the cover letter.
You can search, display, and order PTFs or cover letters from the Internet. You can search for PTFs
Ex
by PTF number, OS release, or search word. You can also print the cover letters from your browser.
There is a lot of information in a cover letter, not all of which you need; however, there is one piece
of information, the licensed program number, which might be required to install the PTF.
If you order PTF through Internet, the cover letter is downloaded to the PC automatically.
One more note or recommendation is - read the cover letter!
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Copy the cover letter to IBM i

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 35-7. Copy the cover letter to IBM i AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Copy Program Temporary Fix Cover Letter (CPYPTFCVR) command copies PTF cover letters
from tape or optical media into file QAPZCOVER in library QGPL. Each cover letter contains information,
pr clu
such as problem description, correction, and special instructions.

Once the cover letter is in QGPL/QAPZCOVER, you can use option 10 (Display cover letter) on the
Program Temporary Fix menu to display the cover letter.
If you receive your PTFs on DVD. A shipping information letter is included with the DVD that
Ex
contains, among other things, the PTFs contained on the DVD. Each PTF on the DVD might have a
cover letter. Each letter must be individually copied to QAPZCOVER using the Copy PTF Cover Letter
(CPYPTFCVR) command.
Student Notebook
Display / Print the cover letter

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 35-8. Display / Print the cover letter AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Display Program Temporary Fix Cover Letter (DSPPTFCVR) command shows the PTF cover
letters for a specified product.
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Option 8: Install PTF package

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 35-9. Option 8: Install PTF package AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Use option 8 on the PTF menu to automatically install all PTFs from a DVD, image catalog/virtual
OPT, or tape or other package of PTFs. If the PTFs were received electronically, type *service as
pr clu
the Device.
The Install Options for Program Temporary Fixes display lets you choose the device and automatic
IPL option for loading and applying the program temporary fixes (PTFs). You can also specify
whether you want to prompt for additional PTF media, install additional PTFs from *SERVICE, and
whether other installation options are to be used.
Ex
The PTFs you have selected are loaded and temporarily applied. Any temporarily applied PTFs
being superseded are permanently applied.
• Device - Type the name of the device from which PTFs are to be installed.
• *SERVICE - Specifies to install PTFs that you have received electronically from the service
support system.
Student Notebook
• *NONE - Specifies to skip loading PTFs. Any PTFs already loaded on the system are applied.
This special value is used after the IPL following an incomplete PTF installation. Special
handling PTFs in a PTF group being installed must be applied and active before the remaining
PTFs in the PTF group can be applied.
Automatic IPL - Indicates whether to automatically perform an IPL after the installation process
completes.
n
Prompt for media - Type the number of the option to specify whether you will be prompted for
additional PTF volume sets and load PTFs from *SERVICE after loading PTFs from the device.
ó
Note: This parameter is ignored if *SERVICE or *NONE is specified for the device.
Restart type - Specify the point from which the initial program load (IPL) restarts when Y is
.N ci
specified for Automatic IPL. The initial value for this field is set from the IPL options information. To
change the default for the Restart type field, use the Change IPL Attributes (CHGIPLA) command.
.R a
Note: The value *SYS is recommended to save time during the IPL.
Other options - Specify whether other installation options are processed. Other installation options
C rm
include choosing PTFs to omit from processing, specifying the type of PTFs to install, and
specifying how immediate PTFs should be applied.
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Option 7: Install PTF off a list

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 35-10. Option 7: Install PTF off a list AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
Use option 7 on the PTF menu to install PTFs for one or more licensed programs. When the Install
Program Temporary Fixes display appears, choose option 1 for each licensed program for which
pr clu
you want PTFs installed, and then press Enter.

After you respond to a confirmation display, the Install Options for Program Temporary Fixes display
appears (the display on the previous page).
Ex
Student Notebook
Install PTF: Similar to PTF menu option 7

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 35-11. Install PTF: Similar to PTF menu option 7 AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
The Install Program Temporary Fix (INSPTF) command allows the user to load and apply PTFs for
multiple products with a single command. PTF groups are copied to the system when they do not
pr clu
already exist on the system or when the level of the PTF group on the media is higher than the level
of the PTF group that exists on the system. If LICPGM(*ALL) is specified, any special handling
PTFs listed in PTF groups are used during the installation.
The OMIT and HIPER parameters are supplied to allow the user of the INSPTF command to be
more selective. These parameters apply only to the PTF loading activity. Any PTF already loaded
Ex
on the system are applied.

The INSTYP parameter controls the apply of the PTFs. Using the different special values allows
immediate and delayed apply combinations as well as starting an IPL.
INSPTF does not support loading PTFs from tape for products that have multiple releases of the
base option installed on the system.
If PTFs for such a product exist on the tape, the INSPTF does not load those PTFs and returns an
error.
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Display PTF Status

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 35-12. Display PTF Status AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
To determine the status of PTFs for a specific licensed program or for all licensed programs
installed on, or on order for, your system, you can specify option 5 (Display a program temporary
pr clu
fix) on the Program Temporary Fix menu.

You can also prompt (PF4) for the Display PTF Status (DSPPTF) command. Option 5 (Display PTF
details) displays all available details for a specific PTF.
Ex
Student Notebook
Verifying PTF installation

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 35-13. Verifying PTF installation AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
You should verify that your PTFs installed correctly. To do this, type Go licpgm on a command line.
Use PGDWN key to reach this menu option, or on the Work with Licensed Programs menu, type
pr clu
50.
On the Display Install History display, the Start date and Start time indicate the date and time that
the first message for the latest installation process was sent to the history file (QHST). After entering
the start date and time and pressing Enter, the Display History Log Contents display appears
showing both successful and unsuccessful PTF installation messages.
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or false: The GO PTFMNU command displays the PTF

menu.
ó n
2. Which of the following is the command used to order a PTF?
.N ci
a. CPYPTFCVR
b. INSPTF
.R a
c. SNDPTFORD
d. DSPPTFCVR
C rm 3. True or false: PTFs can be received either electronically or

to fo
on tape.
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s

pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Unit summary
IBM i

n
ó
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Unit 36. Class summary

This unit summarizes what was covered in class.
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Unit 36. Class summary 36-1
Student Notebook
Course summary
IBM i
Having completed this course, you should be able to:

• Perform Power i system operator functions
n
– Use the online help and references
ó
– Send, display, and reply to messages
.N ci
– Monitor and control job and output queues, jobs, and devices
– Start and stop the operating system
.R a
– Create and change user profiles
– Use authorization lists and group profiles
C rm
– Manage system devices, user display stations, and printers
– Save and restore objects and libraries
– Monitor job and history logs
to fo
– Diagnose a system problem
– Order, receive, and apply PTFs
ec ivo
Figure 36-1. Course summary AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty
Additional education
IBM i
• Advanced System Operator's Workshop for IBM i:

– Classroom course AS27G
n
– Three days
ó
– Prepares system operator for additional system operator
responsibilities
.N ci
• IBM i Administration:
.R a
– Classroom course OL19G
– Five days
C rm
– Prepares user for system administrator responsibilities
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 36-2. Additional education AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
Class evaluation
IBM i
n
Please complete Student Evaluation form
ó
.N ci
Use class number _______
.R a
Use course number _______
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
Figure 36-3. Class evaluation AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
Uempty

IBM i
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm See you in the next class in
to fo
your training path!
ec ivo
Figure 36-4. System Operator Workshop for IBM i AS24G11.0
Notes:
oy s
pr clu
Ex
Student Notebook
ó n
.N ci
.R a
C rm
to fo
ec ivo
oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
AP
Appendix A. Checkpoint solutions
Unit 1, "Power Systems and IBM i concepts and overview"
Solutions for Figure 1-28, "Checkpoint (1 of 2)," on page 1-34
ó n
Checkpoint solutions (1 of 2)
.N ci
IBM i
1. True or false: Security is built into the operating system.
.R a
The answer is true.
C rm
2. The OS on this system, at 7.2, is now known as which of the
following?
a. OS/400
to fo
b. i5/OS
c. IBM i
d. All of the above
ec ivo
The answer is IBM i.
3. True or false: The data administrator tells the system

specifically where data is stored on the disk drives.
oy s
The answer is false.

pr clu

Ex
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Appendix A. Checkpoint solutions A-1

Student Notebook
IBM i
n
4. Which of the following are found in every partition?
a. Operating system
ó
b. Memory
c. Disk
.N ci
d. All of the above
The answer is all of the above.
.R a
5. True or false: Linux is supported as a guest operating system
C rm
of a host IBM i partition.
The answer is true.
to fo
6. True or false: Capacity on demand is managed by the LAN
console.
ec ivo
Unit 2, "Reference material and support"

oy s
No checkpoint solutions in this unit.

pr clu
Ex
A-2 System Operator Workshop for IBM i © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016
V10.1
Student Notebook
AP Unit 3, "Overview of 5250 emulation and help"
n
IBM i
ó
1. True or false: Any menu can be accessed on the system with
the GO command.
.N ci
The answer is True.
2. Which function key is used to access Help?
.R a
a. F1
C rm
b. F3
c. F9
d. F12
The answer is F1.
to fo
3. Which function key is used to retrieve a command that was
previously entered?
a. F1
ec ivo
b. F3
c. F9
d. F12
The answer is F9.
oy s

pr clu
Ex

Student Notebook
IBM i
n
4. True or false: The default assistance level for a system is set
with a system value by the system administrator.
ó
The answer is true.
.N ci
5. True or false: The Operational Assistant menu supports
functions performed by a user, a system operator, or by a
.R a
system administrator?
The answer is true.
C rm
6. True or false: The command entry display shows what
commands have been entered since you signed on to the
to fo
system.
The answer is true.
ec ivo

oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
AP Unit 4, "Overview of IBM i Access Client Solutions"
n
IBM i
ó
1. True or false: IBM i Access Client Solutions does not require
any additional software to be installed on the PC.
.N ci
.R a
2. IBM i Access Client Solutions allows you to manage which of
C rm
the following?
a. 5250 emulator
b. Printer emulator
c. LAN/HMC Console session
to fo
d. All of the above
ec ivo
3. True or false: You can restrict some tasks for user with the
IBM i Access Client Solutions.
The answer is true.
oy s

pr clu
Ex

Student Notebook
IBM i
n
4. True or false: IBM i Access Client Solutions allows change
user password for many partitions.
ó
The answer is true.
.N ci
5. Which of the following customize options allow you to control
.R a
what is displayed in the right pane when you click a function?
a. HMC
C rm
b. IVM
c. CNN
d. ASMI
to fo
The answers are HMC, IVM, and ASMI.
6. True or false: IBM i Access Client Solutions is available in 32-

bit or 64-bit.
ec ivo
The answer is true.

oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
AP Unit 5, "Overview of IBM Navigator for i"
n
IBM i
ó
1. True or false: IBM Navigator for i requires that additional
software is installed on the PC.
.N ci
.R a
2. True or false: IBM Navigator for i is included in the OS?
C rm
The answer is true.
3. Which of the following is not included in IBM Navigator for i?

a. Basic Operations
to fo
b. Work Management
d. Management Central
ec ivo
The answer is Management Central.

oy s

pr clu
Ex

Student Notebook
IBM i
n
4. Which of the following jobs must be running on your system in order
for a user to connect to your system with IBM Navigator for i?
ó
a. Admin
b. Admin2
.N ci
c. Admin3
d. Qhttpsvr
The answer is Admin2.
.R a
C rm
5. True or false: In the browser, the user should always designate port
2005 when they start the connection request.
to fo
6. True or false: In IBM Navigator for i, you cannot customize the startup
page.
The answer is true.
ec ivo

oy s
pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
AP Unit 6, "Messaging concepts"
Solutions for Figure 6-6, "Checkpoint," on page 6-7
n
Checkpoint solutions
IBM i
ó
1. Which of the following message types is requesting a reply?
a. Informational
b. Questioning
.N ci
c. Inquiry
d. User
The answer is inquiry.
.R a
2. When you create a user profile, which of the following is automatically created?
C rm
to fo
The answer is user message queue.
3. Which message type interrupts a user who is signed on to a 5250 emulation

session?
a. Informational
ec ivo
b. Inquiry
c. Workstation
d. Break
The answer is break.
oy s

pr clu
Ex

Student Notebook
Unit 7, "Messaging using 5250 emulation"
n
IBM i
ó
1. True or false: You can allocate an application message queue when you sign on.
The answer is true.
.N ci
2. Which of the following delivery value directs the system to take the default reply to
a message?
.R a
a. Hold
b. Break
C rm
c. Notify
d. Default
The answer is default.
to fo
3. When the system creates a workstation device description, which of the following is
automatically created?
ec ivo

The answer is workstation message queue.
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
AP Solutions for Figure 7-17, "Checkpoint (2 of 2)," on page 7-20
IBM i
n
4. True or false: You can send a message to any user on the
system.
ó
The answer is True.
.N ci
5. Which message type interrupts a user who is signed on to a
5250 emulation session?
.R a
a. Informational
C rm
b. Inquiry
c. Workstation
d. Break
The answer is break.
to fo
6. True or false: The default mode for a message queue is
*Notify.
ec ivo
The answer is True.

oy s
pr clu
Ex

Student Notebook
Unit 8, "Messaging with IBM Navigator for i"
n
IBM i
ó
1. True or false: Any type of message can be sent with IBM
Navigator for i.
.N ci
The answer is true.
.R a
2. When using IBM Navigator for i, you can send a message to
C rm
which of the following?
a. Users
b. Workstations
c. System operator
to fo
d. All of the above
ec ivo
3. True or false: A break message interrupts a user who is

signed on using IBM Navigator for i.
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
AP Unit 9, "CL command concepts"
n
IBM i
ó
1. True or false: A user must memorize the format of a
.N ci
.R a
2. True or false: CL commands can be specified within a
C rm
program.
The answer is true.
3. True or false: Parameters are used to customize a CL

to fo
command.
The answer is true.
ec ivo
oy s

pr clu
Ex

Student Notebook
Unit 10, "CL commands with 5250 emulation"
n
IBM i
ó
1. True or false: On this system, a user must memorize the format of a
.N ci
.R a
2. Which function key is used to provide prompt assistance with a
command?
C rm
a. F1
b. F3
c. F4
d. F9
to fo
The answer is F4.
3. Which function key is used to retrieve a command?

a. F1
ec ivo
b. F3
c. F4
d. F9
The answer is F9.
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
IBM i
n
4. True or false: The F9 and F10 keys show the same additional
parameters.
ó
.N ci
5. Which menu provides assistance when looking for a
command?
.R a
a. Main
C rm
b. User
c. Major
d. Command
The answer is major.
to fo
6. True or false: The F11 function key is used to switch between
command keywords or Value choices.
ec ivo
The answer is true.

oy s
pr clu
Ex

Student Notebook
Unit 11, "Concepts: Object, library, and the IFS"
n
IBM i
ó
1. True or False: An object is anything that exists in storage and on
which operations can be performed.
.N ci
The answer is true.
.R a
2. A directory or library is a special object that has a named set of objects
associated with it and is used to group objects. (Select all that apply.)
C rm
a. Directory
b. Link
c. Library
d. File system
to fo
The answers are directory or library.
3. A PC object is stored in which of the following file systems in the IFS?

a. Root
ec ivo
b. QDLS
c. QSYS.LIB
d. QOPT
The answer is root.
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
IBM i
n
4. True or false: A library list is used by the system when you
use simple naming to work with an object.
ó
The answer is true.
.N ci
5. The IBM i operating system is stored in the QSYS system
.R a
library.
a. QUSRSYS
C rm
b. QGPL
c. QSPL
d. QSYS
to fo
The answer is QSYS.
6. True or false: All libraries on the system are in the system

library QGPL.
ec ivo

oy s
pr clu
Ex

Student Notebook
Unit 12, "Object management with 5250 emulation"
n
IBM i
ó
1. True or false: The Create Duplicate Object command can copy a file.
The answer is true.
.N ci
2. Which command is used to show a list of objects based on your
.R a
search criteria?
a. DSPOBJ
C rm
b. LSTOBJ
c. SHWOBJ
d. WRKOBJ
The answer is WRKOBJ.
to fo
3. The command that is used to display an object’s description is?
a. DSPOBJD
b. LSTOBJD
ec ivo
c. SHWOBJD
d. WRKOBJD
The answer is DSPOBJD.
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
IBM i
n
4. True or false: You cannot see a list of the directories on your
system when using a 5250 emulation session.
ó
.N ci
5. The CRTDUPOBJ command is used to copy a single object or
a group of objects.
.R a
a. DSPOBJD
C rm
b. RSTOBJ
c. CRTDUPOBJ
d. WRKOBJ
The answer is CRTDUPOBJ.
to fo
6. True or false: The WRKLIB command shows you a list of all
the libraries that you have authority to use.
ec ivo
The answer is true.

oy s
pr clu
Ex

Student Notebook
Unit 13, "Object management with IBM Navigator for i"
n
IBM i
ó
1. True or false: IBM Navigator for i does not provide an option
to manage users.
.N ci
.R a
2. Which task in IBM Navigator for i provides the link to run a
C rm
command?
a. System
b. Work management
c. Configuration and service
to fo
d. Security
The answer is system.
ec ivo
3. True or false: Prompting a command is not available with IBM

Navigator for i.
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
IBM i
n
4. Which of the following does not provide an option to create a
library?
ó
a. System
b. Database
.N ci
c. File system
d. Network
.R a
The answer is network.
C rm
5. True or false: IBM Navigator for i provides a graphical version
of the copy file command.
The answer is true.
to fo
6. True or false: Using IBM Navigator for i does not display a list
of libraries.
ec ivo

oy s
pr clu
Ex

Student Notebook
Unit 14, "Introduction to work management"
n
IBM i
ó
1. True or false: A job is an environment that enables work to be performed on
the system.
.N ci
The answer is true.
.R a
2. Which of the following is not considered a user job?
a. Interactive
C rm
b. Batch
c. Autostart
d. Spooling
The answer is spooling.
to fo
3. When a batch job is submitted, it is placed in a job queue.
a. System memory
b. Subsystem
ec ivo
c. Job queue
d. Output queue
The answer is job queue.
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
IBM i
n
4. True or false: The highest priority in a job queue is priority
nine.
ó
.N ci
5. The system job that generates a print report runs in which of
the following subsystems?
.R a
a. QHTTP
C rm
b. QINTER
c. QBATCH
d. QSPL
The answer is QSPL.
to fo
6. True or false: An interactive job is placed in a job queue when
it is submitted.
ec ivo

oy s
pr clu
Ex

Student Notebook
Unit 15, "Work management with 5250 emulation"
n
IBM i
ó
1. True or false: The name of the default job description is
QDFTJOBD.
.N ci
The answer is true.
.R a
2. The command that is used to display a job description is:
C rm
a. DSPUSRPRF
b. WKRJOBD
c. DSPJOBD
d. DSPOBJD
to fo
The answer is DSPJOBD.
3. True or false: The library list is one of the parameters that are
ec ivo
specified in a user profile.

oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
AP Unit 16, "Job control with 5250 emulation"
n
IBM i
ó
1. The Work with User Jobs command allows you to select which of the
following types of jobs?
a. Active
.N ci
b. Job queue
c. Output queue
d. All of these
.R a
The answer is all of these.
C rm
2. On the Work with User Jobs display, which of the following options
show you all of the characteristics of a job?
a. Option 2: Change
b. Option 5: Work with
to fo
c. Option 7: Display messages
d. Option 8: Work with spool files
e. The answer is Option 5: Work with.
ec ivo
3. True or false: Option 3: Hold, on the Work with Active Jobs display and
on the Work with User Jobs performs the same function.
The answer is true.
oy s

pr clu
Ex

Student Notebook
Unit 17, "Job control with IBM Navigator for i"
n
IBM i
ó
1. True or false: IBM Navigator for i allows you to display information relating to your
jobs on the system.
.N ci
The answer is true.
2. The Active jobs link is available under which of the following tasks in IBM Navigator
.R a
for i?
a. Basic Operations
C rm
b. Work Management
d. Users and Groups
The answer is Work Management.
to fo
3. Which task is used to display details about subsystems running on your system?
a. Basic Operations
b. Work Management
ec ivo

d. Users and Groups
The answer is Work Management.
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
AP Unit 18, "Print concepts"
n
IBM i
ó
1. Which of the following are created on the system when a printer is connected
(Select all that apply)?
.N ci
a. Device description
b. Message queue
c. Output queue
.R a
d. Printer profile
The answers are device description and output queue.
C rm
2. What is the first place that the system looks to determine where to send your
output file?
a. Printer device file
to fo
b. Job description
c. User profile
d. System value
The answer is printer device file.
ec ivo
3. True or false: The system administrator can create an output queue on the system
with the Create Output Queue (CRTOUTQ) command.
The answer is true.
oy s

pr clu
Ex

Student Notebook
Unit 19, "Print control with 5250 emulation"
n
IBM i
ó
1. Which command is used to work with your spool files?
a. WRKPRTF
b. WRKSPLF
.N ci
c. WRKJOBF
d. WRKPRT
.R a
The answer is WRKSPLF.
C rm
2. Which option is used to delete an individual report (a spooled file) on
the Work with Output Queues screen?
a. Option 2: Change
b. Option 4: Delete
to fo
d. Option 8: Attributes
The answer is Option 4: Delete.
ec ivo
3. True or false: Changing the spool file attributes is all that you have to
do for an expired file to be deleted on the system.
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
AP Unit 20, "IBM i Access Client Solutions Printer Output"
n
IBM i
ó
1. True or false: IBM i Access Client Solutions provides an option that
allows you to see the output that is generated by another user.
.N ci
The answer is true.
2. Under which of the following is the Printer Output branch found?
.R a
a. General
b. Database
C rm
c. Users and Groups
d. Management
The answer is general.
to fo
3. Which of the following actions can be performed for a spoolfile from
the Printer output?
a. Download
b. View
ec ivo
c. Download and View

d. All of the above
oy s

pr clu
Ex

Student Notebook
Unit 21, "Print control with IBM Navigator for i"
n
IBM i
ó
1. True or false: You can export printer output as a PDF in IBM
Navigator for i.
.N ci
The answer is true.
.R a
2. Which Properties option would display which system the
printer output came from?
C rm
a. Origin / Expiration
b. Layout
c. Other 1
d. Other 2
to fo
The answer is origin / expiration.
3. True or false: You can view the output for a specific job by
ec ivo
clicking Work Management and then clicking Active Jobs.

The answer is true.
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
IBM i
n
4. True or false: You can email spool files or keep them as
records.
ó
The answer is true.
.N ci
5. When using printer load balancing, what is the maximum
number of writers that can be attached to an output queue?
.R a
a. 5
C rm
b. 8
c. 10
d. 15
The answer is 10.
to fo
6. True or false: You can delete an expired spool file.
The answer is true.
ec ivo

oy s
pr clu
Ex

Student Notebook
Unit 22, "Starting and stopping the system"
n
IBM i
ó
1. True or false: You can use the Change IPL Attributes command to
control the time it takes for your system to perform an IPL.
.N ci
The answer is true.
.R a
2. Which type of IPL requires an operator to complete the power-on
process?
a. Attended
C rm
b. Unattended
c. Automatic
d. Restart
The answer is attended.
to fo
3. Which type of IPL is used to reload your system from tape after a disk
failure?
a. A
ec ivo
b. B
c. C
d. D
The answer is D.
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
AP Unit 23, "System security concepts"
n
IBM i
ó
1. True or false: Environment variables are used to control the operations
of the system.
.N ci
2. Which of the following is information that is not stored in a user’s
.R a
profile?
a. Password
C rm
b. User class
c. List of owned objects
d. System values
The answer is system values.
to fo
3. Which of the following user types is assigned all of the system
privileges?
a. Programmer
ec ivo
b. System operator
c. Security administrator
d. Security officer
The answer is security officer.
oy s

pr clu
Ex

Student Notebook
Unit 24, "System security with 5250 emulation"
n
IBM i
ó
1. Which of the following options do you need to take on the Work with User Profiles
display to enable a user’s profile?
.N ci
a. Option 1: Create
b. Option 2: Change
.R a
The answer is Option 2: Change.
C rm
2. When working with user profiles, which option shows all of the objects to which a
user is authorized?
a. Option 1: Create
b. Option 2: Change
to fo
The answer is Option 12: Work with owned objects.
ec ivo
3. True or false: The user who creates an object is automatically designated as the
owner of an object.
The answer is true.
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
AP Unit 25, "System security with IBM Navigator for i"
n
IBM i
ó
1. True or false: IBM Navigator for i allows you to display all of the
objects owned by a user.
.N ci
The answer is true.
2. Under which of the following tasks do you find the link to change your
.R a
password in IBM Navigator for i?
a. System
C rm
b. Work Management
c. Security
d. Users and Groups
The answer is system.
to fo
3. Which of the following is not one of the authorization views you can
display for an object?
a. Basic
ec ivo
b. Details
c. Columns
d. Location
The answer is location.
oy s

pr clu
Ex

Student Notebook
Unit 26, "System configuration overview"
n
IBM i
ó
1. True or false: The system ships with automatic configuration turned
off.
.N ci
.R a
2. Which of the following is not considered to create CD/DVD device?
a. CRTDEVDSP
C rm
b. CRTDEVPRT
c. CRTDEVTAP
d. CRTDEVOPT
The answer is CRTDEVOPT.
to fo
3. Which of the following is not a supported console type?
a. Twinax console
ec ivo
b. Operations console
c. HMC
d. Wireless console
The answers are Twinax console and Wireless console.
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
IBM i
n
4. True or false: Ping is a basic problem determination tool of
TCP/IP.
ó
The answer is true.
.N ci
5. Which TCP/IP application is used to transfer data between
TCP/IP hosts?
.R a
a. Ping
C rm
b. Telnet
c. FTP
d. DNS
The answer is FTP.
to fo
6. True or false: Your Power Systems with IBM i can be a client
and a server at the same time.
ec ivo
The answer is true.

oy s
pr clu
Ex

Student Notebook
Unit 27, "Configuration with 5250 emulation"
n
IBM i
ó
1. Which system value is used to turn on the auto configuration of local hardware?
a. QSECURITY
.N ci
b. QPRTDEV
c. QAUTOCFG
d. *SYSCTL
.R a
The answer is QAUTOCFG.
C rm
2. Which system value is used to display the name of the system printer?
a. QSECURITY
b. QPRTDEV
c. QAUTOCFG
d. *SYSCTL
to fo
The answer is QPRTDEV.
3. Which command is used to display the status of your configuration?

a. WRKSYSSTS
ec ivo
b. WRKDSKSTS
c. WRKCFGSTS
d. WRKHDWSTS
The answer is WRKCFGSTS.
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
IBM i
4. True or false: The system operator message queue is the first place to
n
check if an end user is not able to connect to your system.
ó
The answer is true.
.N ci
5. Which of the following status information is not shown when using the work
with configuration status command (WRKCGFSTS)?
.R a
a. Line
b. Controller
C rm
c. Device
d. Disk
The answer is disk.
to fo
6. True or false: The work with hardware resources command (WRKHDWRSC)
shows status information for communication resources.
ec ivo
The answer is true.

oy s
pr clu
Ex

Student Notebook
Unit 28, "Configuration with IBM Navigator for i"
n
IBM i
ó
1. True or false: The Local controller and devices system value
is used to specify whether devices and controllers are
.N ci
The answer is true.
.R a
2. Which of the following can be configured with IBM Navigator
C rm
for i?
a. Processor
b. Memory
to fo
c. Disk units
d. LPAR
The answer is disk units.
ec ivo
3. True or false: With IBM Navigator for i, you can manage all
hardware resources in one place.
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
AP Unit 29, "Save concepts"
n
IBM i
ó
1. True or false: Objects that are considered temporary do not get saved
on the system.
.N ci
The answer is true.
.R a
2. When you save an object, which of the following is not saved?
a. Object name
C rm
b. Object type
c. Name of the object owner
d. Address of this data on disk
The answer is address of this data on disk.
to fo
3. Which of the following is supported media for a save operation?
a. Physical tape
b. Save file
c. Virtual tape
ec ivo
d. All of the above

The answer is All of the above.
oy s

pr clu
Ex

Student Notebook
Unit 30, "Save with 5250 emulation"
n
IBM i
ó
1. True or false: Running the display tape command, with the *LABELS
format, shows a listing by name of all of the objects that are saved on
.N ci
this tape.
.R a
2. Which of the following is not supported by the Duplicate Tape
(DUPTAP) command?
C rm
a. Duplicate virtual tape to physical tape
b. Duplicate physical tape to virtual tape
c. Duplicate virtual tape to save file
d. Duplicate only specific sequence items
to fo
The answer is duplicate virtual tape to save file.
3. On the Save menu, which option is used to save the entire system?
a. Option 20
ec ivo
b. Option 21
c. Option 22
d. Option 23
The answer is Option 21.
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
IBM i
n
4. True or false: The save changed objects command is used to
save only those objects that changed since the last save
ó
operation.
.N ci
The answer is True.
5. Which command is used to clear the contents of a save file?
.R a
a. DSPSAVF
C rm
b. INZSAVF
c. WRKSAVF
d. CLRSAVF
The answer is CLRSAVF.
to fo
6. True or false: Save menu option 21: Full system save, can
be performed to a virtual tape?
ec ivo
The answer is True.

oy s
pr clu
Ex

Student Notebook
Unit 31, "Save with IBM Navigator for i"
n
IBM i
ó
1. True or false: Setting up all of the support that is required for
virtual tape can be performed using IBM Navigator for i.
.N ci
The answer is true.
.R a
2. True or false: Installing BRMS allows you to back up objects
using IBM Navigator for i.
C rm
The answer is true.
3. How many virtual tape volumes can you create for virtual
to fo
tape?
a. 64
b. 128
c. 256
ec ivo
d. *nomax
The answer is 256.
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
AP Unit 32, "Restore concepts and overview"
n
IBM i
ó
1. Which command is used to restore configuration information?
a. RSTCFG
.N ci
b. RSTDLO
c. RSTLIB
d. RSTOBJ
.R a
The answer is RSTCFG.
C rm
2. Which of the following is not a supported restore device?
a. Physical tape
b. Virtual tape
c. Save file
to fo
d. All of the above
The answer is All of the above.
3. What type of IPL is required to restore the entire system?

a. A
ec ivo
b. B
c. C
d. D
The answer is D.
oy s

pr clu
Ex

Student Notebook
Unit 33, "Problem determination with 5250 emulation"
n
IBM i
ó
1. True or False: The system can be configured to perform automatic
problem determination and reporting to your service provider.
.N ci
The answer is true.
.R a
2. Which of the following commands display system status information?
a. WRKSYSSTS
C rm
b. WRKACTJOB
c. WRKDSKSTS
d. WRKUSRJOB
The answer is WRKSYSSTS.
to fo
3. Which of the following commands display information about your job?
a. WRKSYSSTS
b. WRKACTJOB
c. WRKDSKSTS
ec ivo
d. WRKUSRJOB
The answer is WRKACTJOB.
oy s

pr clu
Ex
V10.1
Student Notebook
AP Unit 34, "Overview of the PTF process"
n
IBM i
ó
1. True or false: A PTF or a fix is a temporary solution or bypass
of a defect in an IBM licensed program.
.N ci
The answer is True.
.R a
2. Which of the following is not one of the fix types available
from IBM?
C rm
a. Single fix
b. Cumulative package
c. Temporary correctional fix
to fo
d. Service pack
The answer is temporary correctional fix.
3. True or false: The recommendation is that cumulative fix

ec ivo
packs should only be installed before you upgrade the

software on your system.
oy s

pr clu
Ex

Student Notebook
Unit 35, "PTFs with 5250 emulation"
n
IBM i
ó
1. True or false: The GO PTFMNU command displays the PTF
menu.
.N ci
.R a
2. Which of the following is the command used to order a PTF?
C rm
a. CPYPTFCVR
b. INSPTF
c. SNDPTFORD
d. DSPPTFCVR
to fo
The answer is SNDPTFORD.
3. True or false: PTFs can be received either electronically or

ec ivo
on tape.
oy s

pr clu
Unit 36, "Class summary"

No checkpoint solutions in this unit.
Ex
V10.1
backpg
Ex Back page
pr clu
oy s
ec ivo
to fo
C rm
.R a
.N ci
ón
Ex
pr clu
oy s
ec ivo
to fo
C rm
.R a
.N ci
ón

As24 PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

As24 PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Business Data

Business Data Cloud Mobility

Dirección General de Formación

Comunidad de Madrid UNIÓN EUROPEA

IBM Training Front cover

February 2016 edition

© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2001, 2016.

Course description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi

Linux support (POWER and x86) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Hardware Management Console (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32

Unit 2. Reference material and support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Contents iii

Unit 3. Overview of 5250 emulation and help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1

Operational Assistant Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32

Information Assistant option two: How Can I Comment On Information? . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39

Unit 4. Overview of IBM i Access Client Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2

TOC Edit - Preferences (4 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

What is included: Base functions (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Web console interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

New controls overview (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

System status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Unit 6. Messaging concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Contents v

Types of messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3

Unit 7. Messaging using 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1

Unit 8. Messaging with IBM Navigator for i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1

Send Message: Send to users (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7

Send Message: Send to workstations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9

Customize: Include . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14

Unit 9. CL command concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-1

TOC Some other CL command facts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Unit 10. CL commands with 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Unit 11. Concepts: Object, library, and the IFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

IBM: Supplied libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13

Topic 3: Integrated file system concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21

Overview of the IFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23

Locating objects in the IFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30

Unit 12. Object management with 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Contents vii

Display Object Description command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-7

Schemas: New Schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-9

Display contents of schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-15

Topic 3: Object properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-17

Unit 14. Introduction to work management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-1

TOC Job name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8

Unit 15. Work management with 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

Unit 16. Job control with 5250 emulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2

Work with Submitted Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12

Ending a user job abnormally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-20

Unit 17. Job control with IBM Navigator for i. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2016 Contents ix

Active Jobs: Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-6

Work management overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-14

Unit 19. Print control with 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-1

Printer menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-3

Work with User Jobs: Spooled Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-5

Restarting a printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-11

Unit 20. IBM i Access Client Solutions Printer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-1

TOC Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4

Printers: Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-20

Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-26